ZXG10 IBSC (V8 00 20) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

ZXG10 iBSC
Base Station Controller

Radio Parameter Reference
Version:8.00.20
ZTE CORPORATION
NO. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
Fax: +86-755-26770801
URL: http://ensupport.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2011 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.
All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason
R1.0 20110130 First edition
Serial Number: SJ-20101208095348-017
Publishing Date: 20110130(R1.0)
Mo Shenghua
Contents
Preface............................................................................................................. I
Chapter 1 Overview .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Methods to Modify Radio Parameters .................................................................. 1-2
1.3 The Format to Explain Parameters ...................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Precautions on Parameter Adjustment................................................................. 1-7
Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters........................................................ 2-1

2.1 Radio Basic Property Parameters........................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt).................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Load indication allowed (LoadInd) ............................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 Send confusion message allowed (ConfusionMsg) ..................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Inter-Cell handover allowed (InHoEnable) .................................................. 2-4
2.1.5 Send assignment failure allowed (ExDRSendAssFail)................................. 2-5
2.1.6 Load indication valid time (LoadValidTime)................................................. 2-5
2.1.7 Load indication period (LoadIndPrd) .......................................................... 2-6
2.1.8 Automatic resource indication threshold (ResourceIndThs) ......................... 2-6
2.1.9 Resource adjust threshold (ResourceAdjustThs) ........................................ 2-8
2.1.10 BSC MAX reset number (BSCMaxResetNum).......................................... 2-8
2.1.11 HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) .......................................... 2-9
2.1.12 Range of BARANG................................................................................. 2-9
2.2 Other Parameters............................................................................................. 2-10
2.2.1 Length of super vision (LcsSuperVision) ...................................................2-11
2.2.2 Length of radio (LcsRadio) ...................................................................... 2-12
2.2.3 LCS wait intra BSS handover timer (LcsWaitInTraHO) .............................. 2-12
2.2.4 Monitor physical context request (RmsT9108, 100ms) .............................. 2-13
2.2.5 Timer for MSG waiting (TWaitMsg, 100ms) .............................................. 2-13
2.2.6 Timer for RANCSEST Waiting (TWaitRancsEst, 100ms) ........................... 2-14
2.2.7 Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting (TWaitRancsCleCom, 100ms) ............ 2-15
2.2.8 Timer for CCM waiting (CcmWaitTimer) ................................................... 2-15
2.2.9 Get static param timer (GetStaticParamTimer, 100ms).............................. 2-16
2.2.10 Starting time for oriented retry (RmsT10, 100ms).................................... 2-16
2.2.11 External cell load notify (Info_0_0) ......................................................... 2-17
2.2.12 Neighbor cell load valid duration (Info_0_1,10s) ..................................... 2-17
I
2.2.13 LMU build request deal or not (Info_1_0) ............................................... 2-18
2.2.14 MBMS request deal or not (Info_1_1) .................................................... 2-18
2.2.15 Channel request reserved field deal or not (Info_1_2) ............................. 2-19
2.2.16 MS power hold in handover option (Info_0_9)......................................... 2-19
2.2.17 Level threshold of target cell (Info_0_10)................................................ 2-20
2.2.18 Allow VGCS/VBS (GroupCallControl) .................................................... 2-21
2.2.19 Max times of Listener response fail (DetectRepeat) ................................ 2-21
2.2.20 Allow Shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET (PaControl)............. 2-22
2.2.21 Allow talker priority (TPInd) ................................................................... 2-23
2.2.22 Allow VGCS/VBS re-establishment (BscRes) ......................................... 2-23
2.2.23 Talker channel parameter (TalkerChanPara)........................................... 2-24
2.2.24 Allow A-interface link share (ALSInd) ..................................................... 2-25
2.2.25 Allow A-interface circuit share (ACSInd)................................................. 2-25
2.2.26 Allow send uplink request from RACH (RachULAcc)............................... 2-26
2.2.27 Threshold of priority for periodical FACCH notification (PriorityLevThs) ..... 2-27
2.2.28 TCH channel priority indicator (TCHPriorityInd) ...................................... 2-27
2.2.29 Allow paging on VGCS/VBS channel (InbandPaging) ............................. 2-28
2.2.30 Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel (InbandNotify) ................ 2-28
2.3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters.............................................................. 2-29
2.3.1 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable) ..................................................... 2-30
2.3.2 Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR (HRThs) ................................ 2-31
2.3.3 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs) ............................. 2-31
2.3.4 Support HR channel frag finishing (HRDfragSupport) ............................... 2-32
2.3.5 HR channel percentage threshold (HRTsPercentage) ............................... 2-32
2.3.6 User priority for EMLPP (PriThreshold) .................................................... 2-33
2.3.7 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeechVer H) ........................................ 2-34
2.3.8 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeedchVer F)....................................... 2-34
2.3.9 Reserved Channel First (RsvChanFirst)................................................... 2-35
2.3.10 EMLPP channel Reserved time (EMLPPThs, %) .................................... 2-35
2.3.11 TRX PS busy threshold (TrxPSBusyThs)................................................ 2-36
2.3.12 Resource pool for PS rate (PsAbisThs, %) ............................................. 2-36
2.3.13 Maximum PS uplink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_0)............................. 2-37
2.3.14 Maximum PS downlink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_1) ........................ 2-37
2.4 Timer 1 Parameters.......................................................................................... 2-38
2.4.1 Blocking/unblocking period (T1, 100ms)................................................... 2-38
2.4.2 Global Resetting Period (T4, 100ms) ....................................................... 2-39
2.4.3 Protection period for global resetting (T13, 100ms)................................... 2-40
II
2.4.4 Circuit resetting period on BSS side (T19, 100ms).................................... 2-40
2.4.5 Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period (T20, 100ms) ............................. 2-41
2.4.6 RLSD message receive protection timer (T9101, 100ms).......................... 2-42
2.4.7 Channel activation protection timer (RmsT9103, 100ms) .......................... 2-42
2.4.8 MSC clear command protection timer (T9104, 100ms).............................. 2-43
2.4.9 SCCP connection protection timer (T9105, 100ms) .................................. 2-43
2.4.10 Protective time waiting for access (RmsT1, 100ms) ................................ 2-44
2.4.11 Protective time for applying to channel (RmsT2, 100ms) ......................... 2-45
2.4.12 Protective time for link establishment response (RmsT3, 100ms)............. 2-45
2.4.13 Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM (RmsT4,
100ms)................................................................................................. 2-46
2.4.14 Encryption mode modification time (RmsT5, 100ms)............................... 2-47
2.4.15 SAPI3 link establishment time (RmsT6, 100ms) ..................................... 2-47
2.4.16 External handover protective time (RmsT8, 100ms) ................................ 2-48
2.4.17 Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection (T3,
100ms)................................................................................................. 2-49
2.4.18 Protective time that PO responses external handover completion
message (RmsT7, 100ms)..................................................................... 2-49
2.4.19 HBTS scan begin time (HBTSScanBT) .................................................. 2-50
2.4.20 HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s).............................................. 2-50
2.5 Timer 2 ............................................................................................................ 2-51
2.5.1 Protective time for RF channel release (RmsT9, 100ms)........................... 2-52
2.5.2 Queue period of assignment (RmsT11, 100ms) ........................................ 2-53
2.5.3 Acknowledgment interval for periodic status (RmsT12, 100ms) ................. 2-53
2.5.4 Mode modification process time (RmsT13, 100ms)................................... 2-54
2.5.5 Protective time of UM assignment completion (RmsT14, 100ms)............... 2-55
2.5.6 Waiting time for oriented retry (RmsT16, 100ms) ...................................... 2-55
2.5.7 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms).......................................... 2-56
2.5.8 First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (mT11, 100ms) ..................... 2-56
2.5.9 Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (mT12, 100ms) ................ 2-57
2.5.10 Time of Micro-Micro handover delay (Tmicro, 100ms) ............................. 2-58
2.5.11 BSIC decoding period (Tbsic, 100ms) .................................................... 2-58
2.5.12 Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD (RmsT3121, 100ms) ............ 2-59
2.5.13 Immediate assignment period (RmsT3101, 100ms) ................................ 2-60
2.5.14 Handover period of source cell (RmsT3103, 100ms)............................... 2-60
2.5.15 Assignment period (RmsT3107, 100ms) ................................................ 2-61
2.5.16 Channel release period (RmsT3109, 100ms).......................................... 2-62
2.5.17 Channel deactivation delay (RmsT3111, 100ms) .................................... 2-62
III
2.5.18 Continue Timer for mode modify (TModeModifyConn, 100ms)................. 2-63
2.5.19 Handover protecting time to UTRAN (mT7, 100ms) ................................ 2-64
2.5.20 Time of destination instance waiting for available resources when forced
disconnection (RmsT15, 100ms) ............................................................ 2-64
2.5.21 Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast
(BcProtect, 100ms) ............................................................................... 2-65
2.5.22 HO performed ack timer (TwaitHoPFMAck, 100ms) ................................ 2-65
2.5.23 Confirm BIPB fault time (TConfBIPBFault) ............................................. 2-66
2.5.24 Confirm BIPB DSP fault time (TConfBIPBDSPFault)............................... 2-67
2.5.25 Confirm Sunit normal time (TConfSunitNor)............................................ 2-67
2.5.26 Round trip delay (RtdDefault) ................................................................ 2-68
2.5.27 Listener detect period (Tdetect_period).................................................. 2-69
2.5.28 Waiting time of listener reply (Twait_detect)............................................ 2-69
2.5.29 Protective time of VGCS uplink request (Twait_rsp) ................................ 2-70
2.5.30 Broadcast period for additional info (T3153) ........................................... 2-71
2.5.31 Protective time of new token broadcast (T3155) ..................................... 2-71
2.5.32 Additional period for unused token (T3157) ............................................ 2-72
2.5.33 Report period for VGCS/VBS channel modification (Tast)........................ 2-73
2.5.34 Resend period for notification when NCH congestion
(TReSendNchCmd)............................................................................... 2-73
2.5.35 Timer of NCH congestion control (TNCHFlowCtl).................................... 2-74
2.6 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times Parameters ..................................................... 2-75
2.6.1 MAX times of BVC block retry (BVCBlkMax) ............................................ 2-75
2.6.2 MAX times of BVC unblock retry (BVCUnblkMax)..................................... 2-76
2.6.3 MAX times of BVC reset retry (BVCRestMax) .......................................... 2-77
2.6.4 MAX times of NS block retry (NSBlkMax)................................................. 2-77
2.6.5 MAX times of NS unblock retry (NSUnblkMax) ......................................... 2-78
2.6.6 MAX times of NS alive retry (NSAliveMax) ............................................... 2-79
2.6.7 MAX times of suspend retry (SuspendMax).............................................. 2-79
2.6.8 MAX times of resume retry (ResumeMax)................................................ 2-80
2.6.9 MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry (UpdateMax) ............. 2-81
2.6.10 MAX times of PFC create retry (DownLoadBssPFCMax) ........................ 2-82
2.6.11 MAX times of PFC modify retry (ModifyBssPFCMax) .............................. 2-82
2.7 GPRS Timer Parameters .................................................................................. 2-83
2.7.1 BVC block/unblock retry time (BssgpT1, 100ms) ...................................... 2-84
2.7.2 BVC reset retry time (BssgpT2, 100ms) ................................................... 2-84
2.7.3 Suspend retry time (BssgpT3, 100ms) ..................................................... 2-85
2.7.4 Resume retry time (BssgpT4, 100ms)...................................................... 2-85
IV
2.7.5 Access capability update retry time (BssgpT5, 100ms) ............................. 2-86
2.7.6 PFC creating retry time (BssgpT6, 100ms)............................................... 2-87
2.7.7 PFC modifying retry time (BssgpT8, 100ms) ............................................ 2-87
2.7.8 RIR Timer (TRIR, 100ms) ....................................................................... 2-88
2.7.9 RI Timer (TRI, 100ms) ............................................................................ 2-88
2.7.10 RIAE Timer (TRIAE, 100ms) ................................................................. 2-89
2.7.11 BVC flow control period (CellFcPer, 10ms) ............................................. 2-90
2.7.12 MS flow control period (MsFcPer, 10ms) ................................................ 2-90
2.7.13 Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure (NS_T1, s) ................... 2-91
2.7.14 Timer that monitors reset procedure (NS_T2, s) ..................................... 2-92
2.7.15 NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process (NS_T3, s) .......................................... 2-92
2.7.16 Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC (NS_T4, s) ........................... 2-93
2.7.17 MAX attempt period of reset (NS_T5, s)................................................. 2-94
2.7.18 TFI and USF release timer (T3169, 10ms) ............................................. 2-94
2.7.19 TBF release timer (T3191, 10ms) .......................................................... 2-95
2.7.20 TBF release time of downlink transmission (T3193, 10ms) ...................... 2-96
2.7.21 TBF protect time when radio link failure (T3195, 10ms) ........................... 2-96
2.7.22 PS channel delay release timer (PSRelDelay, 100ms) ............................ 2-97
2.8 AMR Half Method Parameters........................................................................... 2-98
2.8.1 AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)................................................ 2-98
2.8.2 Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds) ....................................................... 2-99
2.8.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)........................................................2-100
2.8.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM) ...............................................................2-101
2.8.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode) ...................................................................2-101
2.8.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) ..........................................................2-102
2.9 AMR Full Method Parameters ..........................................................................2-103
2.9.1 AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)................................................2-103
2.9.2 Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)........................................................2-104
2.9.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)........................................................2-105
2.9.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM) ...............................................................2-106
2.9.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode) ...................................................................2-106
2.9.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb) ..........................................................2-107
2.10 GPRS Property 1 Parameters ........................................................................2-108
2.10.1 Cn ......................................................................................................2-109
2.10.2 Nn ......................................................................................................2-109
2.10.3 Xn (%) ................................................................................................ 2-110
2.10.4 MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks
(N3101)............................................................................................... 2-111
V
2.10.5 Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries (N3103) ................................ 2-112
2.10.6 MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control
message (N3105) ................................................................................ 2-113
2.11 GPRS Property 2 Parameters......................................................................... 2-114
2.11.1 NACC supported (NACCSupport) ......................................................... 2-114
2.11.2 BSC's net operation mode (NMO)......................................................... 2-115
2.11.3 BSC support page coordination (PagCoordination) ................................ 2-116
2.11.4 Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication (IsSatelliteGB)............... 2-116
2.11.5 Extended RLC send window allowed (IsWindowExpend)........................ 2-117
2.11.6 Support TBF establish (TBF_EST)........................................................ 2-117
2.11.7 Support signal extended uplink TBF (Signal_EUTBF)............................. 2-118
2.11.8 Highest coding scheme of signal TBF (SigTBFMaxCode)....................... 2-118
2.11.9 Optimized PoC service support (PocSupport) ........................................ 2-119
2.11.10 Highest coding scheme of PoC service in GPRS (PocAttSelt_0) ...........2-120
2.11.11 Highest coding scheme of PoC service in EGPRS (PocAttSelt_1) .........2-120
2.11.12 Maximal users of PoC service on shared PS channel 0
(PSCapaThs_UL).................................................................................2-121
(PSCapaThs_DL).................................................................................2-121
2.11.14 SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 (LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15) ...............2-122
2.11.15 PDU buffer time (Info_1_16) ...............................................................2-123
2.12 BVC Flow Control Parameters........................................................................2-124
2.12.1 BVC flow control supported (BVCFlowCtrl)............................................2-124
2.12.2 MS flow control supported (MSFlowCtrl) ...............................................2-125
2.12.3 Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode) .......................................................2-126
2.12.4 Parameter of flow control mode1 (FlowCtrlMode1Para)..........................2-127
2.12.5 Parameter of flow control mode2 (FlowCtrlMode2Para)..........................2-127
2.12.6 BVC flow control R MIN value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps)....................2-128
2.12.7 MS flow control R MIN value (MSFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps) .......................2-128
2.12.8 Coefficient of BVC bucket size (Info_2_0) .............................................2-129
2.12.9 Coefficient of MS bucket (Info_2_16) ....................................................2-130
2.12.10 CBL in BVC/MS flow control (Info_1_9)...............................................2-130
2.12.11 Support of PFC flow control procedures (PFCFlowCtrl) ........................2-131
2.13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ................................................................2-131
2.13.1 Flow Control Reason ...........................................................................2-132
2.13.2 Emergency Call...................................................................................2-133
2.13.3 Call Rebuilt .........................................................................................2-133
2.13.4 Call Response.....................................................................................2-134
VI
2.13.5 Calling ................................................................................................2-134
2.13.6 Location Update ..................................................................................2-135
2.13.7 GPRS Access .....................................................................................2-136
2.13.8 Restore...............................................................................................2-136
2.13.9 Flow control map slim adjust (bit)..........................................................2-137
2.14 EDGE Property Parameters ...........................................................................2-137
2.14.1 R99 Ind (R99Ind).................................................................................2-138
2.14.2 Support of enhanced radio status procedures (EnRadioStu)...................2-139
2.14.3 RS......................................................................................................2-140
2.14.4 RR .....................................................................................................2-140
2.14.5 RA......................................................................................................2-141
2.14.6 RM .....................................................................................................2-141
2.14.7 RB......................................................................................................2-142
2.14.8 RG .....................................................................................................2-142
2.14.9 RE......................................................................................................2-143
2.14.10 ABIS resource dynamic manage (Info_1_8) ........................................2-143
2.15 eMLPP Set ...................................................................................................2-144
2.15.1 Strategy for preemption when assign (AssPreemptstrategy)...................2-144
2.15.2 Strategy for preemption when handover (HoPreemptstrategy) ................2-145
2.15.3 Maximum forced handover times when assign (AssForcedHoTry) ..........2-146
2.15.4 Maximum forced handover times when handover (HoForcedHoTry) .......2-146
2.15.5 Maximum forced release times when assign (AssForcedRelTry).............2-147
2.15.6 Maximum forced release times when handover (HoForcedRelTry)..........2-147
2.15.7 Preemption duration when assign (AssPreempTimer, 100ms) ................2-148
2.15.8 Preemption duration when handover (HoPreempTimer, 100ms) .............2-148
2.15.9 Timer for start forced release when assign (AssForceRelTimer)..............2-149
2.15.10 Timer for start forced release when handover (HoForceRelTimer).........2-150
2.15.11 Interval for search forced handover target when assign
(AssForceHoInterval, 100ms) ...............................................................2-150
2.15.12 Interval for search forced handover target when handover
(HoForceHoInterval, 100ms).................................................................2-151
2.15.13 Interval for search forced release target when assign
(AssForceRelInterval, 100ms)...............................................................2-151
2.15.14 Interval for search forced release target when handover
(HoForceRelInterval, 100ms) ................................................................2-152
2.15.15 Queue timer for assign (RmsT11, 100ms) ...........................................2-152
2.15.16 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms) .....................................2-153
2.15.17 Queue indicate when assign (QueueIndAss) .......................................2-154
VII
2.15.18 Queue allowed when handover (QueueIndHo) ....................................2-154
2.15.19 Forced release indicate when assign (PreemptionIndAss) ....................2-155
2.15.20 Forced release allowed when handover (PreemptionIndHo) .................2-155
2.15.21 Forced handover indication for assign (ForcedHolndAss) .....................2-156
2.15.22 Forced handover indication for handover (ForcedHolndHo) ..................2-156
2.15.23 Wait resource timer after forced handover ...........................................2-157
2.15.24 Wait resource timer after forced release ..............................................2-157
2.15.25 Enough low priority for preemption (LowestPriority)..............................2-158
2.15.26 Enough call duration for preemption (LongCallDuration).......................2-159
2.15.27 Forced handover target penalty time (ForceHoPenalty)........................2-159
2.15.28 Priority of emergency service (EmergServicelPrio)...............................2-160
2.15.29 Preempt Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker
(DChlVBSTalkerPPri) ...........................................................................2-160
2.15.30 Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with Talker
(VGChlNOTalkerPPri)...........................................................................2-161
2.15.31 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker
(DChlVGTalkerPPri) .............................................................................2-162
2.15.32 Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with no Talker
(VGChlNOTalkerPPri)...........................................................................2-163
2.15.33 Preempt Priority of VBS Channel (VBChlNOTalkerPPri) .......................2-163
2.15.34 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data
(DChlP2PDataPPri)..............................................................................2-164
2.15.35 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech
(DChlP2PSpeechPPri) .........................................................................2-165
2.15.36 ForceHO priority of VGCS Channel with Talker
(VGChlVGTalkerHPri)...........................................................................2-166
2.15.37 ForceHO Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker
(DChlVBSTalkerHPri) ...........................................................................2-166
2.15.38 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker
(DChlVGTalkerHPri) .............................................................................2-167
2.15.39 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data
(DChlP2PDataHPri) .............................................................................2-168
2.15.40 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech
(DChlP2PSpeechHPri) .........................................................................2-169
Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters.......................................................... 3-1

3.1 GERAN External Cell Parameters ....................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 External cell ID......................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Cell type (CellType) .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 MCC (MCC)............................................................................................. 3-3
VIII
3.1.4 MNC (MNC)............................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.5 Frequency band (FreqBand) ..................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6 BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn).................................................................... 3-4
3.1.7 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.8 CI (CI) ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.9 NCC (NCC).............................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.10 BCC (BCC) ............................................................................................ 3-7
3.1.11 GPRS service supported (PsSupport) ...................................................... 3-7
3.1.12 Reselection offset (ReselOff_0) ............................................................... 3-8
3.1.13 Reselection offset (ReselOff_1) ............................................................... 3-9
3.1.14 Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_0, dB) ................................... 3-10
3.1.15 Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_1, dB) ................................... 3-10
3.1.16 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s) .................................3-11
3.1.17 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_1, 10s) ................................ 3-12
3.1.18 HSC exist (HCS_EXIST_0) ................................................................... 3-12
3.1.19 HSC Exist (HCS_EXIST_1)................................................................... 3-13
3.1.20 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR_0)......................................... 3-14
3.1.21 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR_1)......................................... 3-14
3.1.22 HCS priority (PrioClass_0) .................................................................... 3-15
3.1.23 HCS priority (PrioClass_1) .................................................................... 3-16
3.1.24 Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC) ............................................... 3-16
3.1.25 Cell reselection status (CellBarAc2) ....................................................... 3-17
3.1.26 LSA ID (LSA_Id)................................................................................... 3-17
3.1.27 RAC .................................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.28 GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin_0) ............................. 3-18
3.1.29 GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin_1) ............................. 3-19
3.1.30 GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_0) ........................ 3-20
3.1.31 GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_1) ........................ 3-21
3.2 UTRAN External Cell Parameters...................................................................... 3-22
3.2.1 External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID) ................................................................. 3-23
3.2.2 UTRAN cell type (CellType3G) ................................................................ 3-24
3.2.3 MCC (MCC)........................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.4 MNC (MNC)........................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.5 UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)............................................................ 3-25
3.2.6 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................. 3-26
3.2.7 RNC ID (RNC_ID) .................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.8 C ID (C_ID)............................................................................................ 3-27
IX
3.2.9 Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara) ............................. 3-28
3.2.10 TX diversity indication (DiverSity) .......................................................... 3-29
3.2.11 RAC .................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.12 UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G) .................................... 3-30
3.2.13 Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD) ....................................................... 3-30
Chapter 4 Cell Parameters......................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Basic Parameters 1 ............................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 BTS ID (BtsId).......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Cell type (CellType) .................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.3 MCC (MCC)............................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4 MNC (MNC)............................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.5 LAC (LAC) ............................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.6 CI (CI) ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.7 NCC (NCC).............................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.8 BCC (BCC) .............................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.9 Frequency band (FreqBand) ..................................................................... 4-7
4.1.10 ARFCN list (CaArfcnList) ........................................................................ 4-7
4.1.11 Support GPRS (PsSupport)..................................................................... 4-8
4.1.12 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)...................................................... 4-8
4.1.13 Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara).............................. 4-9
4.1.14 CBC support (SmsCbUsed) .................................................................... 4-9
4.1.15 Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR (HRThs, %) ................ 4-10
4.1.16 PS busy threshold (Info_1_16) ...............................................................4-11
4.1.17 Use cell dynamic AMR parameter (UseCellAMRParam).......................... 4-12
4.1.18 Common control channel configuration (CcchConf) ................................ 4-12
4.1.19 Template file......................................................................................... 4-14
4.2 Basic Parameters 2 .......................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.1 TA MAX (TaMax) .................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.2 TA MIN (TaMin) ...................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.3 TA allowed (TaAllowed)........................................................................... 4-16
4.2.4 PCH load indication period (CcchLoadIndPrd).......................................... 4-17
4.2.5 Periodical location updating timer (T3212, 360s) ...................................... 4-17
4.2.6 Protection period for access attempt (T3122, s)........................................ 4-18
4.2.7 Multiband report indication (MulbandReport) ............................................ 4-19
4.2.8 Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access (RachAccessMin,
-db) ...................................................................................................... 4-21
4.2.9 CCCH load indication threshold (RACH) (CcchLoadINDThs_0) ................. 4-21
X
4.2.10 CCCH load indication threshold (PCH) (CcchLoadINDThs_1) ................. 4-22
4.2.11 8PSK modulating power attenuation level (Tn7Lowerlevel, 0.2db)............ 4-22
4.2.12 Support Repeated ACCH (RepeatACCH)............................................... 4-23
4.2.13 Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR
(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR) ................................................................... 4-23
4.2.14 Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR
(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRHR) ................................................................... 4-24
4.2.15 AMR Codec Adjust Mode (AmrAdjMode) ............................................... 4-25
4.2.16 AMR Codec adjust interval (AmrAdjInterval, 480ms) ............................... 4-25
4.2.17 Support HR channel frag collected (HRDfragSupport)............................. 4-26
4.2.18 Threshold of HR Defrag (HRDefragThs)................................................. 4-26
4.2.19 Percentage of HR Ts (HRTsPercentage) ................................................ 4-27
4.2.20 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs) ........................... 4-27
4.2.21 FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load (FRThrHoSupport)...................... 4-28
4.2.22 Start PA Output Voltage Tuning (Info_0_0) ............................................. 4-29
4.2.23 NCC permitted (NccPermitted) .............................................................. 4-29
4.3 Basic Parameters 3 .......................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.1 Average bursts count surveyed by RACH (AvgSlots) ................................ 4-30
4.3.2 Threshold of RACH receiving signal level (RachBuysThs)......................... 4-31
4.3.3 RACH load indication period (OverloadPrd, s) .......................................... 4-31
4.3.4 BA Show (BcchBaInd) ............................................................................ 4-32
4.3.5 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin) ............................ 4-33
4.3.6 MAX number of re-transmitting events times (MRetrans)........................... 4-34
4.3.7 Number of slots to spread transmission (TxInteger) .................................. 4-35
4.3.8 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)............................... 4-36
4.3.9 Number of multiframes of the PCH (BsPaMframe).................................... 4-37
4.3.10 Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message (T3105d, 10ms)............ 4-38
4.3.11 Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message (T3105f, 10ms).............. 4-39
4.3.12 MAX resending times for physical information (NY1)............................... 4-40
4.3.13 Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes) .............................. 4-41
4.3.14 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel (T200_0, 5ms) ...................... 4-41
4.3.15 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel (T200_1, 5ms) ........... 4-42
4.3.16 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel (T200_2, 5ms).......... 4-42
4.3.17 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel (T200_3,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.18 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel (T200_4,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.19 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel (T200_5, 5ms) ............. 4-44
XI
4.3.20 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel (T200_6,
10ms)................................................................................................... 4-45
4.4 Optional Parameters......................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.1 Early category classmark sending control (ECSC) .................................... 4-46
4.4.2 IMSI attach/detach allowed (ImsIadAllowed) ............................................ 4-47
4.4.3 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess).............................................................. 4-48
4.4.4 Call re-establishment allowed (CallReestablish) ....................................... 4-48
4.4.5 Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed (DtxDwlink) ........................ 4-49
4.4.6 Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch) .................................. 4-50
4.4.7 Emergency call allowed (EmergencyCall) ................................................ 4-50
4.4.8 Cell bar qualify (CellBarQualify)............................................................... 4-51
4.4.9 Access control (AccessControl)............................................................... 4-52
4.4.10 HBTS preofread support (HBTSScanSupport)........................................ 4-53
4.4.11 RSSI threshold (RSSlThrd) ................................................................... 4-54
4.4.12 Preofread freqband type (GSM1900Support) ......................................... 4-54
4.4.13 Range of HBTS BARANG ..................................................................... 4-55
4.5 Cell Selection Parameters................................................................................. 4-56
4.5.1 Additional reselection parameter indication (AdditionReselPI) ................... 4-56
4.5.2 Cell reselection parameter indication (CellReselPI)................................... 4-57
4.5.3 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset,2db) .................................................. 4-58
4.5.4 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset, 10dB) ............................................... 4-59
4.5.5 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s) .............................................................. 4-60
4.5.6 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ReselHysteresis, 2dB)............................ 4-61
4.5.7 New setup cause indication (NECI) ......................................................... 4-62
4.5.8 Power offset indication (PowerOffsetInd).................................................. 4-63
4.5.9 Power offset (PowerOffset, 2dB) ............................................................. 4-64
4.5.10 Position of NCH channel (NchPosition) .................................................. 4-64
4.5.11 Max times of VGCS UPLINK GRANT sending (Ny2) ............................... 4-65
4.5.12 Protective time for Listener establishment link (T3115) ............................ 4-66
4.5.13 Allow send uplink request from RACH for cell (SupRachULAcc) .............. 4-67
4.5.14 FACCH notification period (TNotify_FACCH) .......................................... 4-68
4.5.15 Allow periodical FACCH notification on dedicated channel
(Notify_P2PInd) .................................................................................... 4-68
4.5.16 Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel (InbandNotify) ................ 4-69
4.5.17 Broadcast period for uplink busy (T3151) ............................................... 4-70
4.5.18 Broadcast period for uplink free (TULFree)............................................. 4-70
4.6 Service Process Additional Parameters ............................................................. 4-71
4.6.1 Directed retry indication (DrInd_0) ........................................................... 4-72
XII
4.6.2 Inter directed retry indication (DrInd_1) .................................................... 4-73
4.6.3 Queue allowed when assign (QueueInd_0) .............................................. 4-73
4.6.4 Queue allowed when handover (QueueInd_1).......................................... 4-74
4.6.5 Preemption allowed when assign (PreemptionInd_0) ................................ 4-74
4.6.6 Preemption allowed when handover (PreemptionInd_1)............................ 4-75
4.6.7 When assigned forced handover (ForcedHoInd_0) ................................... 4-75
4.6.8 When handover forced handover (ForcedHoInd_1) .................................. 4-76
4.6.9 Number of candidate cells for handover (CandidateNum).......................... 4-77
4.6.10 Fast average indication (FastAvg) ......................................................... 4-77
4.6.11 BCCH switch allowed (CanBcchExch).................................................... 4-78
4.6.12 SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed (CanSdcchDyn) ......................... 4-78
4.6.13 Minimal resource threshold (ResourceThs, %) ....................................... 4-79
4.6.14 Baseband hopping TRX exchange support (Info_0_3) ............................ 4-79
4.6.15 Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call (FacchCallInd_0) ........... 4-80
4.6.16 Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond (FacchCallInd_1) ............ 4-81
4.6.17 Allowed call setup on FACCH (FacchCallInd_2) ..................................... 4-81
4.6.18 Allowed call reestablished on FACCH (FacchCallInd_3).......................... 4-82
4.7 System Parameters .......................................................................................... 4-82
4.7.1 Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd) ............................................ 4-83
4.7.2 Interference Band Boundary (InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5) .......... 4-84
4.7.3 Radio link timeout on MS side (MsRadioLKTmOut) .................................. 4-85
4.7.4 Radio link failure criterion (ConFailCriterion) ............................................ 4-85
4.7.5 Radio link timeout on BSS side (BsRadioLKTmOut) ................................. 4-86
4.7.6 Receiving level threshold (RxLevThs) ...................................................... 4-87
4.7.7 Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs) ................................................. 4-88
4.7.8 Radio link failure checking period (RxLevQualprd).................................... 4-89
4.8 Other Parameters............................................................................................. 4-89
4.8.1 Preprocessing indication (Preprocess)..................................................... 4-90
4.8.2 Reserved Rate of eMLPP (EmlppThs) ..................................................... 4-91
4.8.3 Use cell EMLPP Threshold (UseCellEmlppThs) ....................................... 4-92
4.8.4 Support frequency offset correct (Info_0_1).............................................. 4-92
4.8.5 Support maximum power on handover command (Info_0_2) ..................... 4-93
4.8.6 Cell Support Encryption Mode (CipherMode)............................................ 4-93
4.8.7 Channel Select Strategy ......................................................................... 4-94
4.9 GPRS Basic Parameters .................................................................................. 4-95
4.9.1 SGSN ID (SGSNID) ............................................................................... 4-95
4.9.2 NSEI (NSEI) .......................................................................................... 4-96
XIII
4.9.3 BVCI (BVCI) .......................................................................................... 4-96
4.9.4 RAC ...................................................................................................... 4-97
4.9.5 PS service busy level (PsBusyLevel) ....................................................... 4-98
4.10 GPRS Other Parameters 1.............................................................................. 4-99
4.10.1 Additional reselect parameter indicator (AddResPI2) .............................. 4-99
4.10.2 SI13 sending position (Si13Locate).......................................................4-100
4.10.3 Route area code (RAC) .......................................................................4-101
4.10.4 Minimal number of idle CS channel (CsChansThs) ................................4-101
4.10.5 Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr) ...........................................4-102
4.10.6 Packet System Information Send Speed (SendSpeed)...........................4-103
4.10.7 Overload report period on PRACH (OvLoadPer, s) ................................4-103
4.10.8 Link error counter (RLTimeout) .............................................................4-104
4.10.9 PRACH receive signal level threshold (PrachBusyT)..............................4-104
4.10.10 Average measuring bursts number on PRACH (MeaAvgSlot) ...............4-105
4.10.11 Buffer threshold of paging message (PccchIndTh_0, %).......................4-106
4.10.12 Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period (PccchIndTh_1,
%).......................................................................................................4-106
4.10.13 PRACH overload threshold ratio (PccchIndTh_2, %)............................4-107
4.11 GPRS Other Parameters 2 .............................................................................4-108
4.11.1 Support CCN mode (CCNActive) ..........................................................4-109
4.11.2 Cell support system message status flow (SIStatusInd)..........................4-109
4.11.3 Allow SOLSA MS to access (Exc_Acc) ................................................. 4-110
4.11.4 CCCH SplitPgCycle support (SpgcSuport) ............................................ 4-110
4.11.5 Extended paging supported (EpageMode)............................................. 4-111
4.11.6 PSI status supported (PsiStatInd) ......................................................... 4-112
4.11.7 Cell support extendable uplink TBF (Ext_UTBF) .................................... 4-112
4.11.8 Uplink delay time (UIDelayTime, ms)..................................................... 4-113
4.11.9 Downlink delay time (DIDelaytime, ms) ................................................. 4-113
4.11.10 Extend uplink TBF time (ExtUITBFTime, ms) ....................................... 4-114
4.11.11 Interval number of GPRS TBF downlinks RRBP
(GPRSDIRrbpInterVal) ......................................................................... 4-115
4.11.12 Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP
(EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal) ....................................................................... 4-115
4.11.13 Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK (GPRSUIAckInterVal)........ 4-116
4.11.14 Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK
(EGPRSUIAckInterVal)......................................................................... 4-116
4.11.15 Single Block Assign Offset (SBAssOffset)............................................ 4-117
4.11.16 Polling retry times (PollingRetryTime).................................................. 4-117
XIV
4.11.17 Uplink measure report period (Ulmeasureperiod, ms) ........................... 4-118
4.11.18 Calculating period of load on PPCH (LoadPer, s) ................................. 4-118
4.11.19 PSI1 send period (Psi1RepPer) .......................................................... 4-119
4.11.20 Selective granularity (USFGranularity).................................................4-120
4.11.21 Abis timeslots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0) ...........................4-120
4.11.22 The MAX of Abis for GPRS user (Info_1_8) .........................................4-121
4.11.23 EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1 (Info1_1_0) ...........4-121
4.11.24 GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1 (Info1_1_4) ...........4-122
4.12 GPRS Other Parameters 3.............................................................................4-123
4.12.1 C/I (Sc) ...............................................................................................4-123
4.12.2 ARP (Sa) ............................................................................................4-124
4.12.3 THP (St) .............................................................................................4-125
4.12.4 Support PS Queuing (PsQueueInd) ......................................................4-126
4.12.5 Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum) ......................................4-127
4.12.6 Support PS Preemption (PsPreemptionInd)...........................................4-127
4.12.7 Support 3G NACC (Support3GCCN) ....................................................4-128
4.12.8 Support PS Prmp CS (PSPrmpCSSupport) ...........................................4-128
4.12.9 Maximal resource for POC service (POCSrcThs,%)...............................4-129
4.12.10 Transform from uplink delay to extend (Info1_1_16).............................4-129
4.12.11 Max Num of resend packet assignment (Info1_1_8) .............................4-130
4.12.12 Resource adjust for CS preempt (Info1_1_17) .....................................4-131
4.12.13 Subcell selection of PS channel allocation (PSALLOCSC_0) ................4-132
4.12.14 RXLEV threshold in subcell 1 (PSALLOCSC_1) ..................................4-132
4.12.15 RXLEV threshold in subcell 2 (PSALLOCSC_2) ..................................4-133
4.13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters......................................................................4-134
4.13.1 T3168 (s) ............................................................................................4-135
4.13.2 T3192(ms) ..........................................................................................4-136
4.13.3 T3142(s) .............................................................................................4-137
4.13.4 T3172(s) .............................................................................................4-137
4.13.5 DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)..............................................4-138
4.13.6 MAX blocks transmission in each TS (BsCvMax)...................................4-138
4.13.7 Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)...............................4-139
4.13.8 Access burst type (AccessType) ...........................................................4-140
4.13.9 N3102 decrease step (PanDec)............................................................4-140
4.13.10 N3102 increase step (PanInc) ............................................................4-141
4.13.11 N3102 MAX (PanMax) .......................................................................4-142
4.13.12 GPRS phone init coding .....................................................................4-143
XV
4.13.13 GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0) .................4-144
4.14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters........................................................................4-144
4.14.1 Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)..........................................................4-145
4.14.2 Packet transmission mode (NcRerPerT, s) ............................................4-146
4.14.3 Extended measurement report order (MeaOrder) ..................................4-146
4.14.4 Network control order (CtrlOrder)..........................................................4-147
4.14.5 NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s).....................................4-148
4.14.6 Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder) ..............................4-148
4.14.7 Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType) ............................4-149
4.14.8 Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)........................4-150
4.14.9 The Size of Test Report's Slip Window (Wnd) ........................................4-151
4.14.10 Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window
(AllowedRepNum)................................................................................4-151
4.15 GPRS Power Control Parameters...................................................................4-152
4.15.1 Filter period in the packet idle mode (T_AVG_W, s) ...............................4-152
4.15.2 Filter period in packet transmission mode (T_AVG_T, s).........................4-153
4.15.3 PSI4 sending mark (Psi4Send).............................................................4-154
4.15.4 Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan).............................4-154
4.15.5 Power control parameter (Alpha) ..........................................................4-155
4.15.6 Filter constant of power control (N_AVG_I)............................................4-156
4.16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters................................................................4-156
4.16.1 Reselection offset (ReselOff_0) ............................................................4-157
4.16.2 Reselection offset 2 (ReselOff_1) .........................................................4-158
4.16.3 Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_0, dB) ..................................4-159
4.16.4 Reselection temporary offset 2 (TempOffset_1, dB) ...............................4-159
4.16.5 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s) ...............................4-160
4.16.6 Penalty time of cell reselection 2 (PenalTime_1, 10s).............................4-161
4.16.7 Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_Resel_0, s) ...............................4-162
4.16.8 Interval of reselecting the same cell 2 (T_Resel_1, s) ............................4-162
4.16.9 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_Thr_0)..........................................4-163
4.16.10 Threshold of HSC signal level 2 (HCS_Thr_1) .....................................4-164
4.16.11 HCS priority (PrioClass_0)..................................................................4-164
4.16.12 HCS priority 2 (PrioClass_1)...............................................................4-165
4.16.13 C31 hysteresis (C31_Hyst_0) .............................................................4-165
4.16.14 C31 hysteresis 2 (C31_Hyst_1) ..........................................................4-166
4.16.15 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys_0, dB) .............................4-167
4.16.16 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2 (ReselHys_1, dB) ..........................4-168
4.16.17 Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys_0, dB).............................4-169
XVI
4.16.18 Routing reselection hysteresis 2 (RaReselHys_1, dB) ..........................4-169
4.16.19 Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry_0).............................4-170
4.16.20 Random access attempt permitted 2 (RadAcRetry_1) ..........................4-171
4.16.21 Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_Qual_0) .....................................4-171
4.16.22 Usage of cell reselection offset 2 (C32_Qual_1) ..................................4-172
4.16.23 GPRS access minimum signal level 1 (RxLevAsMin_0) .......................4-173
4.16.24 GPRS access minimum signal level 2 (RxLevAsMin_1) .......................4-173
4.16.25 Priority threshold (Prio_Thr, dB)..........................................................4-174
4.16.26 HCS exist (HCS_Exist_0)...................................................................4-175
4.16.27 HCS exist 2 (HCS_Exist_1) ................................................................4-176
4.16.28 GPRS MAX initial access signal level 1 (MsTxMaxCch_0)....................4-176
4.16.29 GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2 (MsTxMaxCch_1)....................4-177
4.16.30 LSA ID (LSA_Id)................................................................................4-178
4.16.31 LSA Offset (LSA_Offset) ....................................................................4-179
4.17 GPRS Channel Parameters ...........................................................................4-180
4.17.1 PAGCH reserved blocks (PagBlkRes)...................................................4-180
4.17.2 PBCCH reserved blocks (PbcchBlks)....................................................4-181
4.17.3 PRACH reserved blocks (PrachBlks) ....................................................4-182
4.17.4 Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)......................................4-182
4.17.5 Interval period of packet access attempt (S) ..........................................4-183
4.17.6 MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans) ....................................................4-184
4.17.7 Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass).....................................................4-184
4.17.8 Access Persist Level (PersistLev).........................................................4-185
4.17.9 Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel
(HybridOccuSupp) ...............................................................................4-186
4.17.10 Support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel
(AllowPsMove).....................................................................................4-187
4.17.11 Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level
(AllowCsMove) ....................................................................................4-187
4.17.12 Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (SfPreferBusyThs, %) ......4-188
4.17.13 Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving (OpPreferBusyThs) ......4-188
4.18 EDGE Property Parameters ...........................................................................4-189
4.18.1 Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame (GttpLapdmNum) ...........................4-190
4.18.2 Support EGPRS packet channel request access program
(EgprsPacketChreq).............................................................................4-191
4.18.3 Support uplink LA+IR quality control (IrSupportUp) ..............................4-191
4.18.4 Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function (PreemptiveRans)...........................4-192
4.18.5 Average filter period for uplink BEP (BEPperiodUp) ...............................4-193
XVII
4.18.6 Average filter period for downlink BEP (BEPperiodDown).......................4-193
4.18.7 EGPRS phone quality measure mode (LinkQuameaMode) ....................4-194
4.18.8 EGPRS Phone Init Coding ...................................................................4-194
4.18.9 EGPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_1).................4-195
Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters............................................................. 5-1

5.1 TRX Parameters ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 TRX Info Parameters................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Channel Info Parameters .......................................................................... 5-8
5.1.3 IP Parameters........................................................................................ 5-16
5.1.4 Panel Parameters .................................................................................. 5-18
5.2 Power Control Parameters ................................................................................ 5-22
5.2.1 Power Control Parameters ...................................................................... 5-22
5.2.2 Power Survey Parameters ...................................................................... 5-24
5.2.3 Power Adjust Threshold Parameters........................................................ 5-32
5.2.4 Other Parameters................................................................................... 5-38
5.2.5 GPRS Power Control Parameters ........................................................... 5-44
5.3 Handover Control Parameters ........................................................................... 5-48
5.3.1 Handover Pretreatment Parameters ........................................................ 5-48
5.3.2 Handover Level Parameters.................................................................... 5-57
5.3.3 Handover Condition Parameters.............................................................. 5-67
5.3.4 Handover Control Parameters ................................................................. 5-75
5.3.5 Other Parameters................................................................................... 5-86
5.3.6 Handover Arithmetic Parameters............................................................. 5-95
5.3.7 Subcell Parameters ...............................................................................5-106
5.4 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters ............................................................. 5-111
5.4.1 Basic Properties 1 Parameters ............................................................... 5-111
5.4.2 Basic Properties 2 Parameters ............................................................... 5-117
5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ......................................................................5-124
5.5.1 Basic Properties 1 Parameters ...............................................................5-124
5.5.2 Basic Properties 2 Parameters ...............................................................5-134
5.5.3 GPRS Parameters 1..............................................................................5-147
5.5.4 GPRS Parameters 2..............................................................................5-158
5.6 Adjacent Cell Parameters ................................................................................5-168
5.6.1 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters....................................................5-169
5.6.2 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ..............................5-170
5.6.3 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters .......................................................5-187
5.6.4 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ....................................................5-202
XVIII
5.6.5 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters..................5-204
5.6.6 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters........................................... 5-211
5.6.7 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters........................................5-215
5.7 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ...........................................................5-219
5.7.1 Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)..............................................................5-219
5.7.2 Hopping sequence No. (HSN)................................................................5-220
5.7.3 Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode) ..............................................5-221
5.7.4 BhGroupId ............................................................................................5-221
5.7.5 MA frequency list (MaFreqNum) .............................................................5-222
Appendix A Value Range of Flow Control Policy ................................... A-1

Appendix B Value Range of Power .......................................................... B-1
Appendix C Value Range of Cell Layer Num........................................... C-1
Appendix D Relation between Parameter Interface and Database
Value....................................................................................................... D-1
D.1 BSC Function Parameters Interface ....................................................................D-1
D.1.1 Basic Property Parameters.......................................................................D-1
D.1.2 Radio Basic Property Parameters .............................................................D-4
D.1.3 Others.....................................................................................................D-4
D.1.4 AMR Half Method Parameters ..................................................................D-5
D.1.5 AMR Full Method Parameters...................................................................D-6
D.1.6 GPRS Property 1 Parameters...................................................................D-6
D.1.7 GPRS Property 2 Parameters...................................................................D-7
D.1.8 EDGE Property Parameters .....................................................................D-7
D.2 GERAN External Cell Parameters Interface .........................................................D-8
D.3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters Interface .........................................................D-8
D.4 Cell Parameters Interface...................................................................................D-9
D.4.1 Basic Params 1 .......................................................................................D-9
D.4.2 Basic Params 2 ..................................................................................... D-10
D.4.3 Other Parameters .................................................................................. D-10
D.4.4 System Parameters ............................................................................... D-10
D.4.5 GPRS Property 1 Parameters................................................................. D-11
D.4.6 GPRS Cell Options Parameters .............................................................. D-11
D.4.7 GPRS NC Survey Parameters ................................................................ D-14
D.4.8 GPRS Power Control Parameters ........................................................... D-15
D.4.9 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ........................................................ D-16
D.4.10 GPRS Channel Parameters.................................................................. D-17
D.4.11 EDGE Property Parameters.................................................................. D-19
XIX
D.5 Cell Object Parameters Interface ...................................................................... D-19
D.5.1 TRX Info Parameters ............................................................................. D-19
D.5.2 Channel Info Parameters........................................................................ D-20
D.5.3 Power Control Parameters ..................................................................... D-21
D.5.4 Handover Control Parameters ................................................................ D-22
D.5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters............................................................. D-23
D.5.6 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters .................................................... D-24
D.5.7 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters............................... D-25
D.5.8 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ....................................................... D-25
D.5.9 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ................................................. D-26
Figures............................................................................................................. I
Glossary .........................................................................................................V
XX
Preface
About this Manual
This manual introduces the ZXG10 BSS radio parameters for radio configuration and
commissioning.
Audience
l System Engineer
l Commissioning Engineer
l Maintenance Engineer
Content
This manual has the following chapters.
Chapter Name Overview
Chapter 1, Overview Introduces the scope, description methods, and adjustment cautions
for radio parameters.
Chapter 2, BSC Function Introduces the BSC function parameters.

Parameters
Chapter 3, External Cell Introduces the GERAN external cell parameters and UTRAN external
Parameters cell parameters.
Chapter 4, Cell Parameters Introduces the cell parameters in the BSS system.
Chapter 5, Cell Object Introduces the cell object parameters in the BSS system.
Parameters
Appendix A ~ C, Value Tables Introduces the data values and settings in the BSS system.
Appendix D, Corresponding Introduces the relation between radio parameter interface and
Relationship between database value in the BSS system.
Parameter Interface Display
and Database Value
I
II
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter explains the definition and classification of radio parameters in GSM network,
modification methods of radio parameters, explanation format of radio parameters, and
precautions in radio parameters adjustment.
Table of Contents
Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters .......................................................................1-1
Methods to Modify Radio Parameters.........................................................................1-2
The Format to Explain Parameters .............................................................................1-6
Precautions on Parameter Adjustment .......................................................................1-7
1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters

900/1800 MHz TDMA digital celluar mobile communication system (GSM) is an integrated
system covering fields of network technology, digital stored program control technology,
all transmission technologies and radio technologies.
GSM consists of Network Sub System (NSS), Base Station Sub-system (BSS) and Mobile
Station (MS).
GSM system signaling structure covers MAP interface, A interface (between MSC and
BSC), Abis interface (between BSC and BTS), Ater interface (between BSC and external
TC) and Um interface (between BTS and MS, also called air interface).
All these objects and interfaces contain large quantity of configuration parameters and
performance parameters, some of which are determined during the development and
production of the equipment, and most of which depend on actual need and operation by
network providers. Settings and adjustment of latter parameters have a great impact on
the operation of entire GSM network.
Radio parameters in GSM network refer to parameters related to radio devices and radio
resources. These parameters have an important impact on coverage of cells, distribution of
signaling flow and service property of network, etc. Therefore, adjusting radio parameters
reasonably plays a very important part in GSM network optimization.
GSM radio parameters are classified into project parameters and resource (cell)
parameters.
1. Project Parameters
Project parameters refer to parameters related to design, installation, and

commissioning of the project, like antenna height, antenna direction, antenna
gain, antenna download obliquity and cable loss, etc. These parameters must be
1-1
SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXG10 iBSC Radio Parameter Reference
determined during network design and are seldom changed during the operation of
the network.
2. Resource (Cell) Parameters
Resource (cell) parameters refer to parameters related to configuration and utilization
of radio resources, which usually transmit on radio interface (Um) to keep the base
station and mobile station consistent. Radio parameters covered in this manual are
mainly resource parameters. Radio resource parameters in BSS contain:
l GERAN subnetwork parameters, BSC managed element parameters, and config
set parameters;
l Global resource parameters for BSC, site parameters, GERAN external cell
parameters, UTRAN external cell parameters;
l Cell Parameters;
l TRX parameters, power control parameters, handover control parameters,
UTRAN handover control parameters, adjacent interference cell parameters,
adjacent handover cell parameters, adjacent reselection cell parameters,
adjacent handover and reselection cell parameters, UTRAN adjacent cell
handover and reselection parameters, UTRAN adjacent handover cell
parameters, UTRAN adjacent reselection cell parameters, frequency hopping
system parameters.
1.2 Methods to Modify Radio Parameters

After successfully login NetNumen M31, user can perform the following steps:
1. In left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, right-click the shortcut menu
corresponding to created GSM NE agent, select Start NE.
2. Right-click the started GSM NE and select NE Management, as shown in Figure 1-1.
1-2

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-1 Select Start NE Agent
3. Click NE Management, the system automatically starts this NE.

4. After starting, in left topology tree of NetNumen M31 main interface, right-click shortcut
menu corresponding to created GSM NE agent, select NE Management > Configu-
ration Management, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Select NE Management > Configuration Management
5. Click Configuration Management, the system enters into configuration management

interface, as shown in Figure 1-3.
1-3

Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface
The tree in the left pane shows the objects to be created and maintained. User can
double click the nodes that its parameters shall be modified, corresponding parameter
interface occurs in right window.
6. Under initial case, Modify shortcut button in configuration management object
toolbar is inactivated, which can not be modified. User shall activate this button by
the action of "Apply Mutex Right".
Note:
"Apply Mutex Right" function is to avoid multiple clients do actions for the data, which may cause
data confused and errors.
Take the data modification of primary configuration set as an example, specific steps
as follows:
a. Right-click BSC Managed Element, select Apply Mutext Right in pull-down
menu, as shown in Figure 1-4.
1-4

Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-4 Select Apply Mutex Right
b. Click Apply Mutex Right, Information dialog pops up, as shown in Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box
c. Click Yes button, mutex right is successfully applied, and the proper symbol
occurs in topology tree, as shown in Figure 1-6. At this time, shortcut key is
activated, and the user can modify configuration data under this management NE.
Figure 1-6 Successfully Apply Mutex Right
d. After modifying data, user shall right-click BSC Managed Element, select
Release Mutex Right in pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 1-7. After the right
is released, other user can operate the configuration data under this management
NE.
1-5

Figure 1-7 Select Release Mutex Right
1.3 The Format to Explain Parameters

Each radio parameter in this manual is individually clarified by using tables, for details see
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Format to Explain Radio Parameters
Full name English parameter name on the interface
Abbreviation Abbreviation for English parameters
3GPP name Parameter name in 3GPP protocol
3GPP reference 3GPP protocol version number for parameter reference
Description Descriptive text for this parameter.
Managed object Involved object by the parameter
Value range of this parameter. If the parameter is in mapping form, actual

Value range parameter value that corresponds to all indices will be enumerated
Unit Parameter unit
Default value Default value and its description on parameter interface
Online = After a parameter's value is modified, it is immediately synchronized

and takes effect.
Offline = After one or several parameters' values are modified, the
Change mode modification takes effect after data synchronization.
Relevant functions and features of the network that corresponds to this

Related features parameter
1-6

Chapter 1 Overview
Parameters which have data restriction relationship with the parameter.

For example, this parameter takes effect only after one or multiple related
parameters are enabled; this parameter's value has a restriction relationship
with one or multiple related parameters, such as larger than or smaller than
Related parameters the related parameter.
Relationship Dependency among related parameters
Related interfaces Interfaces related to this parameter
Caution!
1. Radio parameters in this system is modified through offline modification mode, that is, the
modification on interface only can be effective after the synchronization action to foreground is
conducted.
2. Some parameter values in the interface are not fully same as those in database, with certain
corresponding relationship between them. For specific corresponding relationship, refer to
Appendix D.
1.4 Precautions on Parameter Adjustment

Radio parameters adjustment, according to the type of the problem to be solved, falls into
two kinds.
l The first is to solve static problem, that is, to correct traffic model in system design
by measuring actual average traffic and signaling flow in every district and to solve
common problems existing for long.
l Second is to solve problems at a particular time like traffic overload in some district,
channel congestion due to sudden events or random events.
For the first type, service providers must perform measurement and summarization on
actual operation regularly, and then perform appropriate adjustment on global or partial
parameters and configurations. For the second type, network operators adjust some radio
parameters at real time according to instant data from measurement results.
Most radio parameters in GSM system are based on one cell or one location area. It
is necessary to consider if parameter adjustment in this cell will influence other cells,
especially the adjacent one, for parameters between cells are related to each other
greatly. Otherwise, it may cause negative influence. Determine if the problem results from
equipment fault (including connections) first when it occurs in some part of the network.
Adjust radio parameters only when determined that the problem does result from service.
1-7

This page intentionally left blank.
1-8

Chapter 2
BSC Function Parameters
In the configuration tree, right-click OMC > GERAN Subnetwork > BSC Managed
Element > Config Set and choose Create > BSC Function from the shortcut menu. The
Create BSC Function interface is displayed.
The following describe the radio parameters related to BSC function.
Table of Contents
Radio Basic Property Parameters...............................................................................2-1
Other Parameters.....................................................................................................2-10
Channel Allocation Control Parameters ....................................................................2-29
Timer 1 Parameters..................................................................................................2-38
Timer 2.....................................................................................................................2-51
GPRS Maximum Retrying Times Parameters ...........................................................2-75
GPRS Timer Parameters..........................................................................................2-83
AMR Half Method Parameters..................................................................................2-98
AMR Full Method Parameters ................................................................................2-103
GPRS Property 1 Parameters ................................................................................2-108
GPRS Property 2 Parameters ................................................................................ 2-114
BVC Flow Control Parameters................................................................................2-124
FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ........................................................................2-131
EDGE Property Parameters ...................................................................................2-137
eMLPP Set.............................................................................................................2-144
2.1 Radio Basic Property Parameters

The interface of basic radio property parameters is shown in Figure 2-1.
2-1

Figure 2-1 Radio Basic Property Parameters
2.1.1 DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)

Full name DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported
Abbreviation FuncExt
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Specify the frequency supported. It is unmodifiable after being created

Description successfully.
Managed object BSC
Value range DCS1800, PCS1900
Unit None
Default value DCS1800
Change mode Offline
Related features None
Frequency band (FreqBand)

Frequency band (FreqBand)
Related parameters Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)
Relationship None
2-2

Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters
Related interfaces None
2.1.2 Load indication allowed (LoadInd)

Full name Load Indication
Abbreviation LoadInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The load indication process informs the adjacent BSC of the cell load at border
to provide more reference information in normal handover and the internal traffic
handover of BSC.
This parameter determines if load indication is available, an also determines

the validity of parameter Load valid time and Load indication period. If this
parameter is No (load indication process is disabled), the latter two parameters
Description are invalid. Otherwise they are valid.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters None
Relationship None
2.1.3 Send confusion message allowed (ConfusionMsg)

Full name Send confusion message allowed
Abbreviation ConfusionMsg
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Confusion message is bidirectional. If the received message could not be pro-

cessed properly for some reason, and there is no other proper fault message to
Description send, the system will send confusion message.
Managed object BSC
2-3

Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.1.4 Inter-Cell handover allowed (InHoEnable)
Full name Inter-Cell handover allowed
Abbreviation InHoEnable
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, intra-BSC inter-cell handover is implemented

by the following methods: BSC-controlled inter-cell handover without MSC in-
volvement; MSC-controlled intra-BSC inter-cell handover whose handover flow
is similar to that of inter-BSC handover. This parameter decides the choice
of method for intra-BSC inter-cell handover. 'Yes' indicates that it is BSC-con-
trolled inter-cell handover flow; 'No' indicates that it is MSC-controlled inter-cell
Description handover flow. Do not select 'No' for this parameter if it is not necessary.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-4

2.1.5 Send assignment failure allowed (ExDRSendAssFail)

Full name Send assignment failure allowed
Abbreviation ExDRSendAssFail
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes if external redirection allows assignment failure.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-01-002 Directed Retry
Relationship None
2.1.6 Load indication valid time (LoadValidTime)

Full name Load Valid Time
Abbreviation LoadValidTime
3GPP name Time indication IE
3GPP reference 48.008 Mobile Switching Centre - Base Station System (MSC-BSS) interface
In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to

MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time
indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load
information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighbor-
ing BSCs. This parameter represents the valid time length of the load message.
Description 255 means valid permanently.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit 10 s
Default value 18
Change mode Offline
2-5

Relationship None
Related interfaces A Interface
2.1.7 Load indication period (LoadIndPrd)

Full name Load Indication Period
Abbreviation LoadIndPrd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In load indication process, BSC sends BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to

MSC periodically, notifying about the load status. The message includes time
indication information which indicates the valid time length of the service load
information. MSC relays the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message to neighbor-
ing BSCs. When the load indication message is sent periodically, this parameter
Description decides the period for BSC to send the load indication message.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 65530
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.1.8 Automatic resource indication threshold (ResourceIndThs)

Full name Automatic resource indication threshold
Abbreviation ResourceIndThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-6

This parameter defines that BSC automatically indicates to MSC about the
ratio of presently available channels to the total channels. When available cell
resource is lower than this parameter, resource indication shall be sent to MSC
about this cell condition, which shall be configured by O&M.
The four modes of resource indication from BSC are as follows:
l Auto mode: After the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is re-
ceived, BSC immediately returns a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
message as an acknowledgement without containing any resource informa-
tion. BSC automatically sends BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message
to MSC. BSC uses the periodicity IE in BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST to
determine the indication messages interval (unless the Periodicity IE is 0
and BSC ignores 0) once O&M of BSC satisfies the Auto condition (service
threshold or the interval between any two messages).
l One-off mode: After the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is re-
message with resource information. BSC stops sending and waits for next
BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST if the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST
message does not contain Extended Resource Indication IE. If there is Ex-
tended Resource Indication IE, BSC shall follow the regulations of Subse-
quent Mode element in the message, same as mode 4. If the previous one
is mode 1 or 3, then you can use mode 1 or 3, otherwise you can use mode
4.
l Period mode: After BSC receives the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST
message, it will immediately return a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
message that contains the resource information. After that, BSC periodi-
cally sends the BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION message. If Period-
icity IE in the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is not 0, then
the period to send the message is the value of Periodicity IE multiplied
by 100ms. If Periodicity IE is 0, then the message is wrong and the whole
BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is regarded as wrong.
l Stop mode: After the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is re-
message without any resource information as an acknowledgement. And
Description then, it will no longer send the cell resource information to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-7

2.1.9 Resource adjust threshold (ResourceAdjustThs)

Full name Resource adjust threshold
Abbreviation ResourceAdjustThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When bytes transmitted for packet servie data have crossed the threshold,
timeslot allocation is adjusted from single timeslot to multiple timeslots (or the
threshold from single timeslot to multiple timeslots for packet service timeslot
Description allocation).
Managed object BSC
Unit Byte
Default value 2000
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.1.10 BSC MAX reset number (BSCMaxResetNum)

Full name BSC Max Reset Num
Abbreviation BscMaxResetNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The maximum allowable resets to BSC. After BSC sends the BSSAP RESET
message to MSC, if BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message fails to reach
BSC from MSC within GSM-specified T4 time interval, the resetting will be
repeated.
BSSAP RESET message repeats up to N times. MSC ends the reset process
and notifies OMS incase of no reply from BSC after N times. N depends on
Description this parameter.
Managed object BSC
2-8

Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.1.11 HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum)

Full name HBTS scan site number
Abbreviation HBTSScanSiteNum
3GPP name
None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the number of HBTS scanning sites at each time. 0 indicates

Description
the periodical scanning function is disabled.
Managed object S8001
Value range 0~10
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s) and HBTS scan begin time
Related parameters
(HBTSScanBT)
If this parameter is set to 0, these two relevant parameters can be

Relationship
configured but be invalid.
Related interfaces Abis interface
2.1.12 Range of BARANG

Full name Range of BARANG
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
2-9

3GPP reference None
Value includes single frequency or frequency range, sent to MS in

CHANNEL RELEASE. Certain frequency can be firstly inspected while
MS selects cell.
Input the minimum and maximum value of broadcast range in the left and
right blank and click Add to save this range. Range of BARANG can be
same for different global resource.
Description Note: input frequency range can't be crossed.
Managed object BSC
PGSM (1 ~ 124)
EGSM (0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023)
DCS1800 (512 ~ 885)
GSM1900 (512 ~ 810)
Value range GSM850 (128 ~ 251)
Unit None
Default value 0&&0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2 Other Parameters

The interface of other parameters is shown in Figure 2-2.
2-10

Figure 2-2 Others
2.2.1 Length of super vision (LcsSuperVision)

Full name Length of super vision
Abbreviation LcsSuperVision
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Supervise the timer length in whole locating process.

After BSC sends locating request to SMLC, this timer is configured and shall
receives locating response prior to timeout, otherwise locating process is
Description terminated.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 250
Change mode Offline
ZGRO-01-03-002 LCS with CGI+TA

Related features ZGRO-01-03-003 LCS with AGPS
2-11

Relationship None
2.2.2 Length of radio (LcsRadio)

Full name Length of radio
Abbreviation LcsRadio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Supervise the timer length to transmit radio information.

This timer supervises the process to deliver MS the message related with
locating. Start while sending message to MS, and stop while receiving
Description response from MS.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 50
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
2.2.3 LCS wait intra BSS handover timer (LcsWaitInTraHO)

Full name LCS wait intra BSS handover timer
Abbreviation LcsWaitInTraHO
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Length of timer waiting intra BSS handover completed.

Continue locating process after handover is finished, with a length threshold
Description for waiting. Stop while this timer length is exceeded.
Managed object BSC
2-12

Unit None
Default value 60
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
2.2.4 Monitor physical context request (RmsT9108, 100ms)

Full name Monitor physical context request
Abbreviation RmsT9108
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9108. Currently, the process to monitor physical con-
Description text request is not used, reserved for later use.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Um interface
2.2.5 Timer for MSG waiting (TWaitMsg, 100ms)

Full name Timer for MSG waiting
Abbreviation TWaitMsg
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-13

Timer for MSG Waiting on RanAWorker process. RanAWorker process is the

working process of RANA module. Start if RANA instance is created, stop if
Description message is received, and instance is released if timeout.
Managed object BSC
Value range 5 ~ 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.6 Timer for RANCSEST Waiting (TWaitRancsEst, 100ms)

Full name Timer for RANCSEST Waiting
Abbreviation TWaitRancsEst
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Time to wait for RANCS process applying for resource protection.

RANCS process is to process CS service. This timer is started if RANA
receives external handover request and applying for channel from RANCS;
stop if receiving RANCS response, and fail to send handover to interface A if
Description timeout.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-14

2.2.7 Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting (TWaitRancsCleCom,

100ms)
Full name Timer for RANCSCLECOM Waiting
Abbreviation TWaitRancsCleCom
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Interval for RanAWorker process waiting for RANCS process responding

ClearCom. RanAWorker process is the working process of RANA module.
Start if sending clear command to RANCS, stop if receiving RANCS response,
Description and continue release process if timeout.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 30
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.8 Timer for CCM waiting (CcmWaitTimer)

Full name Timer for CCM waiting
Abbreviation CcmWaitTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Timer that is waiting for disconnecting and disabling BTS during dynamic
channel conversion.
Start if CCM starts channel conversion, stop if receiving successive module
Description and BTS response, and send message to BTS again if timeout.
Managed object BSC
Value range 45 ~ 55
Unit 100 ms
Default value 45
Change mode Offline
2-15

Relationship None
2.2.9 Get static param timer (GetStaticParamTimer, 100ms)

Full name Get static param timer
Abbreviation GetStaticParamTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The counting parameter, used by RancRrm, is used to timely poll UPU unit
below CMP.
This timer is configured periodically, and query resource occupation data for
Description UPU if timeout.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 120
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.10 Starting time for oriented retry (RmsT10, 100ms)

Full name Starting time for oriented retry
Abbreviation RmsT10
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is T10 timer.
Managed object BSC
2-16

Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.11 External cell load notify (Info_0_0)

Full name External cell load notify
Abbreviation
Info_0_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes if the load information in this cell is filled in the unit of

"New BSS to old BSS information" for handover request while the
Description
cell service under current BSC is switched to the cell under other
BSCs.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.12 Neighbor cell load valid duration (Info_0_1,10s)

Full name Neighbor cell load valid duration
Abbreviation Info_0_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-17

Description It describes the valid time of the load information.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit 10 s
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.13 LMU build request deal or not (Info_1_0)

Full name LMU build request deal or not (INFO)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if to handle LMU (Location Measurement Units)

Description
establishment request.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.14 MBMS request deal or not (Info_1_1)

Full name MBMS request deal or not (INFO)
3GPP name None
2-18

3GPP reference None
It indicates if to handle MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast

Description
Service) request.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.15 Channel request reserved field deal or not (Info_1_2)

Full name Channel request reserved field deal or not
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes if to handle Channel Request reserved field.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.2.16 MS power hold in handover option (Info_0_9)

Full name MS power hold in handover option
2-19

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if MS power hold in handover option is supported.
Managed object None
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
2.2.17 Level threshold of target cell (Info_0_10)

Full name Level threshold of target cell
3GPP name None
3GPP
reference None
Description Level threshold of target cell
Managed
object None
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
Value range l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
l ...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 27
Change mode Offline
2-20

Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
2.2.18 Allow VGCS/VBS (GroupCallControl)

Full name Allow VGCS/VBS
Abbreviation GroupCallControl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It decides whether BSC supports VGCS/VBS.

Description
This parameter is supported from version V8.00.00.
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 1: yes, indicates allowing VGCS/VBS function; 0: no, indicates not allowing
VGCS/VBS function
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
ZGRB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function

Related features
ZGRB-01-01-003 Supporting VBS
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
2.2.19 Max times of Listener response fail (DetectRepeat)

Full name Max times of Listener response fail
Abbreviation DetectRepeat
3GPP name None
2-21

3GPP reference 3GPP TS44.018 V8.9.0
During a Listener detection process, BSC sends the "uplink free" message
with the interval of Twait_detect. If BSC does not receive MS responses after
repeatedly sending the "uplink free" message for DetectRepeat times, it assumes
that the group call channel has no Listener and thus releases radio channel. If
Description BSC receives any response from MS, it does not release radio channel, and
starts another detection after waiting for Tdetect_period period. This parameter
determines the number of times for repeatedly sending the "Tdetect_period"
message.
This parameter is supported from version 8.00.00.
Managed object BSC
Value range 2 ~ 10
Unit Times
Default value 4
Change mode Offline

Related features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces Abis interface
2.2.20 Allow Shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET

(PaControl)
Full name Allow Shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET
Abbreviation PaControl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It decides whether to allow shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET.

Description
This parameter is supported from V8.00.00. It is not used currently.
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates not allowing shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET; 1: yes,
indicates allowing shutdown BCCH of faulty BTS when in DNET.
Unit None
2-22

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.21 Allow talker priority (TPInd)

Full name Allow talker priority
Abbreviation TPInd
3GPP name talker priority indicator
3GPP reference 3GPP TS 48.008 V8.8.0
It decides whether to allow talker priority.

Description
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates not supporting talker priority; 1: yes, indicates supporting talker
priority.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.22 Allow VGCS/VBS re-establishment (BscRes)

Full name Allow VGCS/VBS re-establishment
Abbreviation BscRes
2-23

3GPP name the group or broadcast call re-establishment by the BSS indicator
It decides whether to allow VGCS/VBS re-establishment.

Description
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates that BSC does not support VGCS/VBS re-establishment; 1: yes,
indicates that BSC supports VGCS/VBS re-establishment.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Related features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.23 Talker channel parameter (TalkerChanPara)

Full name Talker channel parameter
Abbreviation TalkerChanPara
3GPP name talker channel parameter
It decides whether to support Talker channel parameter.

Description
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates that the group call does not support talker channel parameter; 1:
yes, indicates that the group call supports talk channel parameter.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
2-24

Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.24 Allow A-interface link share (ALSInd)

Full name Allow A-interface link share
Abbreviation ALSInd
3GPP name A-interface link sharing
It decides whether to allow A-interface link share.

Description
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicating not supporting A-interface link share; 1: yes, indicating
supporting A-interface link share.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces A Interface
2.2.25 Allow A-interface circuit share (ACSInd)

Full name Allow A-interface circuit share
Abbreviation ACSInd
3GPP name A-interface circuit sharing
It decides whether to allow A-interface circuit share.

Description
2-25

Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates not supporting A-interface circuit share; 1: yes, indicates
supporting A-interface circuit share.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces A Interface
2.2.26 Allow send uplink request from RACH (RachULAcc)

Full name Allow send uplink request from RACH
Abbreviation RachULAcc
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It decides whether to allow send uplink request from RACH.

Description
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates not allowing sending uplink request from RACH; 1, yes, indicates
allowing sending uplink request from RACH.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2-26

2.2.27 Threshold of priority for periodical FACCH notification

(PriorityLevThs)
Full name Threshold of priority for periodical FACCH notification
Abbreviation PriorityLevThs
3GPP name an operator specific setting priority Level
For a certain group call, it can be broadcast periodically on FACCH only when
its priority is higher than a specified threshold. This parameter decides the
Description
threshold value.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 14
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-01-004 Notification of a call on FACCH
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.28 TCH channel priority indicator (TCHPriorityInd)

Full name TCH channel priority indicator
Abbreviation TCHPriorityInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
If this function is enabled, the system first assigns TCH for the channel request of
a group call and then performs the mode modification procedure. In this way, the
Description
VGCS/VBS setup duration is shortened.
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range
1: yes, indicates assigning TCH firstly; 0: no, indicates not assigning TCH firstly.
Unit None
2-27

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-01-003 Channel mode modify procedure in VGCS/VBS
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.29 Allow paging on VGCS/VBS channel (InbandPaging)

Full name Allow paging on VGCS/VBS channel
Abbreviation InbandPaging
3GPP name inband pagings
On VGCS/VBS channel, notification (FACCH) can carry paging. This parameter

Description determines whether BSC supports this function.
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates that paging messages cannot be sent on FACCH channel; 1: yes,
indicates that paging messages should be sent on FACCH.
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.2.30 Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel

(InbandNotify)
Full name Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel
2-28

Abbreviation InbandNotify
3GPP name inband notification
For a certain group call, it can be broadcast periodically on FACCH only when its
priority is higher than a specified threshold. This parameter decides whether BSC
Description
supports this function.
Managed object BSC
Yes/No
Value range 0: no, indicates not allowing periodical notification on FACCH channel; 1, yes,
indicates allowing periodical notification on FACCH channel.
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-01-004 Notification of a call on FACCH
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters

The interface of channel allocation control parameters is shown in Figure 2-3.
2-29

Figure 2-3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters
2.3.1 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

Full name Dynamic HR Enable
Abbreviation DynaHREnable
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if this cell supports dynamic HR.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-003 Full dynamic channel allocation on Um interface
Related parameters Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)
Relationship If this parameter is set to Yes, 'Use cell dynamic HR parameter' is configurable.
2-30

2.3.2 Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR (HRThs)

Full name Threshold for TRX switched from FR to HR
Abbreviation HRThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When channel occupation exceeds this threshold, it will apply for half-rate
Description
channel directly to increase the user capacity.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.3 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

Full name AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold
Abbreviation AmrHRThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell
support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
Description This threshold value can be set on BSC and BTS, when "User cell dynamic
HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value configured by
cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC is used.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
2-31

Relationship None
2.3.4 Support HR channel frag finishing (HRDfragSupport)

Full name Support HR channel frag finishing
Abbreviation HRDfragSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It is a switch to support HR channel frag finishing functions, which can be con-

figured both on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled, and
Description
finished HR frags / idle HR channel in the cell is no more than HRDefragThs,
HR channel defragmentation function is enabled, otherwise it is disabled.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.5 HR channel percentage threshold (HRTsPercentage)

Full name HR channel percentage threshold
Abbreviation HRTsPercentage
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell <

HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
Description This parameter can be configured on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR
timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the
cell can generate new HR channel.
2-32

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.6 User priority for EMLPP (PriThreshold)

Full name User Priority
Abbreviation PriThreshold
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter (PriThreshold) uses the service of preferred access for

high-priority subscriber, that is eMLPP service, the system may set some
reserved channels (currently, only full rate TCH channels are supported to
be the reserved channels).
When CS instance calls database to apply for channels, the subscriber's
Description
PriorityLevel information reaches to database, and is compared with
PriThreshold in the database and BSC table. When If PriorityLevel <=
PriThreshold (the less the subscriber's priority level value, the higher
the priority level, that is the subscriber's priority level is not lower than
PriThreshold priority), the reserved channel can be used.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-002 Enhancement on Channel Allocation
Relationship None
2-33

2.3.7 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeechVer H)

Full name Preferred speech version (half)
Abbreviation PreferSpeechVer H
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, describe the preferred

Description half-rate speech version. Half-rate version 1 refers to HR, and version 3 for
AMR.
Managed object BSC
Value range Not specify the preferred version, Half-rate version 1, Half-rate version 3
Unit None
Default value Not specify the preferred version
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-01-001 Half Rate
Relationship None
2.3.8 Preferred speech version (PreferSpeedchVer F)

Full name Preferred speech version (full)
Abbreviation PreferSpeechVer F
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When implementing the CS channel allocation policy, it describe the preferred

Description full-rate voice version. Full-rate version 1 refers to FR, version 2 for EFR, and
version 3 for AMR.
Managed object BSC
Not specify the preferred version, Full-rate version 1, full-rate version 2, full-rate
Value range
version 3
Unit None
Default value Not specify the preferred version
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-01-002 Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) Speech Codec
2-34

Relationship None
2.3.9 Reserved Channel First (RsvChanFirst)

Full name Reserved Channel First
Abbreviation RsvChanFirst
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description The selection order of reserved channel and non-reserved channel
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.10 EMLPP channel Reserved time (EMLPPThs, %)

Full name eMLPP channel Reserved time
Abbreviation EMLPPThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When using high priority user to access service, that is, EMLPP service, the
Description
system may configure certain remained channels
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
2-35

Relationship None
2.3.11 TRX PS busy threshold (TrxPSBusyThs)

Full name TRX PS busy threshold
Abbreviation TrxPSBusyThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to collect PS service on the idle carrier while applying
for PS, against infinite expansion. Application sequence: the idle carrier
Description above this threshold > idle carrier > idle carrier below this threshold.
Calculate it according to remained available quota on each available PS
timeslot * number of accessed Abis * 100 / user number.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 1280
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.12 Resource pool for PS rate (PsAbisThs, %)

Full name Resource pool for PS rate
Abbreviation PsAbisThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Full dynamic Abis resource pool provides use proportion of PS channel. if

default value for this parameter is configured as 80%, which refers to upper
Description limit for PS. The aim is to idle Abis resource while CS channel is activated. If
this threshold is exceeded, Abis resource cannot be allocated to PS service
again.
2-36

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.13 Maximum PS uplink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_0)

Full name Maximum PS uplink user per ts
Abbreviation MaxPsUserPerTs_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes maximum PS uplink user per ts.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~7
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.3.14 Maximum PS downlink user per ts (MaxPsUserPerTs_1)

Full name Maximum PS downlink user per ts
Abbreviation MaxPsUserPerTs_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-37

Description This parameter describes maximum PS downlink user per ts.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4 Timer 1 Parameters

The interface of timer 1 parameters is shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Timer 1 Parameters
2.4.1 Blocking/unblocking period (T1, 100ms)

Full name Blocking/unblocking period
2-38

Abbreviation T1
3GPP name T1
This parameter is T1 timer. BSS blocks/unblocks a terrestrial circuit and sends

BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC due to various reasons (such as 0; equip-
ment failure/recovery; radio resources unavailable/available). T1 timer sets
Description
the time interval between BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message sent
from MSC to BSC and BLOCK/UNBLOCK message. T1 is used to identify it
during this period.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.2 Global Resetting Period (T4, 100ms)

Full name Global Resetting Period
Abbreviation T4
3GPP name T4
This parameter is T4 timer, monitoring the BSSAP RESET message sent

from BSC to MSC.
l Timer start condition: T4 starts when a global resetting occurs in BSC.
Description
l Timer stop condition: The BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message
from MSC is received.
l Timeout action: If T4 expires, BSC will repeat the whole process.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
2-39

Relationship None
2.4.3 Protection period for global resetting (T13, 100ms)

Full name Protective period for global resetting
Abbreviation T13
3GPP name T13
This parameter is T13 timer, which is a protection time period for a local
call clearing process.
l Timer Start: T13 timer starts when BSC receives BSSAP HANDOVER
COMMAND message.
Description
l Timer Stop: T13 timer suspends when SCCP receives a SSP/SPI mes-
sage.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSS will send BSSAP RESET
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Value range 30 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.4 Circuit resetting period on BSS side (T19, 100ms)

Full name Circuit resetting period on BSS side
Abbreviation T19
3GPP name T19
2-40

If BSC SCCP connection is abnormal while the circuits must be released to

idle status, BSS will send the BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET message to MSC and
start T19. After MSC receives this message, it will release the corresponding
Description
services and the circuits to the idle status and send the BSSAP CIRCUIT RE-
SET ACKNOWLEDGE message to BSC. T19 timer stops when MSC receives
RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message from BSC.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.5 Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period (T20, 100ms)

Full name Circuit group blocking/unblocking Period
Abbreviation T20
3GPP name T20
For some reasons (0; intervention; equipment fault/recovery; radio resources

unavailable/available), BSS will block a group of terrestrial circuits, then
Description send the BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC.
After receiving this message, MSC will send the BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP
BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWKEDGE message to BSS for notification.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-41

2.4.6 RLSD message receive protection timer (T9101, 100ms)

Full name RLSD message receive protection timer
Abbreviation T9101
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9101, supervising the reception of RLSD.

l Timer start condition: T9101 starts when BSC sends the BSSAP CLEAR
COMPLETE message to MSC.
Description l Timer stop condition: T9101 stops when the RLSD message from MSC is
received.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RLSD message
to release SCCP connection.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.7 Channel activation protection timer (RmsT9103, 100ms)

Full name Channel activation protection timer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T9103, monitoring channel activation process.

l Timer Start: T9103 timer starts when BSC sends CHANNEL ACTIVATION
message to BTS.
Description l Timer Stop: T9103 timer suspends when BSC receives CHANNEL ACTI-
VATION ACK or CHANNEL ACTIVATION NACK message.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send RF CHANNEL
RELEASE message to BTS
Managed object BSC
2-42

Value range 20
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.8 MSC clear command protection timer (T9104, 100ms)

Full name MSC clear command protection timer
Abbreviation T9104
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T9104 timer. It supervises CLEAR COMMAND from MSC.

l Timer Start: T9104 timer starts when BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST
message to MSC.
Description l Timer Stop: T9104 timer suspends when BSC receives CLEAR COM-
MAND message from MSC.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, CLEAR REQUEST message will
be resent (four times at the most).
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.9 SCCP connection protection timer (T9105, 100ms)

Full name SCCP Connection Timer
2-43

Abbreviation T9105
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T9105 timer, monitoring SCCP connection process.

l Timer Start: T9105 timer starts when BSC sends BSSAP SCCP_CON-
NECTION_REQ message to MSC.
Description l Timer Stop: T9105 suspends when BSC receives SCCP_CONNEC-
TION_CONFIRM/SCCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED message.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RE-
LEASE message to MS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.10 Protective time waiting for access (RmsT1, 100ms)

Full name Protective time waiting for access
Abbreviation RmsT1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is rmsT1 timer. It indicates protection waiting time for MS

access during assignment or handover, after channel activation process.
l Timer start condition: The destination channel receives the CHL ACITI-
Description VATION ACK message and sends the RADIO AVAILABLE message to
the source channel.
l Timer stop: In MS access, the destination channel receives the ASSIGN-
MENT COM or HANDOVER COM message.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 70
2-44

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.11 Protective time for applying to channel (RmsT2, 100ms)

Full name Protection time for channel request
Abbreviation RmsT2
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T2 timer.

l Timer start condition: The new channel sends the RADIO APPLY mes-
sage.
Description l Timer stop: Channel request succeeds and the new channel receives the
RADIO AVAILABLE message; or the channel request fails and the RA-
DIO UNAVAILABLE message is received; or the RADIO PROCEEDING
message is received in queuing.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.12 Protective time for link establishment response (RmsT3,

100ms)
Full name Protection time for link establishment response
Abbreviation RmsT3
3GPP name None
2-45

3GPP reference None

l Timer start: RANCS instance sends "ESTABLISH IND" to RANA instance.
Description l Timer stop: RANCS instance receives the "CONNECT CONF" sent by
RANA instance, or the "CONNECT FAIL" when RANA fails to establish
the link.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.13 Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM

(RmsT4, 100ms)
Full name Protective time for P0 confirms the message HO/ASS COM
Abbreviation RmsT4
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

l Timer start: After RANCS receives the "HO COM" or "ASS COM" message
Description of MS and forwards it to RANA.
l Timer stop: RANCS receives acknowledgement of "HO COM" or "ASS
COM" message by RANA.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 80
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-46

2.4.14 Encryption mode modification time (RmsT5, 100ms)

Full name Encryption mode modification time
Abbreviation RmsT5
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T5, used to supervise modification process of

encryption mode, that is, the timer that waits for MS response after configuring
radio encryption mode.
l Timer Start: T5 timer starts when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COM-
Description MAND message from MSC.
l Timer Stop: T5 timer suspends when BSC receives CIPHER MODE COM-
PLETE message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send BSSAP CIPHER
MODE REJECT message to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.15 SAPI3 link establishment time (RmsT6, 100ms)

Full name SAPI3 link establishment time
Abbreviation RmsT6
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-47

Timer T6 supervises link establishment of SAPI3.

l Timer start: timer T6 starts when BSC receives the DTAP (SAPI = 3) mes-
sage from MSC and there is no SAPI3 link.
Description l Timer stop: timer T6 stops when BSC receives the ESTABLISH CONFIRM
message from BTS.
l Overtime action: When timer T6 expires, the BSSMAP SAPI"n" REJECT
message will be sent to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.16 External handover protective time (RmsT8, 100ms)

Full name External handover protection time
Abbreviation RmsT8
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer rmsT8, monitoring external handover process.

l Timer start: rmsT8 starts after handover command is sent in Serve state
Description while RANCS instance shall be handovered externally.
l Timer stop: rmsT8 timer stops if RANCS instance receives HO COM-
CLEAR CMD (handover success) or UM HO FAIL (handover failed).
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-48

2.4.17 Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection

(T3, 100ms)
Full name Protective time for No7 signal instantaneous disconnection
Abbreviation T3
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This timer is configured to prevent from signal instantaneous disconnection

and wrong actions.
If disconnection duration of no.7 link exceeds timer protective time, global
Description resetting is issued. If no signaling point reachable event is received during
delay time, no.7 link is considered as disconnection and global resetting
process begins; if reachable signaling point is received during delay time,
no.7 link is considered as instantaneous disconnection.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.18 Protective time that PO responses external handover

completion message (RmsT7, 100ms)
Full name Protective time that PO responses external handover completion message
Abbreviation RmsT7
3GPP name T7
2-49

l Timer start: it starts when RANCS sends the HANDOVER REQUIRED

message to MSC.
Description
l Timer stop: it stops when RANCS instance receives HANDOVER COM-
MAND response from MSC.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 150
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.4.19 HBTS scan begin time (HBTSScanBT)

Full name HBTS scan begin time
Abbreviation HBTSScanBT
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the begin time of HBTS scanning.
Value range 0 ~ 23
Unit None
Default value 3 (indicates 3 o'clock)
Change mode Offline
Related parameters HBTS scan site number
If HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) is set to 0, this parameter

Relationship
can be configured but invalid.
2.4.20 HBTS scan cycle (HBTSScanCyc, 3600s)

Full name HBTS scan cycle
2-50

Abbreviation HBTSScanCyc
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the HBTS scanning cycle.
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit 3600 s
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
If HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) is set to 0, this parameter

Relationship
can be configured but invalid.
2.5 Timer 2
The interface of timer 2 parameters is shown in Figure 2-5.
2-51

Figure 2-5 Timer 2 Parameters
2.5.1 Protective time for RF channel release (RmsT9, 100ms)

Full name Protective time for RF channel release
Abbreviation RmsT9
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

l Timer start: T9 starts when RF CHANNEL RELEASE is sent to BTS when
Description RANCS instance is released.
l Timer stop: T9 stops when RANCS instance receives RF CHANNEL RE-
LEASE ACKNOWLEDGE response from BTS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
2-52

Relationship None
Related interfaces Abis Interface
2.5.2 Queue period of assignment (RmsT11, 100ms)

Full name Queue period of assignment
Abbreviation RmsT11
3GPP name T11
This parameter is T11 timer. It determines the maximum allowable queue time
Description
which starts from the assignment request.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-01-003 Queuing
Relationship None
2.5.3 Acknowledgment interval for periodic status (RmsT12, 100ms)

Full name Acknowledgment interval for periodic status
Abbreviation RmsT12
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

l Timer Start: T12 timer starts periodically when RANCS receives CON-
NECT CONF message from RANA. Timer decides to perform activity
Description
check at peer end. Laterly, it is periodical start.
l Timer Stop: T12 timer stops when RANCS instance receives RELEASE
TYPE message.
Managed object BSC
2-53

Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.4 Mode modification process time (RmsT13, 100ms)

Full name Mode modification process time
Abbreviation RmsT13
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is T13 timer. It supervises BTS and MS modes modification

process. Mode modification refers to modify channel mode. When there
is not SDCCH and FACCH is allocated, new channel is not allocated after
assignment, but modify the modes.
l Timer start condition: When BSC sends the MODE MODIFY message
Description to BTS and sends the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message to MS.
l Timer stop condition: When BSC receives the MODE MODIFY
ACK/NACK message from BTS and the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY
message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send BSSAP AS-
SIGNMENT FAILURE message to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-54

2.5.5 Protective time of UM assignment completion (RmsT14,

100ms)
Full name Protective time of UM assignment completion
Abbreviation RmsT14
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is timer T14. It is the period between sending of ASS/HO COM
Description
and receiving of ASS/HO COM ACK messages at destination instance.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.6 Waiting time for oriented retry (RmsT16, 100ms)

Full name Waiting time for oriented retry
Abbreviation RmsT16
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When attempting oriented retry, if target cell has not been gained through in-
spection, you shall configure rmsT16 to wait for receiving measurement report,
Description
and then check if oriented retry is conducted at target cell after rmsT16 is time-
out. This process can be repeated for several times.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
2-55

Relationship None
2.5.7 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms)

Full name Queue period for handover
Abbreviation RmsTqho
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It is the maximum allowable queue time for handover attempt, calculated from
Description
handover request.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.8 First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (mT11, 100ms)

Full name First Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control
Abbreviation mT11
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
iBSC supports two flow control methods: system message method and
FUC method. Overload can be overload of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC
service, or CCCH. Overloads of MSC signaling point, MSC service and
Description CCCH control the flow control level through mT11 and mT12.
In cell overload conditions, iBSC adopts a timer mT11 for traffic flow control.
This clock in combination with timer mT12 adjusts the level of system control.
The value of this timer must be less than that of timer mT12.
2-56

Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-04-001 BSC Load Control
Relationship None
2.5.9 Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control (mT12,

100ms)
Full name Second Overload Period of Flow Traffic Control
Abbreviation mT12
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
iBSC supports two flow control methods: system message method and
FUC method. Overload can be overload of CPU, MSC signaling point, MSC
service, or CCCH. Overloads of MSC signaling point, MSC service and
CCCH control the flow control level through mT11 and mT12.
In cell overload conditions, BSC adopts a timer mT12 for traffic flow control.
The mT12 timer in combination with the mT11 timer adjust the level of system
flow control.
The value of timer mT12 must be larger than that of timer mT11. The two
Description
clocks control the cell flow as follows: When the network receives the overload
message for the first time, the system decreases the flow by one level, and
starts mT11 and mT12. The OVERLOAD message during mT11 period will
be ignored. If the OVERLOAD message is received between mT11 and
mT12, the flow will be decreased by another level and both mT11 and mT12
will be restarted. If BSC does not receive the OVERLOAD message after
mT12 stops, the flow increases to one more level, and mT12 restarts. Lower
grade and higher grade represent different proportion to reject service.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 150
2-57

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.10 Time of Micro-Micro handover delay (Tmicro, 100ms)

Full name Time of Micro-Micro handover delay.
Abbreviation Tmicro
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In micro-micro handover control, a delay time value is required (the timer

value). Timer Start: relevant timer starts instantly when a call enters a micro
cell. Timer Stop: relevant timer stops when it reaches the set value. Existing
Description
call can use neighboring micro cell in the same layer only when the timer
stops. In this way, it could prevent fast moving mobiles staying in the micro
cell layer.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.11 BSIC decoding period (Tbsic, 100ms)

Full name BSIC decoding period
Abbreviation Tbsic
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-58

The parameter Tbsic defines a period, which is calculated from call

establishment or handover completion (inter-cell or intra-cell). TC/I evaluation
is considered as unreliable during this period, thus, handover to a special
Description
TRX is not allowed. During this period, MS can decode BSIC that interferes
with neighboring cells before handover procedure starts.
This parameter is only valid in concentric circle case.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.12 Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD (RmsT3121,

100ms)
Full name Handover protecting timer to WCDMA/FDD
3GPP name T3121
Timer T3121, protection time after sending inter-system to utran handover

command (UM) to UE.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends "inter-system to utran han-
dover command" message to MS.
Description
l Timer stop: the timer stops when BSC receives "CLEAR COMMAND"
message from MSC or "HANDOVER FAILURE" message from MS.
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CLEAR RE-
QUEST message to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 650
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
2-59

Relationship None
2.5.13 Immediate assignment period (RmsT3101, 100ms)

Full name Immediate assignment period
3GPP name T3101
This timer indicates the time period for the instant assigning process.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGN-
MENT COMMAND message.
Description l Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives ESTABLISH INDICA-
TION message.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send CHANNEL
RELEASE message to BTS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Um interface, Abis interface
2.5.14 Handover period of source cell (RmsT3103, 100ms)

Full name Handover period of source cell
3GPP name T3103
2-60

This timer indicates the time period for internal handover process of BSC.
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends HANDOVER COMMAND
message to MS.
l Timer Stop: The timer suspends when BSC receives HANDOVER COM-
Description
PLETE message on a new channel or HANDOVER FAILURE message
on an old channel from MS.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, the BSC will send a CLEAR
REQUEST message to MSC, and the new channel is released.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.15 Assignment period (RmsT3107, 100ms)

Full name Assignment period
3GPP name T3107
This timer indicates the time period for assignment period and internal
handover of a cell..
l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT
COMMAND message to MS.
Description l Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT
COMPLETE message or RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message.
l Overtime Action: If this time is overtime, in the case of assignment, the
former and new channel will be released; in the case of cell internal han-
dover, the BSC will send a CLEAR REQUEST message to the MSC.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
2-61

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.16 Channel release period (RmsT3109, 100ms)

Full name Channel release period
3GPP name T3109
This timer supervises the channel release process.

l Timer Start: The timer starts when BSC sends RIL3_RR CHANNEL RE-
Description l Timer Stop: The timer stops when BSC receives RELEASE INDICATION
message from BTS (when BTS receives DISC frame from MS).
l Overtime Action: If this timer is overtime, BSC will send CHANNEL RE-
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 400
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.17 Channel deactivation delay (RmsT3111, 100ms)

Full name Channel deactivation delay
3GPP name T3111
2-62

After releasing the UM interface radio link layer, in order to make sure the
radio link is disconnected, BSC sets a period of protection time rmsT3111.
Releases the wireless channel and deactivates it after rmsT3111 timer stops.
Description l Timer start: rmsT3111 timer starts when BSC receives RELEASE INDI-
CATION message.
l Overtime Action: If rmsT3111 timer is overtime, the BSC will send RF
CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~5
Unit 100 ms
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.18 Continue Timer for mode modify (TModeModifyConn, 100ms)

Full name Continue Timer for mode modify
Abbreviation TModeModifyConn
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Connection delay timer. This timer is used to wait for connection finished after
Description
sending connection request, including Abis connection and TC connection.
Managed object BSC
Value range 50 ~ 70
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-63

2.5.19 Handover protecting time to UTRAN (mT7, 100ms)

Full name Handover protecting time to UTRAN
Abbreviation mT7
3GPP name T7
This timer is used to send HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC, where target

cell is UTRAN cell, waiting for response from MSC.
l Timer start: this timer starts if BSC sends HANDOVER REQUIRED to
MSC, where target cell is UTRAN cell.
Description
l Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER COMMAND from
MSC.
l Timeout action: configure penalty for UTRAN target cell carried in HAN-
DOVER REQUIRED.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.20 Time of destination instance waiting for available resources

when forced disconnection (RmsT15, 100ms)
Full name Available time to wait for resources by the target instance in forced release
Abbreviation RmsT15
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

l Timer start: When the target instance decides forced release, it will send
the "PREEMPT APPLY" to the released object.
Description
l Timer stop: The target instance receives the "RESOURCE AVAILABLE"
message from the released object, indicating that the resources are avail-
able.
2-64

Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 50
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.21 Protecting time of FUC response to system message

broadcast (BcProtect, 100ms)
Full name Protecting time of FUC response to system message broadcast
Abbreviation BcProtect
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
protection timer for system message broadcast to wait for the response of FUC.
Description
FUC response is used to ensure BTS correctly receives system message.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.22 HO performed ack timer (TwaitHoPFMAck, 100ms)

Full name HO performed ack timer
Abbreviation TwaitHoPFMAck
3GPP name None
2-65

3GPP reference None
When using IP carrier at user plane of interface A, because TC is placed at

MGW, CN shall be informed to replace codec during intra-BSC handover. CN
replacement codec is triggered by HANDOVER PERFORMED message.
To ensure MSC has received this message and successfully command
MGS to replace codec against obstacles at speech aspect, HANDOVER
PERFORMED ACK message is added. This timer is used to wait for
Description HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK message from MSC.
l Timer start: it starts when BSC sends HANDOVER PERFORMED mes-
sage to MSC.
l Timer stop: it stops when BSC receives HANDOVER PERFORMED ACK
message from MSC.
l Timeout action: release call while sending CLEAR REQUEST message
to MSC.
Managed object BSC
Value range 50 ~ 70
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.23 Confirm BIPB fault time (TConfBIPBFault)

Full name Confirm BIPB fault time
Abbreviation TConfBIPBFault
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the time for confirming a BIPB fault. BIPB has
redundancy function. When the active BIPB is faulty, some delay time is
Description required for the system to confirm the fault to avoid active/standby switchover
caused by transient disconnection.
This parameter is supported from version 8.00.200a.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
2-66

Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.24 Confirm BIPB DSP fault time (TConfBIPBDSPFault)

Full name Confirm BIPB DSP fault time
Abbreviation TConfBIPBDSPFault
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the time for confirming a BIPB DSP fault. The value
Description should be smaller than TConfBIPBFault.
Managed object BSC
Value range 5 ~ 600
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.25 Confirm Sunit normal time (TConfSunitNor)

Full name Confirm Sunit normal time
Abbreviation TConfSunitNor
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-67

This parameter indicates the time for confirming that subunit restores to
normal. The value should be smaller than those of TconfBIPBFault and
Description
TconfLapdFault.
Managed object BSC
Value range 5 ~ 300
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.5.26 Round trip delay (RtdDefault)

Full name Round trip delay
Abbreviation RtdDefault
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When handover is performed in AMR, BSC sends the pre-handover notification

message to BTS to make BTS not implement voice rate adjustment.
l Timer start: When BSC sends the pre-handover notification message to
BTS, the timer is started.
Description
l Timer stop: When BSC receives the response for pre-handover notification
message from BTS, the timer is stopped.
l Timeout action: BSC sends the handover command to MS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit 20 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
2-68

Relationship None
Related
interfaces Abis Interface
2.5.27 Listener detect period (Tdetect_period)

Full name Listener detect period
Abbreviation Tdetect_period
3GPP name None
In a non-talker cell (which has established VGCS/VBS radio channel), BSC

periodically originates detection to check whether Listener exists. If no Listener
exists, BSC requests for release of VGCS/VBS radio channels in the cell. This
parameter determines the period of Listener detection. When talker is on
Description dedicated channel, BSC can also send detection messages to the cell where
talker exists. The detection starts when the following conditions are met: uplink
is busy, halfway release is allowed, group call channel is available, and the
group call channel has no talker.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 600
Change mode Offline
ZGB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function

Related features
ZGB-01-01-003 Supporting VBS
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2.5.28 Waiting time of listener reply (Twait_detect)

Full name Waiting time of listener reply
Abbreviation Twait_detect
3GPP name None
2-69

This parameter determines the duration for waiting for Listener response during
Description a Listener detection process.
Managed object BSC
Value range 3 ~ 20
Unit 10 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline

Related features
ZGB-01-01-003 Supporting VBS
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.5.29 Protective time of VGCS uplink request (Twait_rsp)

Full name Protective time of VGCS uplink request
Abbreviation Twait_rsp
3GPP name None
When talker experiences uplink competition, BSC will wait for the setup indication
message if receiving the talker detection message. This parameter decides the
Description
waiting duration on BSC.
This parameter is supported from V8.00.00.
Managed object BSC
Value range 20 ~ 60
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2-70

Related
2.5.30 Broadcast period for additional info (T3153)

Full name Broadcast period for additional info
Abbreviation T3153
3GPP name T3153
In group receive mode, the network periodically sends on SACCH a VGCS

Additional Information message or an uplink busy message containing the
Description talker details. This parameter decides the interval of sending VGCS Additional
Information message.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.5.31 Protective time of new token broadcast (T3155)

Full name Protective time of new token broadcast
Abbreviation T3155
3GPP name T3155
After receiving a valid priority uplink request, if such a function is supported, the
network side updates Token after a specified period . This parameter decides
Description
the interval time.
2-71

Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 10
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.5.32 Additional period for unused token (T3157)

Full name Additional period for unused token
Abbreviation T3157
3GPP name T3157
If priority uplink request is supported, the old token is valid for a period after BSS
Description generates a new token. This parameter decides the validity period of an old token.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2-72

2.5.33 Report period for VGCS/VBS channel modification (Tast)

Full name Report period for VGCS/VBS channel modification
Abbreviation Tast
3GPP name Tast
If a cells VGCS/VBS channel is released, BSS sends a VGCS/VBS Assignment

Status message to MSC. This message means that the cell used for group call
Description is released. If A-interface link is shared, this message is sent after the expiry
of timer Tast (not supported).
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline

Related features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.5.34 Resend period for notification when NCH congestion

(TReSendNchCmd)
Full name Resend period for notification when NCH congestion
Abbreviation TReSendNchCmd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When sending notification through Abis interface, BSC does another attempt
after a period of time if the BTS NCH is overloaded. This parameter decides the
Description
time interval for re-sending notification.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
2-73

Unit 100 ms
Default value 20
Change mode Offline

Related features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2.5.35 Timer of NCH congestion control (TNCHFlowCtl)

Full name Timer of NCH congestion control
Abbreviation TNCHFlowCtl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
After BSC sends a notification, BTS can handle the problem of NCH overloading,
if present, in the reserved period. If BSC does not receive NCH overloading
message during the period, it assumes that the notification is successfully sent. If
Description BSC receives such a message, it assumes that the BTS is still overloaded and
sends the notification again. This parameter decides the waiting time for NCH
overload handling by BTS.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline

Related features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
2-74

2.6 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times Parameters

The interface of GPRS maximum retrying times parameters is shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 GPRS Max Retrying Times Parameters
2.6.1 MAX times of BVC block retry (BVCBlkMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC block retry
Abbreviation BVCBlkMax
3GPP name BVC-BLOCK-RETRIES
If the PTP BVC must be blocked due to OAM intervention or equipment

faults (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS will first set the
BVC status as Blocked and discard the uplink service data.
To notify SGSN to stop sending downlink data, BSS initiates BVC blocking
procedure. BSC repeats BVC blocking procedure after sending BVC BLOCK
message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive BVC BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE
message from SGSN in BSSGPT1, then BVC blocking repeats for a
maximum of N times.
BSC stops BVC blocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer.
Description N depends on maximum retries of BVC BLOCK.
Managed object BSC
2-75

Value range 3 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
Related interfaces Gb interface
2.6.2 MAX times of BVC unblock retry (BVCUnblkMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC unblock retry
Abbreviation BVCUblkMax
3GPP name BVC-UNBLOCK-RETRIES
If the PTP BVC must be unblocked due to the OAM intervention or recovery
of the equipment fault (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS
will first set the BVC status as Unblocked.
To notify SGSN to start sending the downlink data, BSS will initiate the BVC
unblocking procedure. BSC repeats the BVC unblocking procedure after
sending the BVC UNBLOCK message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the
BVC UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT1 then
BVC unblocking repeats for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops BVC unblocking and notifies OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of BVC UNBLOCK.
Managed object BSC
Value range 3 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-76

2.6.3 MAX times of BVC reset retry (BVCRestMax)

Full name MAX times of BVC reset retry
Abbreviation BVCRestMax
3GPP name BVC-RESET-RETRIES
To keep the initial status consistent between the two BVC sides, the Reset
BVC process must be initiated in the following cases: 1) system faults that
affect the BVC function in BSS or SGSN (such as restart upon power-on);
2) lower layer network service entity failure (such as frame relay fault); 3)
lower layer network service entity capability update (for example, frame
relay capability changed from 0kbps to greater than 0kbps); 4) change of the
corresponding relationship between BVC and the cell.
For faults that affect NSE, BSC initiates Signaling BVC RESET procedure.
For faults that affect a single BVC, BSC initiates the PTP BVC RESET
procedure. BSC initiates all PTP BVC RESET procedure for corresponding
NSE after a signaling BVC reset procedure.
BSC repeats the BVC RESET procedure after sending BVC RESET
message to SGSN and if BSC fails to receive BVC RESET ACKNOWLEDGE
message from SGSN in BSSGPT2.
BSC repeats the BVC RESET procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC
stops BVC RESET and notifies OMS for N times if there is no answer. N
Description depends on maximum retries of BVC RESET.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.4 MAX times of NS block retry (NSBlkMax)

Full name MAX times of NS block retry
Abbreviation NSBlkMax
3GPP name NS-BLOCK-RETRIES
2-77

BSC repeats the blocking process when sending the NS BLOCK message
to SGSN. If NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN fails to
reach BSC within specified NS_T1 time then BSC repeats the NS BLOCK
message for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops BLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS BLOCK.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.5 MAX times of NS unblock retry (NSUnblkMax)

Full name MAX times of NS unblock retry
Abbreviation NSUnblkMax
3GPP name NS-UNBLOCK-RETRIES
BSC repeats UNBLOCK procedure after sending NS UNBLOCK message to

SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message
from SGSN within NS_T1 timer, then BSC repeats the NS UNBLOCK
message for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops UNBLOCK procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS UNBLOCK.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
2-78

Relationship None
2.6.6 MAX times of NS alive retry (NSAliveMax)

Full name MAX times of NS alive retry
Abbreviation NSAliveMax
3GPP name NS-ALIVE-RETRIES
BSC repeats alive procedure after sending NS Alive message to SGSN.

If BSC fails to receive NS Alive ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN
within NS_T4 timer then BSC repeats NS Alive message for a maximum of N
times. NS Alive process is specified by the procotol, used to test connection
condition of NSVC terminal side.
BSC stops BSC Alive procedure and notify OMS for N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on maximum retries of NS Alive.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.7 MAX times of suspend retry (SuspendMax)

Full name MAX times of suspend retry
Abbreviation SuspendMax
3GPP name SUSPEND-RETRIES
2-79

MS first sends a SUSPEND message to BSS over SDCCH when a Class

B GPRS MS is about to initiate a voice service. BSS initiates suspending
procedure to SGSN to notify SGSN to stop sending PS paging and downlink
packet data after BSS receives the message.
BSC repeats suspending procedure after sending SUSPEND message to
SGSN. If BSC fails to receive SUSPEND ACK/NACK message from SGSN
in BSSGPT3 then BSC repeats the suspending procedure for a maximum
of N times.
BSC stops suspending and notify OMS for N times if there is no answer. N
Description depends on maximum suspending retries.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.8 MAX times of resume retry (ResumeMax)

Full name MAX times of resume retry
Abbreviation ResumeMax
3GPP name RESUME-RETRIES
BSSGP layer parameters. when GPRS-attached MS leaves a special mode,

BSS adopts one of the following strategies:
1. Notify MS of carrying out "route area upgrade".
2. Notify SGSN of recovering the GPRS service.
In case of Routing Area Update, MS and SGSN directly negotiate GMM
status. With the Resume method (usually for the MS in the packet
transmission status), BSS will initiate the RESUME process to SGSN for the
purpose of notifying SGSN to start the normal packet downlink transmission
action. If BSC fails to receive the RESUME ACK/NACK message from SGSN
in BSSGPT4, then repeats Resume procedure for a maximum of N times.
BSC stops the Resume procedure and notify OMS N times if there is no
Description answer. N depends on the maximum times of resuming retry.
2-80

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.6.9 MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry

(UpdateMax)
Full name MAX times of radio access capabilities update retry
Abbreviation UpdateMax
3GPP name RA-CAPABILITY-UPDATE-RETRIES
BSSGP layer parameters. when MS is establishing uplink/downlink TBF,

BSS requires information about the radio access capability of MS. BSS
obtains such information from SGSN through Radio Access Capabilities
Update procedure.
BSC repeats this procedure after sending the RADIO ACCESS
CAPABILITIES UPDATE message to SGSN. If BSC fails to receive the
RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE ACK/NACK message from
SGSN in BSSGPT5 then the Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure
repeats for a maximum of N times. After N times if there is no answer, then
BSC stops Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure and notify OMS.
Description N depends on the maximum update retry times.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-81

2.6.10 MAX times of PFC create retry (DownLoadBssPFCMax)

Full name Maximum times of retrying to create PFC
Abbreviation DownLoadBssPFCMax
3GPP name DOWNLOAD-BSS-PFC-RETRIES
Max retry times to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received before timer
BSSGPT6 is timeout, BSS sends "Download BSS PFC" message according
to max times of retrying to create PFC. If "Creat BSS PFC" is not received still
after trying DownLoadBSSPRCMax+1, the process is completed and inform
Description O&M.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-01-02-001 Quality of Service (QoS)
Relationship None
2.6.11 MAX times of PFC modify retry (ModifyBssPFCMax)

Full name Maximum times of retrying to modify PFC
Abbreviation ModifyBssPFCMax
3GPP name MODIFY-BSS-PFC-RETRIES
Max retry times to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not received before
timer BSSGPT8 is timeout, BSS sends "Modify BSS PFC" message accord-
ing to max times of retrying to modify PFC. If "Modify BSS PFC Ack" is not
received still after trying ModifyBssPFCMax+1, the process is completed, and
Description inform O&M.
2-82

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7 GPRS Timer Parameters

The interface of GPRS timer parameters is shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 GPRS Timer Parameters
2-83

2.7.1 BVC block/unblock retry time (BssgpT1, 100ms)

Full name BVC block/unblock retry time
Abbreviation BssgpT1
3GPP name T1
It monitors BSSGP blocking/unblocking process.

Global process in BSC central module MP uses the timer value. BSS initiates
BVC blocking/unblocking procedure for a point-to-point BVC in case of OAM
intervention or device faults. BSC repeats this procedure, if SGSN does not
return BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK messages. The interval between
Description the messages is the BVC blocking/unblocking retry time.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.2 BVC reset retry time (BssgpT2, 100ms)

Full name BVC reset retry time
3GPP name T2
It monitors BSSGP reset procedure.

BSS initiates "BVC reset" process when BVC (including PTP BVC and
signaling BVC) is required to be reset (disconnection to connection at Gb
interface, and cell is changed from GPRS support to GPRS/EDGE support)
due to certain reason. BSC repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return
BVC RESET ACK/NACK message. The interval between the messages
Description is the BVC reset retry time.
Managed object BSC
2-84

Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.3 Suspend retry time (BssgpT3, 100ms)

Full name Suspend retry time
3GPP name T3
Class B MS notifies the network to suspend packet service when MS is ready

to perform a voice service. BSS initiates to suspend SGSN procedure after
receiving SUSPEND message from MS and repeats the procedure if SGSN
does not return SUSPEND ACK/NACK message. The interval between the
Description messages is the suspend retry time.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.4 Resume retry time (BssgpT4, 100ms)

Full name Resume retry time
3GPP name T4
2-85

It monitors BSSGP resuming procedure.

Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSS
initiates resuming procedure to SGSN when GPRS-attached MS is not in
dedicated mode and BSS uses Notify SGSN to resume GPRS service policy.
BSS repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return RESUME ACK/NACK
Description message. The interval between the messages is the resuming retry time.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.5 Access capability update retry time (BssgpT5, 100ms)

Full name Access capability update retry time
3GPP name T5
It monitors BSSGP RA_CAPABILITY procedure.

Service process in BSC peripheral module MP uses the timer value. BSC
repeats Radio Access Capability Update procedure after BSS initiates
RA_CAPABILITY procedure to SGSN and if SGSN does not return the
RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK message. The interval between the
Description messages is the retry time for radio access capability update.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-86

2.7.6 PFC creating retry time (BssgpT6, 100ms)

Full name PFC creating retry time
3GPP name T6
PFC creating retry time

The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts while BSC initiates Download PFC process;
l Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN Create PFC message;
Description l Timeout action: retransfer for N times (configurable)
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.7 PFC modifying retry time (BssgpT8, 100ms)

Full name Retry time to modify PFC
3GPP name T8
Retry time to modify PFC. The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout
actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts while BSC initiates Modify BSS PFC process;
l Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN Modify BSS PFC Ack message;
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
2-87

Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.8 RIR Timer (TRIR, 100ms)

Full name RIR Timer
Abbreviation TRIR
3GPP name T(RIR)
RIM RIR timer duration.

This timer starts while controlling BSS sends request message to serving
BSS; this timer stops while receiving PDU messge sent by serving BSS.
If this timer is timeout, message request process is failed, or message
request process is initiated again by controlling BSS.
Description This parameter is valid after "support RIM" function is enabled.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.9 RI Timer (TRI, 100ms)

Full name RI Timer
2-88

Abbreviation TRI
3GPP name T(RI)
RIM RI timer duration.

This timer starts when serving BSS sends message PDU to controlling BSS
and response indication bit is configured as "Ack response is required".
This timer stops while receiving Ack from controlling BSS. If this timer is
timeout, the process is failed, or message indication process is initiated
again by serving BSS.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.10 RIAE Timer (TRIAE, 100ms)

Full name RIAE Timer
Abbreviation TRIAE
3GPP name T(RIAE)
RIM RIAE timer duration.

This timer starts when controlling BSS initiates RAN Information Application
Error process and response indication bit is configured as "Ack response
is required". This timer stops while receiving Ack response from serving
BSS. If this timer is timeout, the process is failed, or this process is initiated
again by controlling BSS.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
2-89

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.11 BVC flow control period (CellFcPer, 10ms)

Full name BVC flow control period
Abbreviation CellFcPer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is the BVC leakage ratio measurement period in the BVC
Flow Control process, that is, BVC long measurement period.
To provide reference to the BVC flow control at SGSN side, the BSSGP
process at BSS side periodically measures the current BVC leakage ratio.
BSC initiates the BVC flow control procedure unconditionally when the
long measurement timer overflows. SGSN confirms to BSC if the difference
of leakage ratios between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. BSC also
initiates BVC flow control procedure with SGSN confirmation if the short
measurement timer overflows, and the difference of the leakage ratio
Description between the two timers exceed CellFcThs.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-016 BVC Flow Control (in DL)
Relationship None
2.7.12 MS flow control period (MsFcPer, 10ms)

Full name MS flow control period
Abbreviation MsFcPer
2-90

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is the MS leakage ratio measurement period in the MS

Flow Control process, that is, MS long measurement period.
For reference of flow control at the SGSN side, the BSSGP process at the
BSS side periodically measures the current leakage ratio of each MS. The
long measurement timer overflow triggers the MS Flow Control process
unconditionally. SGSN must acknowledge BSC if the difference between
the two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs. Short measurement timer
overflow initiates the MS Flow Control process with acknowledgement
Description from SGSN if the difference between two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-017 MS Flow Control (in DL)
Relationship None
2.7.13 Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure (NS_T1, s)

Full name Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure
Abbreviation NS_T1
3GPP name Tns-block
It is the timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure. The conditions of

timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts if NS block/unblock procedure is initiated;
l Timer stop: it stops while receiving SGSN response;
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
2-91

Relationship None
2.7.14 Timer that monitors reset procedure (NS_T2, s)

Full name Timer that monitors reset procedure
Abbreviation NS_T2
3GPP name Tns-reset
It is timer that monitors reset procedure. The conditions of timer start, stop,
and timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts if NS reset is initiated;
Description l Overtime actions: Repeat NS reset process, and the timer restarts
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.15 NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process (NS_T3, s)

Full name NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process
Abbreviation NS_T3
3GPP name Tns-test
2-92

NC-Cycle of NS-VC test process. The conditions of timer start, restart, and
timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts after NS Reset process is finished;
l Timer restart: it restarts after receiving NS Alive Ack;
Description l Timeout action: send NS Alive message on timeout.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.16 Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC (NS_T4, s)

Full name Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC
Abbreviation NS_T4
3GPP name Tns-alive
Timer that monitors alive process of NSVC. The conditions of timer start,
stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts if NS Alive is initiated;
Managed object BSC
Value range 30
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-93

2.7.17 MAX attempt period of reset (NS_T5, s)

Full name MAX attempt period of reset
Abbreviation NS_T5
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Maximum attempt period of reset.

Start timer NS_T5 while starting NS reset process, no reset response is
received before NS_T2 timer is timeout, repeat NS reset process until
timer NS_T5 is timeout. If still no reset response is received, NS reset
process shall be terminated and report NS alarm to O&M. If reset response
Description is received prior to timeout, the timer is cleared.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1800
Unit 100 ms
Default value 1800
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.18 TFI and USF release timer (T3169, 10ms)

Full name TFI and USF release timer
Abbreviation T3169
3GPP name T3169
This parameter is timer T3169. During the packet uplink transmission, if

N3101 or N3103 counter stops, BSS starts the T3169 timer. Network utilizes
TFI and USF resources on release when T3169 stops.
l Timer Start: T3169 timer starts when the counter N3101 = N3101_MAX
or the counter N3103 = N3103_MAX.
l Timer stop condition: None.
Description l Timeout action: Release USF and TFI resources.
Managed object BSC
2-94

Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.19 TBF release timer (T3191, 10ms)

Full name TBF Release Timer
Abbreviation T3191
3GPP name T3191
This parameter is timer T3169. During the packet downlink transmission, if

the BSN of the RLC data block to be transmitted is the maximum (that is,
the final downlink data block), the network will send a RLC data block whose
Final Block Identifier (FBI) domain is 1 and which includes effective RRBP
domain to initialize release of the downlink TBF. Then the network starts
T3191. For each RLC data block that receives FBI with value 1 and contains
effective RRBP domain:
l In acknowledged mode, the MS sends PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK
message whose FBI domain is 1 on the uplink block specified by the
RRBP domain. If the network receives the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message before T3191 expires and has to re-transmit it,
T3191 is stopped and the required RLC data block is re-transmitted. If
re-transmission is not required, T3191 is stopped and T3193 is started.
When T3193 expires, the network releases TBF. The network also
releases TBF when T3191 stops.
l In unacknowledged mode, MS sends the PACKET CONTROL AC-
KNOWLEDGE message in the uplink block specified as per RRBP field.
T3191 terminates to enable only when the network receives the PACKET
CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message before T3191 stops. When
T3193 expires, the network releases TBF. The network also releases
Description TBF when T3191 stops.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
2-95

Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.20 TBF release time of downlink transmission (T3193, 10ms)

Full name TBF release time of downlink transmission
Abbreviation T3193
3GPP name T3193
This parameter is timer T3193 which is used for protection on TBF release
during downlink packet transmission. For details, see the description of
T3191.
l Timer start condition: The final PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK or
PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message is received.
l Timer stop condition: The network establishes a new downlink TBF.
l Timeout action: Release the TFI resource.
This parameter is bigger than timer T3192 to make sure the TFI of MS
Description is unique at the same time.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
Default value 51
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.21 TBF protect time when radio link failure (T3195, 10ms)
Full name TBF protect time when radio link failure
Abbreviation T3195
2-96

3GPP name T3195
This parameter the protection time of TBF when the radio link fails or when
the cell change leads to MS failure to respond. During the packet downlink
transmission, if the counter N3105 expires, BSS will start T3195. When
T3195 expires, the network can use the TFI resource again.
l Timer start: T3195 timer starts when the counter N3105 = N3105_MAX
l Timer stop condition: None.
Description l Timeout action: Release the TFI resource.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.7.22 PS channel delay release timer (PSRelDelay, 100ms)

Full name PS channel delay release timer
Abbreviation PSRelDelay
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Information of releasing this PS channel when this threshold is achieved.

The conditions of timer start, stop, and timeout actions are as follows:
l Timer start: it starts while all service are released on PDTCH;
l Timeout action: release PDTCH channel, during which if this channel is
Description occupied again, the timer shall be cleared.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
2-97

Relationship None
2.8 AMR Half Method Parameters

The interface of AMR half method parameters is shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 AMR Half Method Parameters
2.8.1 AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHalfAcs)

Full name AMR Half Active Codec Set
Abbreviation AmrHalfAcs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The code has 8 bits. Bit 6~ Bit 8: reserved; Bit 5: 7.40 kbps; Bit 4: 6.70
kbps ... Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes represents 1 and No
represents 0. Four coding modes could be set at the most. Default code
Description is 00011110 (that is 30).
2-98

Managed object Cell
4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, value range is
Value range Yes/No.
Unit None
Default value Default is [No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes] in order.
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Start mode (AmrStartMode)
l When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in

AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1~4;
l When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
l When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
Relationship
l When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in
AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1;
l When all five values are configured as "No" in AmrStartMode
interface, value range is null;
2.8.2 Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Full name Thresholds of AMR
Abbreviation AmrThresholds
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The threshold of changing AMR mode includes four factors:

AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4,
AmrThresholds5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
AmrThresholds1AmrThresholds2AmrThresholds3AmrThresh-
olds4AmrThresholds5
AmrThresholds1+AmrHysteresis1AmrThresholds2+AmrHystere-
sis2AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3AmrThresholds4+AmrHystere-
Description sis4AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5
Managed object Cell
2-99

Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~63.

l 0: 0.0 dB;
l 1: 0.5 dB;
l 2: 1.0 dB
...
Value range l 63: 31.5 dB
Unit None
Default value [22, 25, 29, 34, 40]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.8.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

Full name Hysteresis of AMR
Abbreviation AmrHysteresis
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes five factors:

AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4, and
AmrHysteresis5. Also, the following restricted conditions shall be met:
sis2AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3AmrThresholds4+AmrHystere-
Managed object Cell
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Value range is 0~15.

l 0: 0.0 dB;
l 1: 0.5 dB;
l 2: 1.0 dB
...
Unit None
Default value [4, 5, 5, 6, 6]
Change mode Offline
2-100

Relationship None
2.8.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrICM)

Full name Initial codec mode
Abbreviation IsAmrlCM
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Use the coding mode specified by Startmode
Managed object Cell
Value range Startmode codec, Initial codec mode
Unit None
Default value Startmode codec
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.8.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode)

Full name Start mode
Abbreviation AmrStartMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Startmode codec mode
Managed object Cell
2-101

The values are as follows:
l 1: Select the coding mode with lowest bit rate as the initial coding
mode.
l 2: Select the coding mode with the second lowest bit rate, if there is
more than one coding mode.
l 3: Select the coding mode with the third lowest bit rate, if there is more
than two coding modes.
l 4: Select the coding mode with the fourth lowest bit rate, if there are
Value range more than three coding modes.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Related parameters AMR Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)
l When only a value is configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR

Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4;
l When two values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
l When three values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
Relationship
l When four values are configured as "No" within 5 elements in "AMR
Half Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
l When all values are configured as "No" for 5 elements in "AMR Half
Active Codec Set (AmrHarfAcs)" interface, value range is null;
2.8.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)

Full name Enable noise control
Abbreviation IsAmrNscb
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines whether AMR noise suppression is disabled, that

is, to suppress background noise and keep original voice quality.
l No: Enable noise suppression
Description l Yes: Disable noise suppression
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
2-102

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9 AMR Full Method Parameters

The interface of AMR full method parameters is shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 AMR Full Method Parameters
2.9.1 AMR Full Active Codec Set (ArmFullAcs)

Full name AMR full Active Codec Set
Abbreviation AmrFullAcs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-103

The code has 8 bits. The code has 8 bits. Bit 8: 12.2 kbps; Bit 7: 10.2 kbps;
Bit 6: 7.95 kbps; Bit 5: 6.70 kbps ... Bit 2: 5.15 kbps; Bit 1: 4.75 kbps. Yes
represents 1 and No represents 0. Default code is 10101010 (that is
Description 170).
Managed object Cell
4.75 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, 5.90 kbit/s, 6.70 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 10.2
Value range kbit/s, 12.2 kbit/s, value range is Yes/No.
Unit None
Default value Default value is [No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes, No, Yes].
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Start mode (AmrStartMode)
l When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in

l When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
l When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
Relationship
l When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in
AmrStartMode interface, value range is 1;
l When all eight values are configured as "No" in AmrStartMode
interface, value range is null;
2.9.2 Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)

Full name Thresholds of AMR
Abbreviation AmrThresholds
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-104

The threshold of changing AMR mode includes seven factors:

AmrThresholds1, AmrThresholds2, AmrThresholds3, AmrThresholds4,
AmrThresholds5, AmrThresholds6, AmrThresholds7. Also, the following
restricted conditions shall be met:
AmrThresholds1AmrThresholds2AmrThresholds3AmrThresh-
olds4AmrThresholds5AmrThresholds6AmrThresholds7,
sis2AmrThresholds3+AmrHysteresis3 AmrThresholds4+AmrHystere-
Managed object Cell
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~63.

l 0: 0.0 dB;
l 1: 0.5 dB;
l 2: 1.0 dB
...
Unit None
Default value [6, 9, 13, 18, 24, 31, 39]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.3 Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)

Full name Hysteresis of AMR
Abbreviation AmrHysteresis
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The hysteresis of changing AMR mode includes seven factors:

AmrHysteresis1, AmrHysteresis2, AmrHysteresis3, AmrHysteresis4,
AmrHysteresis5, AmrHysteresis6, AmrHysteresis7. Also, the following
restricted conditions shall be met:
sis4 AmrThresholds5+AmrHysteresis5 AmrThresholds6+AmrHystere-
Description sis6 AmrThresholds7+AmrHysteresis7
2-105

Managed object Cell
Including mode 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Value range is 0~15.

l 0: 0.0 dB;
l 1: 0.5 dB;
l 2: 1.0 dB
...
Unit None
Default value [3, 4, 3, 5, 5, 5, 6]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.4 Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)

Full name Initial codec mode
Abbreviation IsAmrICM
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Use the coding mode specified by Startmode
Managed object Cell
Value range Startmode codec, Initial codec mode
Unit None
Default value Startmode codec
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.5 Start mode (AmrStartMode)

Full name Start mode
2-106

Abbreviation AmrStartMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Startmode codec mode
Managed object BSC
l When four values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1~4;
l When five values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
l When six values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR full
l When seven values are configured as "No" within 8 elements in "AMR
full Active Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is 1;
l When all values are configured as "No" for 8 elements in "AMR full Active
Codec Set (AmrFullAcs)" interface, value range is null;
l 1: Select the coding mode with lowest bit rate as the initial coding mode.
l 2: Select the coding mode with the second lowest bit rate, if there is
more than one coding mode.
l 3: Select the coding mode with the third lowest bit rate, if there is more
than two coding modes.
l 4: Select the coding mode with the fourth lowest bit rate, if there are
Value range more than three coding modes.
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.9.6 Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)

Full name Enable noise control
Abbreviation IsAmrNscb
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-107

This parameter defines whether AMR noise suppression is disabled, that

is, to suppress background noise and keep original voice quality.
l No: Enable noise suppression
Description l Yes: Disable noise suppression
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10 GPRS Property 1 Parameters

The interface of GPRS property 1 parameters is shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 GPRS Property 1 Parameters
2-108

2.10.1 Cn
Full name Cn
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine the increase of coding mode level.

Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data block
may employ the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, with data rates 9.05 kbps,
13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low level coding
mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput.
Different coding modes can be chosen for each timeslot or even each TBF.
During data transmission of GRPR, to reach the maximum radio
throughput, the network shall select the coding mode dynamically
according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality.
Good radio transmission quality means that the probability of the
retransmission of the error radio blocks is small. In this time the coding
mode that carries large data volume (that is, high level coding mode) can
be used.
For TBF (uplink and downlink) in the channel coding mode CSn (1n3), if
the number of data blocks transmitted consecutively and correctly exceeds
the predefined parameter Cn[n-1], the coding mode will be increased by
one level.
Footnote 1, 2, and 3 in the interface are coding conversion parameters
Description among CS1~CS2, CS2~CS3, and CS3~CS4.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 85
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.2 Nn
Full name Nn
Abbreviation None
2-109

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine the decrease of coding mode level. It

is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Different coding modes can be chosen for each timeslot or even each
TBF. During data transmission of GRPR, to reach the maximum radio
When the radio transmission quality is poor, the coding mode with stronger
anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) shall be
used. The coding level decreases to one level if Nn[n-2] data blocks are
transmitted, the number of consecutive data blocks losses in the coding
mode CSn (2n4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.3 Xn (%)
Full name Xn (%)
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-110

This parameter is the threshold for determining the decrease in the level of
the coding mode. It is used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Different coding modes can be chosen for each timeslot or even each
TBF. During data transmission of GRPR, to reach the maximum radio
When the radio transmission quality is poor, the coding mode with stronger
anti-interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) shall be used.
For TBF (uplink and downlink) in the channel coding mode CSn (2n4),
if Xn[n-2]% of the Nn[n-2] data blocks transmitted are lost consecutively,
the coding mode will be decreased by one level.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.4 MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data

blocks (N3101)
Full name MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks
Abbreviation N3101
3GPP name N3101
2-111

This parameter is counter N3101, which is used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP.

During the packet uplink transmission, BSS will specify USF
(corresponding to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the
network receives correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears
for that TBF. If the number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds
N3101, then T3169 timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources
Description when T3169 stops.
Managed object BSC
Value range 9 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.5 Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries (N3103)

Full name Times of packet uplink ACK/NACK retries
Abbreviation N3103
3GPP name N3103

During the packet uplink transmission, if the network detects that at the
end of uplink TBF (CV = 0, and V(Q) = V(R)), all RLC data blocks have
been received, the network shall send a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK
message and set the Final Acknowledgement Identifier (FAI) as 1. The
header of the RLC/MAC control block contains a valid RRBP domain.
And the counter N3103 is cleared.
MS sends PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the block
specified in RRBP and release TBF if MS receives PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message with FAI1 from network side.
Network re-transmits PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message with N3103
counter incrementing, if the network fails to receive PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGE message in the radio block specified in the RRBP field.
The network starts T3169 timer if the value of N3103 exceeds the limiting
Description N3103max. Network uses the TFI and USF resources when T3169 stops.
2-112

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.10.6 MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink

RLC/MAC control message (N3105)
MAX allowed number of continuous losses of uplink RLC/MAC control mes-
Full name sage
Abbreviation N3105
3GPP name N3105

During the packet uplink transmission, BSS will specify USF
(corresponding to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the
network receives correct data from a specified uplink block, N3101 clears
for that TBF. If the number of losses in specified uplink block exceeds
N3101, then T3169 timer starts. Network uses the TFI and USF resources
Description when T3169 stops.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-113

2.11 GPRS Property 2 Parameters

Figure 2-11 GPRS Property 2 Parameters
2.11.1 NACC supported (NACCSupport)

Full name NACC supported
Abbreviation NACCSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
LLC framework conversion refers to the process: on NACC, if target cell is

the cell in BSC, downlink LLC frame data that has not been sent to this MS
from BSC is transferred to target cell, and then it is sent to this MS after MS
Description uplink TBF link is established.
Managed object BSC
Not Support NACC; Support NACC, not LLC Frame Transfer; Support
Value range NACC and LLC Frame Transfer.
Unit None
Default value Not support NACC
2-114

Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-02-02-010 Network-assisted Cell Change
Relationship None
2.11.2 BSC's net operation mode (NMO)

Full name BSC's net operation mode
Abbreviation NMO
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
There are three network operation modes:

l Mode 1: The network sends to the "GPRS-attached" MS the CS pag-
ing message on the same channel of GPRS paging channel (packet
or CCCH paging channel), or on the GPRS traffic channel (when it is
assigned with a packet data channel). It means that MS has to monitor
only one paging channel.
Network operation mode 1 is required while configuring PBCCH; Gs
interfce is required while configuring network operation mode 1.
l Mode 2: The network sends to the GPRS-attached MS the CS pag-
ing message on the CCCH paging channel, which is also for GPRS
paging. It means that MS only has to monitor the CCCH paging chan-
nel. However, when it is assigned with a packet data channel, the CS
paging message will still be sent on the CCCH paging channel.
l Mode 3: The network sends to the "GPRS-attached" MS the CS paging
message on the CCCH paging channel, and sends the GPRS paging
message either on the packet paging channel (if any in the cell) or on
the CCCH paging channel. Mode 3 indicates that the MS must monitor
two paging channels (if packet paging channel is available in the cell)
Description in order to receive CS or GPRS paging message.
Managed object BSC
Value range Network operation mode 1, 2, and 3
Unit None
Default value Network Operation Mode 2
Change mode Offline
2-115

Relationship None
2.11.3 BSC support page coordination (PagCoordination)

Full name BSC support page coordination
Abbreviation PagCoordination
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if intra-BSC cell supports CS based paging.

This parameter is broadcasted in GPRS CELL OPTIONS through SI13,
PSI1, and PSI13 messages. For more information, refer to the protocol
Description 04.60 12.24. It is invalid when NMO is 1.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.4 Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication

(IsSatelliteGB)
Full name Satellite transmission at Gb interface indication
Abbreviation IsStatelliteGB
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes if BSC system supports "satellite transmission at Gb interface".

Description This function is mainly to implement the modification of delay.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
2-116

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.5 Extended RLC send window allowed (IsWindowExpend)

Full name Extended RLC send window allowed
Abbreviation IsWindowExpend
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description if extended RLC send window is allowed
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.6 Support TBF establish (TBF_EST)

Full name Support TBF establish
Abbreviation TBF_EST
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if BSC supports TBF establishment process. TBF

flow establishment refers to while releasing uplink TBF, to determin if new
uplink TBF shall be established immediately for CTRL_ACK field in Packet
Description Control Acknowledgement message.
2-117

Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.7 Support signal extended uplink TBF (Signal_EUTBF)

Full name Support signal extended uplink TBF
Abbreviation SIGNAL_EUTBF
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if signaling uplink TBF can use extended uplink
TBF functions. This parameter has the functions when the cell supports for
extended uplink TBF. Signaling TBF at this place refers to TBF established
Description to transmit GMM signaling.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-014 Delayed TBF Release in UL
Relationship None
2.11.8 Highest coding scheme of signal TBF (SigTBFMaxCode)

Full name Highest coding scheme of signal TBF
Abbreviation SigTBFMaxCode
2-118

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
While transferring upper signaling, such as PDP activation, routing area

Description update, this parameter can restrict the highest coding mode of this kind of
signaling data.
Managed object BSC
Value range MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9
Unit None
Default value MCS6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.9 Optimized PoC service support (PocSupport)

Full name Optimized PoC service support
Abbreviation PocSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if PoC subscriber applies for dedicated POC channel. PoC

indicates Push to talk over Cellular. Consider the MS with proper function
Description
as walkie-talkie. This kind of MS has a talkie key. After pressing this key,
you can talk with other subscribers or in a group.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-119

2.11.10 Highest coding scheme of PoC service in GPRS

(PocAttSelt_0)
Full name Highest coding scheme of PoC service in GPRS
Abbreviation PocAttSelt_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes the highest coding mode that can be used while GPRS MS
Description
does POC service.
Managed object BSC
Value range CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4
Unit None
Default value CS3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.11 Highest coding scheme of PoC service in EGPRS

(PocAttSelt_1)
Full name Highest coding scheme of PoC service in EGPRS
Abbreviation PocAttSelt_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes the highest coding mode that can be used while EGPRS
Description
MS does POC service.
Managed object BSC
Value range MCS1 ~ MCS9
Unit None
Default value MCS6
Change mode Offline
2-120

Relationship None

(PSCapaThs_UL)
Full name Maximal users of PoC service on shared PS channel 0
Abbreviation PSCapaThs_UL
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the upper limit of PoC service subscribers in shared uplink

channel.
If dedicated PoC channel is configured, it indicates the upper limit of PoC
Description
subscribers on the uplink of each dedicated PoC channel. If it exceeds
this number, PoC subscriber access is not allowed on the uplink of this
dedicated PoC channel.
Managed object BSC
Value range 2~6
Unit Times
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

(PSCapaThs_DL)
Full name Maximal users of PoC service on shared PS channel 1
Abbreviation PSCapaThs_DL
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-121

It indicates the upper limit of PoC service subscribers in shared downlink

channel.
If dedicated PoC channel is configured, it indicates the upper limit of PoC
Description
subscribers on the downlink of each dedicated PoC channel. If it exceeds
this number, PoC subscriber access is not allowed on the downlink of
this dedicated PoC channel.
Managed object BSC
Value range 2~6
Unit Times
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.11.14 SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 (LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15)

Full name SAPI0 ~ SAPI15
Abbreviation LLCTranSupport_0 ~ LLCTranSupport_15
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
SAPI0 ~ SAPI15 indicate whether 16 types of service support LLC frame

transferring. There are 16 BITs, and the following lists the meaning of each BIT:
l BIT1: Indicates SAPI=1, LLGMM;
l BIT3, 5, 9, 11: Indicates SAPI=3, 5, 9, 11 respectively;
l BIT2: Indicates TOM2;
l BIT8: Indicates TOM8;
l BIT7: Indicates LLSMS;
l BIT0: Indicates whether it supports PCCO triggering LLC frame transferring
Description
(0 means not supporting, 1 means supporting);
l BIT12 ~ BIT13: Indicates the interval of downlink buffer status
reestablishment (0: 100ms, 1: 200ms, 2: 300ms, 4: 400ms);
l BIT14 ~ BIT15: Indicates whether downlink restablishment is supported
and the number of reestablishments (0: not reestablish, 1: reestablish
once, 2: reestablish twice, 3: reestablish three times)
l Other positions indicate being reserved.
2-122

Managed object BSC
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2.11.15 PDU buffer time (Info_1_16)

Full name PDU buffer time
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the longest duration of BSSGP instance being kept
after being released at radio interface. During cell reselection, the old BSSGP
instance is kept. If MS has not been accessed to the new cell within a certain
time longer than this parameter's value, then the old BSSGP instance will be
Description released.
The value 0 indicates no buffer. The value 60000 indicates using the buffer time
PduLifeTime of SGSN's life cycle. Other values indicate using the minimum of
the following two values: configuration data and PduLifeTime of SGSN.
Managed object BSC
Unit 10 ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2-123

2.12 BVC Flow Control Parameters

The interface of BVC flow control parameters is shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 BVC Flow Control Parameters
2.12.1 BVC flow control supported (BVCFlowCtrl)

Full name BVC flow control supported
Abbreviation BVCFlowCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-124

BVC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and
only in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes,
in order to avoid one BVC on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because
of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC
frame caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because
of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
BSSGP process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of BVC
periodically (including short statistics and long statistics). This parameter
originates unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN
acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking
rates is over CellFcThs. BVC flow control supported originates and
SGSN confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and
Description discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over CellFcThs.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.2 MS flow control supported (MSFlowCtrl)

Full name MS flow control supported
Abbreviation MSFlowCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MS flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only
in downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes, to
avoid one MS on BSS to abandoning some LLC data because of the
overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too many LLC frame
caches) and to avoid abandoning new downlink LLC data because of limit
of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches).
BSSGP process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of MS
periodically (including short statistics and long statistics). This parameter
originates unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN
Description acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking
2-125

rates is over MsFcThs. MS flow control supported originates and SGSN

confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and discrepant
range of adjacent leaking rates is over MsFcThs.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.3 Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode)

Full name Flow control mode
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC has different flow control modes report flow control parameters to
SGSN. The modes are as follows:
l 1: Mode 1: Report flow control parameters according to actual traffic
on radio interface counted at BSC;
l 2: Mode 2: Report flow control parameters according to max traffic
that the cell can provide;
l 3: Mode 3: Reserved
"Flow control mode 1 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 1"; "Flow
Description control mode 2 parameter" is enabled if selecting "mode 2".
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-126

2.12.4 Parameter of flow control mode1 (FlowCtrlMode1Para)

Full name Parameter of Flow control mode 1
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode1Para
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reports flow control parameters according to actual traffic at radio in-
terface when adopting mode 1. Actual counted value is smaller due to
radio interface re-transmission and TBF failure. So BSC multiplies the ac-
tual traffic with a multiple determined by this parameter when reporting flow
Description control parameters.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit 100 bps
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.5 Parameter of flow control mode2 (FlowCtrlMode2Para)

Full name Parameter of Flow control mode 2
Abbreviation FlowCtrlMode2Para
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reports flow control parameters according to max traffic that the cell
can provide when adopting mode 2. Maximum value depends on config-
ured channels. Counting formula: channels * max traffic that every channel
can provide. This parameter is max traffic that every channel can provide,
Description with the unit of 100 bps.
Managed object BSC
2-127

Unit 100 bps
Default value 214
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.6 BVC flow control R MIN value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps)

Full name BVC flow control R MIN value
Abbreviation BVCFlowCtrlRMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported BVC flow control
parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported pa-
Description rameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 bps
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.7 MS flow control R MIN value (MSFlowCtrlRMin, 100bps)

Full name MS flow control R MIN value
Abbreviation MSFlowCtrlRMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-128

This is the minimum value of leaking rate R in reported MS flow control

parameters under all kinds of flow control mode, that is, the reported pa-
Description rameter R must be equal or over the set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 bps
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.12.8 Coefficient of BVC bucket size (Info_2_0)

Full name Coefficient of BVC bucket size
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to calculate the size of BVC bucket. User can modify
Description this parameter's value to change the size of BVC bucket.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 3000
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2-129

2.12.9 Coefficient of MS bucket (Info_2_16)

Full name Coefficient of MS bucket
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to calculate the size of MS bucket. User can modify this
Description parameter's value to change the size of MS bucket.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 300
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12.10 CBL in BVC/MS flow control (Info_1_9)

Full name CBL in BVC/MS flow control
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether Current Bucket Level (CBL) should be

Description reported in the BVC/MS flow control message.
Managed object BSC
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
2-130

Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2.12.11 Support of PFC flow control procedures (PFCFlowCtrl)

Full name Support of PFC flow control procedures
Abbreviation PFCFlowCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
PFC flow control occurs at Gb interface between SGSN and BSS, and only
in downlink. BSS provides control parameters and SGSN executes. It helps
avoid a PFC in BSS discarding some LLC data due to timeout caused by
grouping channels being too busy (too many LLC frame buffers) and avoid
discarding new downlink LLC data due to limited memory resource (overflow
Description
of LLC frame buffer).
The BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically measures the current leakage
ratio of MS. When the statistic timer overflows, the 'PFC Flow Control' process
is initiated unconditionally.
Managed object BSC
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters

Interface of FUC flow control map parameters is shown in Figure 2-13.
2-131

Figure 2-13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters
2.13.1 Flow Control Reason

Full name Flow control reason
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes FUC flow control level.

Description The parameter value corresponding to level 0 cant be modified.
Managed object BSC
Value range Level 0 ~ 10
Unit None
[Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4, Level 5, Level 6, Level 7, Level

Default value 8, Level 9, Level 10]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-132

2.13.2 Emergency Call

Full name Emergency call
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes hurry call percentage corresponding to certain

FUC flow control level.
Description The parameter value corresponding to level 0 can't be modified.
Managed object BSC
Value range Level 0 ~ 10, value range is: 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
ZGRB-03-04-001 BSC Load Control

Related features ZGRB-01-03-001 PTP Emergency Call Handling
Relationship None
2.13.3 Call Rebuilt

Full name Call Rebuilt
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes call rebuilt percentage corresponding to certain

Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 50, 75, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100]
2-133

Change mode
Offline
Relationship None
2.13.4 Call Response

Full name Call Response
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes call response percentage corresponding to

certain FUC flow control level.
Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 50, 50, 75, 75, 75]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.5 Calling
Full name Calling
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
2-134

3GPP reference None
This parameter describes calling percentage corresponding to certain

Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 40, 78, 100, 100, 100]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.6 Location Update

Full name Location Update
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes site refresh percentage corresponding to certain

Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 25, 25, 50, 75]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-135

2.13.7 GPRS Access

Full name GPRS access
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 20, 46, 73, 100, 100, 100, 100, 100]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.13.8 Restore
Full name Restore
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Managed object BSC
Unit %
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
2-136

Relationship None
2.13.9 Flow control map slim adjust (bit)

Full name Flow control map slim adjust (bit)
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
FUC establishes a channel request refuse map. After flow control is

started, you can be based on this bitmap to determine if certain access
can be refused.
Each bit in this map represents if to allow channel access due to this
Description reason: 1 represents refusal, 0 represents allowance.
Managed object BSC
Value range None
Unit Bit
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14 EDGE Property Parameters

The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 2-14.
2-137

Figure 2-14 EDGE Property Parameters
2.14.1 R99 Ind (R99Ind)

Full name R99 Ind
Abbreviation R99Ind
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates R99 protocol version ID. BSS considers this parameter as a ba-
sis to determine if to encode/decode message field added after R99 version
Description for the protocol.
Managed object BSC
Value range Non R99, Version of R99
Unit None
Default value Version of R99
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-138

2.14.2 Support of enhanced radio status procedures (EnRadioStu)

Full name Support of enhanced radio status procedures
Abbreviation EnRadioStu
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
On the basis of Radio Status, enhanced Radio Status reports three more cause
values:
l x02: Indicates the enhanced Radio Status process is used when the cell
reselection occurs. Usually, it helps satisfy the service requirement to the
maximum extent.
l x03: Indicates the enhanced Radio Status process is used when the MS
is required to perform cell reselection and LLC frame transferring is not
supported.
l x04: Indicates that SGSN is notified when BSC detects cell reselection
failure.
Description SGSN has the following responses:
l When Radio Status with the cause value x02 is received, the downlink LLC
frame sending is resumed after cell reselection is completed.
l When Radio Status with the cause value x03 is received, either the
downlink data sending is resumed after cell reselection is completed, or
Radio Status with other cause values are received.
l When Radio Status with the cause value x04 is received, if there are data
to be sent to MS, then the downlink LLC frame sending is resumed.
With Radio Status that supports multiple cause values, SGSN can better
understand the status of MS, which avoids sending data to the old cell blindly.
Managed object BSC
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
2-139

2.14.3 RS
Full name RS
Abbreviation RS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Uplink throughput weight value at Gb interface, the dynamic Abis adjust-

Description ment parameter. RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.4 RR
Full name RR
Abbreviation RR
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Downlink throughput weight value at Gb interface, the dynamic Abis adjust-

Description ment parameter. RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-140

2.14.5 RA
Full name RA
Abbreviation RA
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Weight value of EGPRS MS accessing request times, the dynamic Abis ad-
Description justment parameter. RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.6 RM
Full name RM
Abbreviation RM
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Weight value of high-bandwidth request times, the dynamic Abis adjustment

Description parameter. RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-141

2.14.7 RB
Full name RB
Abbreviation RB
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Weight value of the highest bandwidth usage, the dynamic Abis adjustment
Description parameter. RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.8 RG
Full name RG
Abbreviation RG
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the weight of GPRS carrier proportion,

Description RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-142

2.14.9 RE
Full name RE
Abbreviation RE
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the weight of EDGE carrier proportion,

Description RS+RR+RA+RM+RB+RG+RE must be equal to 100.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.14.10 ABIS resource dynamic manage (Info_1_8)

Full name ABIS resource dynamic manage
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates whether Abis resource dynamic management is

allowed.
When dynamic Abis resource management is allowed, Abis resources are
allocate dynamically. That is, when packet Abis resource is applied, BSC
allocates the resource according to the quota. Each cell in the resource
sharing pool is allocated with a quota. The total of the quotas of all cells in
the pool is equal to 100. The quotas are calculated based on statistic items.
Description
Each statistic item is assigned with a weight based on the importance. The
weights include RS, RR, RA, RM, RB, RG, and RE. The statistic items include
cell carrier statistics, packet access times, packet transmission traffic at
uplink and downlink, and EGPRS MS request times. The calculation quota is
re-calculated periodically with a certain interval. The database allocates Abis
timeslot to PS services of each cell according to the quota.
2-143

Managed object Site/BSC
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15 eMLPP Set

Figure 2-15 shows the interface of EMLPP set.
Figure 2-15 eMLPP Set
2.15.1 Strategy for preemption when assign (AssPreemptstrategy)

Full name Strategy for preemption when assign
2-144

Abbreviation AssPreemptstrategy
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides the preemption policy if there is no available channel

Description
on assginment.
Managed object BSC
Priority 1 ~ 15. Value range is: Only forced handover; First forced handover;
Value range
First forced release.
Unit None
Default value First forced handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.2 Strategy for preemption when handover (HoPreemptstrategy)

Full name Strategy for preemption when handover
Abbreviation HoPreemptstrategy
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides the preemption policy if there is no available channel

Description
on handover.
Managed object BSC
Priority 1 ~ 15. Value range is: Only forced handover; First forced handover,
Value range
if fail, forced release; First forced release.
Unit None
Default value First forced handover, if fail, forced release
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-145

2.15.3 Maximum forced handover times when assign

(AssForcedHoTry)
Full name Maximum forced handover times when assign
Abbreviation AssForcedHoTry
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced handover if there is no

Description
available channel during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Value range Priority 1 ~ 15, value range: 1 ~ 5
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.4 Maximum forced handover times when handover

(HoForcedHoTry)
Full name Maximum forced handover times when handover
Abbreviation HoForcedHoTry
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced handover if there is no

Description
available channel during handover.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
2-146

Relationship None
2.15.5 Maximum forced release times when assign

(AssForcedRelTry)
Full name Maximum forced release times when assign
Abbreviation AssForcedRelTry
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the maximum number of retry for forced release if there is no

Description
available channel during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.6 Maximum forced release times when handover

(HoForcedRelTry)
Full name Maximum forced release times when handover
Abbreviation HoForcedRelTry
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the max number of retry for forced release if there is no

Description
available channel during handover.
Managed object BSC
Unit None
2-147

Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.7 Preemption duration when assign (AssPreempTimer, 100ms)

Full name Preemption duration when assign
Abbreviation AssPreempTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the period of forced handover or forced release if there is no

Description available channel during assignment. If the period elapses, only queue is
allowed, and new forced handover or forced release not required.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.8 Preemption duration when handover (HoPreempTimer,

100ms)
Full name Preemption duration when handover
Abbreviation HoPreempTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-148

It determines the period of forced handover or forced release if there is no

Description available channel during handover. If the period elapses, only queue is
allowed, and new forced handover or forced release not required.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.9 Timer for start forced release when assign

(AssForceRelTimer)
Full name Timer for start forced release when assign
Abbreviation AssForceRelTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines whether to do forced handover first if both forced handover

and forced release are allowed when there is no available channel in the
Description
cell during assignment, or to do forced release and do not forced handover
after no any channel is gotten.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-149

2.15.10 Timer for start forced release when handover

(HoForceRelTimer)
Full name Timer for start forced release when handover
Abbreviation HoForceRelTimer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if to do forced handover if both forced handover and forced

release are allowed when there is no available channel in the cell during
Description
handover, or to do forced release and do not forced handover after no any
channel is gotten.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.11 Interval for search forced handover target when assign

(AssForceHoInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced handover target when assign
Abbreviation AssForceHoInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced handover tar-
Description get again if forced handover target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
2-150

Relationship None
2.15.12 Interval for search forced handover target when handover

(HoForceHoInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced handover target when handover
Abbreviation HoForceHoInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced handover tar-
Description get again if forced handover target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell on handover.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.13 Interval for search forced release target when assign

(AssForceRelInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced release target when assign
Abbreviation AssForceRelInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced release tar-
Description get again if forced release target cannot be found when there is no available
channel in the cell during assignment.
2-151

Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.14 Interval for search forced release target when handover

(HoForceRelInterval, 100ms)
Full name Interval for search forced release target when handover
Abbreviation HoForceRelInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the waiting time for searching forced release target
Description again if forced release target can not be found when there is no available
channel in the cell on handover.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.15 Queue timer for assign (RmsT11, 100ms)

Full name Queue timer for assign
Abbreviation RmsT11
2-152

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the maximum time of waiting for queue if there is no available

Description channel in the cell during assignment. The assignment fails if no any
resource is gotten.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.16 Queue timer for handover (RmsTqho, 100ms)

Full name Queue period for handover
Abbreviation RmsTqho
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the maximum time of waiting for queue if there is no available

Description channel in the cell on handover. The handover fails if no any resource
is gotten.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-153

2.15.17 Queue indicate when assign (QueueIndAss)

Full name Queue indicate when assign
Abbreviation QueueIndAss
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if queue is allowed or set it per cell if there are no available

Description
channels in the cell during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Queue forbidden when assign, Queue allowed when assign, According to the
Value range
cell
Unit None
Default value Queue forbidden when assign
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.18 Queue allowed when handover (QueueIndHo)

Full name Queue allowed when handover
Abbreviation QueueIndHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if queue is allowed or set it per cell if there are no available

Description
channels in the cell during handover.
Managed object BSC
Queue forbidden when handover, Queue allowed when handover, According

Value range
to the cell
Unit None
Default value Queue forbidden when handover
Change mode Offline
2-154

Relationship None
2.15.19 Forced release indicate when assign (PreemptionIndAss)

Full name Forced release indicate when assign
Abbreviation PreemptionIndAss
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced release is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Forced release forbidden when assign, Forced release allowed when assign,
Value range
According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced release forbidden when assign
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.20 Forced release allowed when handover (PreemptionIndHo)

Full name Forced release allowed when handover
Abbreviation PreemptionIndHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced release is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during handover.
Managed object BSC
Forced release forbidden when handover, Forced release allowed when han-
Value range
dover, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced release forbidden when handover
2-155

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.21 Forced handover indication for assign (ForcedHolndAss)

Full name Forced handover indication for assign
Abbreviation ForcedHolndAss
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced handover is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during assignment.
Managed object BSC
Forced handover forbidden when assign, Forced handover allowed when as-
Value range
sign, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced handover forbidden when assigned
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.22 Forced handover indication for handover (ForcedHolndHo)

Full name Forced handover indication for handover
Abbreviation ForcedHolndHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if forced handover is allowed or set it per cell if there are no

Description
available channels in the cell during handover.
Managed object BSC
2-156

Forced handover forbidden when handover, Forced handover allowed when

Value range
handover, According to the cell
Unit None
Default value Forced handover forbidden when handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.23 Wait resource timer after forced handover

Full name Wait resource timer after forced handover
Abbreviation ForceHoWaitEmergServicelPrio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the time of waiting for resource after forced handover. If getting
the resource within this period, do not initiate forced handover or forced
Description release and quit from the queue. If can not get it, initiate forced handover,
forced release, or queue.
This parameter is configured according to the time requird to finish handover.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 40
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.24 Wait resource timer after forced release

Full name Wait resource timer after forced release
Abbreviation ForceRelWaitEmergServicelPrio
2-157

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines the time of waiting for resource after forced release. If getting
the resource within this period, do not initiate forced release and quit from
Description the queue. If can not get it, initiate forced release or queue.
This parameter is configured according to the time required to finish
handover.
Managed object BSC
Value range 10 ~ 40
Unit 100 ms
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.25 Enough low priority for preemption (LowestPriority)

Full name Enough low priority for preemption
Abbreviation LowestPriority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
To reduce the search times when searching for the target of forced handover
and forced release, if target priority is not higher than this priority, it is
Description
considered that the priority of this target is low enough, and do not search for
the lowest priority. 1: highest priority
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-158

2.15.26 Enough call duration for preemption (LongCallDuration)

Full name Enough call duration for preemption (LongCallDuration)
Abbreviation LongCallDuration
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
To reduce search times while searching for the target of forced handover
and forced release, if the duration of target call is longer than this parameter
Description
value, it is considered that the duration of target call is sufficient and do not
search the target with the longest call duration.
Managed object BSC
Unit 480 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.27 Forced handover target penalty time (ForceHoPenalty)

Full name Forced handover target penalty time
Abbreviation ForceHoPenalty
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines this instance can not be used as forced handover target within
Description
this period after forced handover fails.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit 480 ms
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
2-159

Relationship None
2.15.28 Priority of emergency service (EmergServicelPrio)

Full name Priority of emergency service
Abbreviation EmergServicelPrio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It determines if the call with higher or equivalent priority is emergency call.

Description
1: highest priority
Managed object BSC
Value range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.29 Preempt Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker

(DChlVBSTalkerPPri)
Full name Preempt Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker
Abbreviation DChlVBSTalkerPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-160

When the system initiates forced release and searches for the forced
release instance, if there are multiple instances with the same lowest eMLPP
level and they belong to different service types, such as VGCS talker,
VGCS listener, and VBS talker, the system allocates channel priority levels
according to the service type. The system determines the final forced
Description
release instance according to the allocated priority level, that is, the one with
the lowest priority level. A lower value indicates a higher priority level.
The forced release priority level of VBS talker channel is allocated depending
on the service type carried on the channel.
This parameter is supported from version 8.00.200c.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.30 Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with Talker

(VGChlNOTalkerPPri)
Full name Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with Talker
Abbreviation VGChlVGTalkerPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced release priority level of VGCS channel (with talker) is allocated
depending on the service type carried on the channel.
Managed object BSC
2-161

Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.31 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker

(DChlVGTalkerPPri)
Full name Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker
Abbreviation DChlVGTalkerPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced release priority level of dedicated channel (with VGCS talker) is
allocated depending on the service type carried on the channel.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-162

2.15.32 Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with no Talker

(VGChlNOTalkerPPri)
Full name Preempt priority of VGCS Channel with no Talker
Abbreviation VGChlNOTalkerPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced release priority level of VGCS channel (with no talker) is allocated
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.33 Preempt Priority of VBS Channel (VBChlNOTalkerPPri)

Full name Preempt Priority of VBS Channel
Abbreviation VBChlNOTalkerPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-163

Description
The forced release priority level of VBS channel is allocated depending on
the service type carried on the channel.
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.34 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data

(DChlP2PDataPPri)
Full name Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data
Abbreviation DChlP2PDataPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced release priority level of dedicated channel (with P2P data) is
Managed object BSC
2-164

Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.35 Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech

(DChlP2PSpeechPPri)
Full name Preempt priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech
Abbreviation DChlP2PSpeechPPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced release priority level of dedicated channel (with P2P speech) is
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-165

2.15.36 ForceHO priority of VGCS Channel with Talker

(VGChlVGTalkerHPri)
Full name ForceHO priority of VGCS Channel with Talker
Abbreviation VGChlVGTalkerHPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When the system initiates forced handover and searches for the forced
handover instance, if there are multiple instances with the same lowest
eMLPP level and they belong to different service types, such as VGCS
talker, VGCS listener, and VBS talker, the system allocates channel priority
levels according to the service type. The system determines the final forced
Description
handover instance according to the allocated priority level, that is, the one
with the lowest priority level. A lower value indicates a higher priority level.
The forced handover priority level of VGCS channel (with talker) is allocated
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.37 ForceHO Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker

(DChlVBSTalkerHPri)
Full name ForceHO Priority of Dedicated Channel With VBS Talker
Abbreviation DChlVBSTalkerHPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
2-166

Description
The forced handover priority level of channel with VBS talker is allocated
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.38 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker

(DChlVGTalkerHPri)
Full name ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with VGCS Talker
Abbreviation DChlVGTalkerHPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced handover priority level of dedicated channel (with VGCS talker) is
Managed object BSC
2-167

Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2.15.39 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data

(DChlP2PDataHPri)
Full name ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P data
Abbreviation DChlP2PDataHPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced handover priority level of dedicated channel (with P2P data) is
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-168

2.15.40 ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech

(DChlP2PSpeechHPri)
Full name ForceHO priority of Dedicated Channel with P2P Speech
Abbreviation DChlP2PSpeechHPri
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description
The forced handover priority level of dedicated channel (with P2P speech) is
Managed object BSC
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
2-169

2-170

Chapter 3
External Cell Parameters
External cell parameters include GERAN external cell parameter and UTRAN external cell
parameter.
Table of Contents
GERAN External Cell Parameters ..............................................................................3-1
UTRAN External Cell Parameters.............................................................................3-22
3.1 GERAN External Cell Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > External Cell Config and choose Create
> GERAN External Cell from the shortcut menu. The Create GERAN External Cell
interface is displayed.
The interface of GERAN external cell parameters is shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Basic Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell
3-1

3.1.1 External cell ID

Full name External cell ID
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description External cell number
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.2 Cell type (CellType)

Full name Cell Type
Abbreviation CellType
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description GERAN external cell type
Managed object Cell
Value range Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell
Unit None
Default value Macro Cell
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-2

Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters
3.1.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC (MCC)
Abbreviation MCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify

Description the home country of the mobile user (or system).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 999
Unit None
Default value 460
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC (MNC)
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a spe-

Description cific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC).
Managed object Cell
l When MNC3Digits is selected as 2 digits, MNC value will be 0~99;

Value range l When MNC3Digits is selected as 3 digits, MNC value will be 0~999;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-3

3.1.5 Frequency band (FreqBand)

Full name Frequency Band
Abbreviation FreqBand
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description The frequency band of the system
Managed object Cell
l When the value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) is

DCS1800, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, GSM850.
Value range PCS1900, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, PCS1900, GSM850.
Unit None
Default value GSM900
Change mode Offline
Related parameters BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn)
Relationship None
3.1.6 BCCH frequency (BcchArfcn)

Full name BCCH frequency
Abbreviation BcchArfcn
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description ARFCN of the cell BCCH carrier
Managed object Cell
l When Frequency Band is GSM900, its value range is 1~124;

l When Frequency Band is EXT900, its value range is 0~124, 975~1023;
l When Frequency Band is PCS1900, its value range is 512~810;
l When Frequency Band is DCS1800, its value range is 512~885;
Value range l When Frequency Band is GSM850, its value range is 128~251.
3-4

Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.7 LAC (LAC)

Full name LAC
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Each GSM PLMN is divided into many location areas (LAs) in order to deter-
mine the MS location. The location area code identifies the different location
areas. LAC comes under LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area
Description contains multiple cells.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.8 CI (CI)
Full name CI
Abbreviation CI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
3-5

In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network opera-
Description tors allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.9 NCC (NCC)

Full name NCC
Abbreviation NCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). which is used to enable the MS to distinguish adjacent and
different GSM PLMN cells. Normally, adjacent operators should have differ-
ent NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is NccPermitted of the cell. By
prohibiting MS to report related NCC in the cell, MS is prohibited to measure
the cell information of the related operators. Actually, NCC occupies three
Description bits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-6

3.1.10 BCC (BCC)

Full name BCC
Abbreviation BCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). Normally, BCC is used to enable MS to distinguish adja-
cent cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same
GSM PLMN. In addition, GSM specification stipulates that TSC (Training Se-
quence Code) of broadcast control channel of a cell should be equal to the
cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits. BCC is one of the network identification
Description parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.11 GPRS service supported (PsSupport)

Full name GPRS service supported
Abbreviation PsSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Determine if the cell supports GPRS.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
3-7

Related parameters TsChannelComb
If "GPRS Supported (PsSupport)" is No, that is, GPRS is not supported,

Relationship the system automatically change all timeslot channels whose type is PS in
the cell to TCH.
If GPRS service supported is YES, a sub-interface GPRS property will appear in the
main interface, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 GPRS Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell
3.1.12 Reselection offset (ReselOff_0)

Full name Reselection offset
Abbreviation ReselOff_0
3GPP name GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET
3-8

Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcasted to MS via system

message by BTS. In the GPRS system, C32 is used as the standard for
cell reselection. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM,
contains a cell reselection offset parameter. When the offset represented
by this parameter is 0dB, it need not be indicated in the packet system
message.
This parameter indicates the parameters used during reselection on idle
Description status, which only functions while configuring PBCCH.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Parameter used at the MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. In the GPRS

system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. C32 standard
calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset
parameter. When the offset represented by this parameter is 0dB, it need
not be indicated in the packet system message.
This parameter indicates the parameter used during reselection in
Description transmission state.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
3-9

Relationship None
3.1.14 Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset_0, dB)

Full name Reselection temporary offset
Abbreviation TempOffset_0
3GPP name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET

cell reselection. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative
offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty
Time of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinite
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3-10


system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. There is a
temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM
system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.16 Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime_0, 10s)

Full name Penalty time of cell reselection
Abbreviation PenalTime_0
3GPP name GPRS_PENALTY_TIME

cell reselection. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative
offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on Penalty
Time of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
3-11

Relationship None


temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in GSM
system. The effective time depends on Penalty Time of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.18 HSC exist (HCS_EXIST_0)

Full name HCS Exist
Abbreviation HCS_EXIST_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
3-12

Parameter used at the MS side. This parameter belongs to Hierarchical

Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcasted to MS via system message by
BTS. PSI message indicates if the HSC exist (HCS priority and Threshold
of HSC signal level) exist in the cell. If the local cell does not use HCS
parameters, the HCS parameters of other cells will also be ignored, that is,
all the cells use the HCS signal strength threshold of infinity.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.19 HSC Exist (HCS_EXIST_1)

Full name HCS Exist
Abbreviation HCS_EXIST_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH. PSI message
indicates if the HSC exist (HCS priority and Threshold of HSC signal level)
exist in the cell. If the local cell does not use HCS parameters, the HCS
parameters of other cells will also be ignored, that is, all the cells use the
HCS signal strength threshold of infinity.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
3-13

Relationship None
3.1.20 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR_0)

Full name Threshold of HSC signal level
Abbreviation HCS_THR_0
3GPP name HCS_THR
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter, which is

broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS. It indicates the HCS
signal strength threshold of the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.21 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR_1)

Abbreviation HCS_THR_1
3GPP name HCS_THR
3-14


informed to MS on PACCH. It indicates the HCS signal strength threshold
of the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.22 HCS priority (PrioClass_0)

Full name HCS Priority
Abbreviation PrioClass_0
3GPP name PRIORITY_CLASS

broadcasted to MS via system message by BTS, indicating cell HCS
priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3-15



informed to MS on PACCH, indicating cell HCS priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.24 Allow SOLSA MS to access (EXC_ACC)

Full name Allow SOLSA MS to access
Abbreviation EXC_ACC
3GPP name EXC_ACC
System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages.

In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis mes-
sages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to
Description access to prevent MS from residing in the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
3-16

Relationship None
3.1.25 Cell reselection status (CellBarAc2)

Full name Cell Reselection Status
Abbreviation CellBarAc2
3GPP name CELL_BAR ACCESS_2
Cell reselection status belongs to HCS, and the system broadcasts to MS in

Description PSI3 message. It indicates the cell reselection status.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.26 LSA ID (LSA_Id)

Full name LSA Mark
Abbreviation LSA_Id
3GPP name LSA ID
System broadcasts the parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 mes-
sages of serving cell. In addition, system broadcasts the parameter informa-
tion in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. LSA ID specifies
Description LSA identifier of the cell.
Managed object Cell
3-17

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.27 RAC
Full name RAC (RAC)
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
RAC is a composition part of Routing Area Identity (RAI). RAI defines the
GPRS serving cell identification. GPRS system divides the location area
(LAs) to several routing areas (RAs) using RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC).
In MS cell reselection in the attach status, if the RAIs of the old and new
cells change, the Routing Area Update process will be initiated.
SGSN knows the routing area information of the MS in the standby status.
Then, when the network has packet data or circuit data to transmit, it will
Description page the MS in that routing area. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.28 GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin_0)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level
3-18

Abbreviation RxLevAsMin_0
3GPP name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
MS uses GPRS access minimum signal level for GPRS system access in
weak signal conditions. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by
BTS. It indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the
GPRS system.
To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal
level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee normal
communication process after accessing) and from unreasonably wasting
the radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that
the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the
network, that is, MS Min RxLev to Access.
In addition, it is also one of the standards for MS to make the cell selection
and the cell reselection (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32).
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Value range l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 12 (-99 dBm ~ -98 dBm)
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.29 GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin_1)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level
3-19

weak signal conditions. This parameter is informed to MS on PACCH. It
indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS
system.
To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal
communication process after accessing) and from unreasonably wasting
the radio resources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that
the receiving level be greater than a threshold level for MS to access the
network, that is, MS Min RxLev to Access.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 12 (-99 dBm ~ -98 dBm)
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.30 GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_0)

Full name GPRS MAX initial access signal level
Abbreviation MsTxMaxCCH_0
3GPP name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
3-20

weak signal conditions. It is broadcasted to MS via system message by
BTS. The transmission power of MS is controlled by the network during its
communications with BTS. The network controls the MS power by the
power command and the MS must use the transmission power specified
by the network as its output power. If the MS cannot output that power
value, it will use the power that is closest to the specified value as its
transmission power.
This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values.
Refer to appendix C, for the maximum power before MS receives the
power control information.
The principle of setting this parameter is as follows: Under the precondition
that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with a certain access
success rate, the MS access level should be reduced as much as
possible. The value of this parameter is usually set as 5 (corresponding to
GSM900MS) and 2 (corresponding to GSM1800MS).
In actual application, after the parameter is set, make a dial test at the cell
boundary, and test MS access success rate and access time with different
parameter settings to determine if to increase or decrease the value of the
parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.1.31 GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCCH_1)

Abbreviation MsTxMaxCCH_1
3-21

weak signal conditions. This parameter is informed to MS on PACCH.
The transmission power of MS is controlled by the network during its
transmission power.
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values.
success rate, the MS access level should be reduced as much as
possible. The value of this parameter is usually set as 5 (corresponding to
GSM900MS) and 2 (corresponding to GSM1800MS).
parameter settings to determine if to increase or decrease the value of the
parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2 UTRAN External Cell Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > External Cell Config and choose Create
> UTRAN External Cell from the shortcut menu. The Create UTRAN External Cell
The interface of UTRAN external cell parameters is shown in Figure 3-3.
3-22

Figure 3-3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters
3.2.1 External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID)

Full name External UTRAN ID (Ec3GID)
Abbreviation Ec3GID
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Serial number of UTRAN external cell
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
3-23

Relationship None
3.2.2 UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)

Full name UTRAN cell type
Abbreviation CellType3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description The type of this UTRAN cell
Managed object Cell
Value range FDD, TDD
Unit None
Default value FDD
Change mode Offline
UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)

Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)
UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
Related parameters Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)
This parameter value has influence on the value range of ScCodeCellPara,

and the value range and default value of Arfcn3G.
Relationship
When selecting TDD, two configurable parameters may occur in the
interface, such as BandWidth3G and SyncCaseTSTD.
3.2.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC (MCC)
Abbreviation MCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MCC consists of three digits of decimal number. It is used to uniquely identify

Description the home country of the mobile user (or system).
Managed object Cell
3-24

Value range 0 ~ 999
Unit None
Default value 460
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC (MNC)
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MNC consists of three digits of decimal number. It uniquely identifies a spe-

Description cific PLMN network in a country (determined by MCC).
Managed object Cell
l When MNC3Digits is selected as 2 digits, MNC value will be 0~99;

Value range l When MNC3Digits is selected as 3 digits, MNC value will be 0~999;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.5 UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)

Full name UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)
Abbreviation ArfcnUT3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
3-25

Description UTRAN cell Frequency
Managed object Cell
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is FDD, value range is 412 ~

10838;
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is TDD and "UTRAN adjacent
cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), value range is 2112 ~
13088;
cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), value range is 9254 ~
Value range 13096.
Unit None
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellType3G)" is FDD, default value is 412;

cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 0 (3.84 Mcps), default value is 2112;
Default value cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)" is 1 (1.28 Mcps), default value is 9254;
Change mode Offline
UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)

Related parameters UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
The value of CellType3G and BandWidth3G has influence on the value

Relationship
range and default value of this parameter.
3.2.6 LAC (LAC)

Full name LAC
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 1
3-26

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.7 RNC ID (RNC_ID)

Full name RNC ID (RNC_ID)
Abbreviation RNC_ID
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Each RNC has a unique number in the UTRAN network of PLMN to route
Description corresponding UTRAN interface message correctly.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.8 C ID (C_ID)
Full name C ID (C_ID)
Abbreviation C_ID
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It identifies the UTRAN adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
3-27

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.9 Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)

Full name Scrambling code or Cell Parameter (ScCodeCellPara)
Abbreviation ScCodeCellPara
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
l FDD: It is described in detail in protocol 3GPP TS25.213. The scram-

bling code is used to distinguish the carriers in UTRAN/FDD network.
MS measure the main scrambling code of the downlink CPICH channel
in cell for handover or cell reselection. The scrambling codes are di-
vided into 0~511. There are one main scrambling code and 15 auxiliary
scrambling codes in each group. 511 main scrambling codes could be
divided into 64 scrambling code sets, and there are 8 scrabbling codes
in each set.
Description l TDD: The parameters describing adjacent cell
Managed object Cell
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is FDD, this parameter

represents FDD interference code, value range is 0 ~ 511, 65535;
l When "UTRAN Cell Type (CellTypeUTRAN)" is TDD, this parameter
Value range represents TDD cell parameter, value range is 0 ~ 127, 65535;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related parameters UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)
The value of UTRAN Cell Type has influence on the value range of this
Relationship
parameter.
3-28

3.2.10 TX diversity indication (DiverSity)

Full name TX diversity indication
Abbreviation DiverSity
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if UTRAN adjacent cell uses diversity transmission.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
3.2.11 RAC
Full name RAC (RAC)
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
3-29

Relationship None
3.2.12 UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)

Full name UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth
Abbreviation BandWidth3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When "UTRAN cell type" is TDD, this parameter occurs and can be config-
Description ured, indicating the bandwidth of UTRAN adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 (1.28Mcps), 0 (3.84Mcps)
Unit None
Default value 1 (1.28Mcps)
Change mode Offline

UTRAN cell Frequency (Arfcn3G)
Related parameters Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)
When CellType3G is TDD, this parameter occurs and can be configured.

Relationship Base on this different parameter values, the value range and default value
of Arfcn3G varies and names of SyncCaseTSTD are different.
3.2.13 Apply Sync Case (SyncCaseTSTD)

Full name Apply Sync Case / Apply TSTD
Abbreviation SyncCaseTSTD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if to apply SyncCase or TSTD
Managed object Cell
3-30

l When CellType3G is TDD and BandWidth3G is 1 (1.28 Mcps), the pa-

rameter indicates if to apply TSTD, parameter value is "apply TSTD",
value range is Yes, No;
l When CellType3G is TDD and BandWidth3G is 0 (3.84 Mcps), the pa-
rameter indicates if to apply SyncCase, parameter value is "apply Sync
Value range Case", value range is Yes, No;
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline

Related parameters UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
When CellType3G is TDD, this parameter occurs and can be configured.

Relationship Based on different parameter value of BandWidth3G, this parameter name
may vary.
3-31

3-32

Chapter 4
Cell Parameters
Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site and choose Create > Cell
from the shortcut menu. The Create Cell interface is displayed.
The following describes the cell parameters, including basic parameters, optional
parameters, and GPRS/EDGE parameters.
Table of Contents
Basic Parameters 1 ....................................................................................................4-1
Basic Parameters 2 ..................................................................................................4-14
Basic Parameters 3 ..................................................................................................4-30
Optional Parameters ................................................................................................4-45
Cell Selection Parameters ........................................................................................4-56
Service Process Additional Parameters....................................................................4-71
System Parameters..................................................................................................4-82
Other Parameters.....................................................................................................4-89
GPRS Basic Parameters ..........................................................................................4-95
GPRS Other Parameters 1 .......................................................................................4-99
GPRS Other Parameters 2 .....................................................................................4-108
GPRS Other Parameters 3 .....................................................................................4-123
GPRS Cell Options Parameters .............................................................................4-134
GPRS NC Survey Parameters................................................................................4-144
GPRS Power Control Parameters ..........................................................................4-152
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters .......................................................................4-156
GPRS Channel Parameters....................................................................................4-180
EDGE Property Parameters ...................................................................................4-189
4.1 Basic Parameters 1

The interface of cell basic parameters 1 is shown in Figure 4-1.
4-1

Figure 4-1 Basic Parameters 1
4.1.1 BTS ID (BtsId)

Full name BTS ID
Abbreviation BtsId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Serial number of this cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~6
Unit None
Default value Sorted by practice
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-2

Chapter 4 Cell Parameters
4.1.2 Cell type (CellType)

Full name Cell Type
Abbreviation CellType
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The type of this cell.

If you need set S8001 cell, micro-micro cell should be selected for cell
Description type.
Managed object Cell
Value range Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micro-micro Cell, Extended Cell
Unit None
Default value Macro Cell
Change mode Offline
TA MAX (TaMax)
TA allowed (TaAllowed)
Related parameters TA MIN (TaMin)
This parameter value has influence on the Value range and default value
Relationship of TA MAX (TaMax) and TA allowed (TaAllowed), and the value of TA MIN
(TaMin).
4.1.3 MCC (MCC)

Full name MCC
Abbreviation MCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Mobile Country Code (MCC) is used to uniquely identify the home country
Description of mobile users (or system), assigned internationally, It is 460 in China.
Managed object Cell
Value range Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC function parameters.
Unit None
Default value Based on "Mobile country code" in BSC function parameters.
Change mode Offline
4-3

Relationship None
4.1.4 MNC (MNC)

Full name MNC
Abbreviation MNC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Mobile Network Code (MNC) uniquely identifies a specific PLMN network in

a country (decided by MCC). For instance, 07 is PLMN network of China
Description Mobile.
Managed object Cell
Value range Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC function parameters.
Unit None
Default value Based on "Mobile network code (MNC)" in BSC function parameters.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.5 LAC (LAC)

Full name LAC
Abbreviation LAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
4-4

Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.6 CI (CI)
Full name CI
Abbreviation CI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In order to distinguish each cell in GSM PLMN uniquely, the network opera-
Description tors allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.7 NCC (NCC)

Full name NCC
Abbreviation NCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-5

NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). which is used to enable the MS to distinguish adjacent and
different GSM PLMN cells. Normally, adjacent operators should have differ-
ent NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is NccPermitted of the cell. By
prohibiting MS to report related NCC in the cell, MS is prohibited to measure
the cell information of the related operators. Actually, NCC occupies three
Description bits. NCC is one of the network identification parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.8 BCC (BCC)

Full name BCC
Abbreviation BCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID Code (BSIC) (BSIC
= NCC + BCC). Normally, BCC is used to enable MS to distinguish adja-
cent cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same
GSM PLMN. In addition, GSM specification stipulates that TSC (Training Se-
quence Code) of broadcast control channel of a cell should be equal to the
cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits. BCC is one of the network identification
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
4-6

Relationship None
4.1.9 Frequency band (FreqBand)

Full name Frequency band
Abbreviation FreqBand
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description The frequency band types for GSM operation.
Managed object Cell

DCS1800, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, GSM850,
RGSM;
PCS1900, it value range is GSM900, EXT900, PCS1900, GSM850,
Value range RGSM.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-05-02-002 EGSM Frequency Band Support
DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)

Related parameters Frequency
The value of DCS1800/PCS1900 supported (FuncExt) has influence on

Relationship value range of this parameter.
This parameter value has influence on value range of CaArfcnList.
4.1.10 ARFCN list (CaArfcnList)

Full name ARFCN list
Abbreviation CaArfcnList
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description The radio frequency set.
Managed object Cell
4-7

ARFCN set, Value range of each ARFCN is the same as BCCH. Based on
frequency setting at subsequent BTS, the system automatically fills it in this
Value range box.
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Relationship None
4.1.11 Support GPRS (PsSupport)

Full name Support GPRS
Abbreviation PsSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if this cell supports GPRS (EDGE) service. If selecting "Yes",

Description "No" or "Support EDGE", relevant sub-page may occur in the interface.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No, Support EDGE
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.12 Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)

Full name Dynamic HR Enable
Abbreviation DynaHREnable
3GPP name None
4-8

3GPP reference None
Description Determine if this cell supports dynamic HR.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)
Relationship If this parameter is set to Yes, 'Use cell dynamic HR parameter' is configurable.
4.1.13 Use cell dynamic HR parameter (UseCellDynHRPara)

Full name Use cell dynamic HR parameter
Abbreviation UseCellDynHRPara
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if cell dynamic HR parameter is used.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Dynamic HR enable (DynaHREnable)
Relationship If Dynamic HR support indication is Yes, this parameter is configurable.
4.1.14 CBC support (SmsCbUsed)

Full name CBC support
4-9

Abbreviation SmsCbUsed
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
CBC service is an important service provided by mobile communication

system, mainly used to distribute information to the mobile subscribers
within certain geographical location area. The difference from P2P sms
service contains: receiver for P2P sms is specific mobile subscriber, but
receiver for CBC is all mobile subscribers within certain area, including
external subscribers roaming in this area.
This parameter identifies if this cell supports the function of cell
Description broadcasting short message.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-03-004 Cell Broadcast SMS
l If "CBC support (SmsCbUsed)" is No, that is, CBC is not supported,

the system automatically finds all timeslot channel combinations in the
cell. If CBC channel exists, it is changed to SDCCH.
Relationship l If "CBC support (SmsCbUsed)" is Yes, that is, CBC is supported, the
system automatically finds all timeslot channel combinations in the
cell. If a non-BCCH channel is found for a carrier, it is changed to
SDCCH+CBCH.
4.1.15 Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR (HRThs, %)

Full name Threshold for a single trx switched from FR to HR
Abbreviation HRThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-10

When BSC and cell enable dynamic HR functions, and percentage of TCH/F
channel used in the cell (TCH/F channels occupied in the cell / all available
TCH channels in the cell (including IDLE and BUSY)) exceeds this threshold,
Description convert TCH/F -> TCH/H.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.16 PS busy threshold (Info_1_16)

Full name PS busy threshold
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Do the half-rate expansion if cell busy degree reaches or exceeds this threshold,
Description
to restrict the PS expansion.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
4-11

4.1.17 Use cell dynamic AMR parameter (UseCellAMRParam)

Full name Use cell dynamic AMR parameter
Abbreviation UseCellAMRParam
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if AMR parameter in the cell is enabled.

l If the cell doesn't enable its own AMR parameters, AMR parameter
value configured by BSC is set as the predominant;
l If the cell is enabled, AMR parameter value configured by the cell is set
Description as the predominant;
Managed object Cell
Value range Use, not use
Unit None
Default value Not use
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.1.18 Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)

Full name Common control channel configuration
Abbreviation CcchConf
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Common control channel configuration is one of the system control

parameters. In GSM system, CCCH includes Access Grant Channel
(AGCH) and Paging Channel (PCH). It is used to send access granting
(that is instant assignment) message and paging message.
In each cell, all service channels share CCCH. According to the
configuration of the service channel in the cell and the traffic mode of the
cell, CCCH could be one or more than one physical channel, and CCCH
could share the same physical channel with SDCCH
The combination mode of the common control channel in cell depends
on CCCH configuration parameter and it should be consistent with the
Description actual configuration of cell CCH. It could be observed from this parameter:
4-12

BS_CC_CHANS (Number of CCCH); BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB (If

combined with SDCCH).
This parameter is broadcasted to all MSs in the cell by message RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3.
Managed object Cell
CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH;

CCCH uses one physical channel, combined with SDCCH;
CCCH uses two physical channels, not combined with SDCCH;
CCCH uses three physical channels, not combined with SDCCH;
Value range CCCH uses four physical channels, not combined with SDCCH.
Unit None
Default value CCCH uses one physical channel, not combined with SDCCH
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-02-001 Support of SDCCH/4 and SDCCH/8
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is set to "CCCH uses one physical

channel, combined with SDCCH". In channel information parameters,
timeslot 0 channel combination should be one of these two combined
channels: BCCH+SDCCH/4 and BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is set to "CCCH uses one physical
channel, not combined with SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination should be one of these two
combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is set to "CCCH uses two physical
channels, not combined with SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 and 2 channel combination should be these two
Relationship
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is set to "CCCH uses three physical
parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination should be
these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and
BCCH+CCCH.
l When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is set to "CCCH uses four physical
parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination should be
these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and
BCCH+CCCH.
4-13

4.1.19 Template file

Full name Template file
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Click Select button, a window pops up, select the template file in local path;
Description click Clear button to clear selected template files.
Managed object Cell
Value range Local file
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

The interface of cell basic parameters 2 is shown in Figure 4-2.
4-14

4.2.1 TA MAX (TaMax)

Full name TA Max
Abbreviation TaMax
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It represents the maximum TA supported by extended cell.
Managed object Cell
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, Value range is 0 ~

63;
Value range l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, Value range is 0 ~ 219;
Unit None
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, default value is 63;

Default value l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 219;
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Cell type (CellType)
4-15

The value of Cell Type has influence on Value range and default value of
Relationship
this parameter.
4.2.2 TA MIN (TaMin)

Full name TA MIN
Abbreviation TaMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the minimum TA granted to be accessed into the cell.
Managed object Cell
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 63;

Value range l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, value range is 0 ~ 219;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-01-001 Extended Cell Coverage
Relationship The value of Cell Type has influence on the value range of this parameter.
4.2.3 TA allowed (TaAllowed)

Full name TA Allowed
Abbreviation TaAllowed
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It represents the maximum TA granted to be accessed into the cell.
Managed object Cell
l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, Value range is 0 ~

63;
Value range l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, Value range is 0 ~ 219;
Unit None
4-16

l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is non-extended cell, default value is 63;

Default value l When "Cell Type (CellType)" is extended cell, default value is 219;
Change mode Offline
The value of Cell Type has influence on value range and default value of
Relationship
this parameter.
4.2.4 PCH load indication period (CcchLoadIndPrd)

Full name PCH load indication period
Abbreviation CcchLoadIndPrd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, during the period of PCH overload

measurement, when the load of PCH channel at BTS exceeds the PCH
overload threshold set by O&M, BTS sends the CCCH LOAD INDICATION
message periodically to BSC until the load of PCH channel does not
exceed this threshold value.
Description This parameter is modified in version 8.00.200a.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.5 Periodical location updating timer (T3212, 360s)

Full name Periodical location updating timer
Abbreviation T3212
4-17

3GPP name T3212
Location update results from two major causes in GSM system. One is
when MS changes from old LAC to new LAC and the second is when the
network notifies MS for periodic location update.
Network controls the location time interval and depends upon T3212
timer. Network broadcasts to all MSs in the cell by RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 message. T3212 timer is one of the system control
parameters.
The setting of this parameter will affect the overall service performance and
utilization rate of radio resources of the network. For the area with higher
traffic, the period could be longer (for example 16 or 20 hours, even 25
hours); for the area with ordinary traffic, the value of T3212 could be shorter
(for example 3 or 6 hours); for the area with extreme overload traffic, it is
Description recommended to set T3212 as 0.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 255
l 0: positive infinite, location update is not required;
l 1: 6 minutes;
l 2: 12 minutes;
...
Value range l 255: 1530 minutes;
Unit 360 s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.6 Protection period for access attempt (T3122, s)

Full name Protection period for access attempt
Abbreviation T3122
3GPP name T3122
4-18

The network sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message to MS

when it receives a channel request message from MS and will not allocate
a suitable channel to MS. IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message
contains T3122 timer parameter to prevent possible wireless channel
blocking caused by repeated channel requests sent by the MS, which is
waiting for indication information unit.
MS cannot restart a new call until the time indicated by T3122 is elapsed
if it receives the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message. This
parameter is also one of the system control parameters and is sent to MS
in the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message.
The following are the suggested values: 10 ~ 15 s for normal traffic area;
Description 15 ~ 25 s for dense traffic area
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.7 Multiband report indication (MulbandReport)

Full name Multiband report indication
Abbreviation MulbandReport
3GPP name MULTIBAND_REPORTING
MS in single-frequency GSM system only need report contents of six

adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band while the
survey result of adjacent cells is reported to the network.
In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific
frequency band during handover. MS reports the survey result according
to the signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals, according to
the actual situation.
Multiband report indication is used to notify MS of reporting contents of
adjacent cells in multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control
4-19

The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band.

General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of
each frequency band is almost equivalent and the operator has no choice
over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite
different and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band
with priority.
l 0: MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells
with the strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of
which frequency band adjacent cells are in.
l 1: MS reports the measurement result of 1 adjacent cells with strongest
signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding frequency
band of serving cell). In the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell
in local cell frequency band. If more space is still available, MS reports
the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of which frequency bands they
are in.
are in.
are in.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~3
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-20

4.2.8 Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access

(RachAccessMin, -db)
Full name Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access
Abbreviation RachAccessMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Minimal level threshold of MS uplink RACH access
Managed object
BSC
Unit -dB
Default value 125
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.9 CCCH load indication threshold (RACH) (CcchLoadINDThs_0)

Full name CCCH load indication threshold (RACH)
Abbreviation CcchLoadINDThs_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When load degree in RACH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS
sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load
degree in RACH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value. RACH
overload is mainly caused by too many CS service applications in the cell.
BSC can prohibit some users through adjusting the ACCN parameter in the
system message, thus reducing the times of service requests.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
4-21

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.10 CCCH load indication threshold (PCH) (CcchLoadINDThs_1)

Full name CCCH load indication threshold (PCH)
Abbreviation CcchLoadINDThs_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When load degree in PCH channel for BTS exceeds this threshold, BTS
sends CCCH LOAD INDICATION message periodically to iBSC until load
degree in PCH channel doesn't exceed this threshold value.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 80
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.11 8PSK modulating power attenuation level (Tn7Lowerlevel,

0.2db)
Full name 8PSK modulating power attenuation level.
Abbreviation Tn7Lowerlevel
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates 8PSK modulating power attenuation level.
4-22

Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 50
Unit 0.2 dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.12 Support Repeated ACCH (RepeatACCH)

Full name Support Repeated ACCH
Abbreviation RepeatACCH
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if FACCH/SACCH retransmission function is

Description used.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.13 Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR

(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR)
Full name Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR FR
Abbreviation BsRadioLkTmOutAMRFR
3GPP name None
4-23

3GPP reference None
Fault detection period in AMR-FR channel. Within this period, pick average
value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to dert-
Description ermine if the channel is failed.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.14 Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR

(BsRadioLkTmOutAMRHR)
Full name Bss Radio Link Timer's Max Value for AMR HR
Abbreviation BsRadioLkTmOutForAMRHR
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Fault detection period in AMR-HR channel. Within this period, pick average
value through s times of measurement, and judge link fault threshold, to de-
Description termine if the channel is failed.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-24

4.2.15 AMR Codec Adjust Mode (AmrAdjMode)

Full name AMR Codec Adjust Mode
Abbreviation AmrAdjMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Setting of AMR rate adjustment mode:

l AMR quick rate adjustment mode: master adjustment time by BTS itself;
l Interval to adjust configuration: adjustment time should be defined at
Description background
Managed object Cell
Value range AMR quick rate adjustment mode, interval to adjust configuration
Unit None
Default value AMR quick rate adjustment mode
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.16 AMR Codec adjust interval (AmrAdjInterval, 480ms)

Full name AMR Codec adjust interval
Abbreviation AmrAdjInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates AMR adjustment interval. This parameter is only meaningful

Description when AmrAdjMode is "interval to adjust configuration".
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 50
Unit 480 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
4-25

Relationship None
4.2.17 Support HR channel frag collected (HRDfragSupport)

Full name Support HR channel frag collected
Abbreviation HRDfragSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a switch of frag collection in HR channel, which can be set

on BSC and BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS are enabled, and finished
HR frags / idle HR channel in the cell is no more than HRDefragThs, HR
Description channel defragmentation function is enabled, otherwise it is disabled.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.18 Threshold of HR Defrag (HRDefragThs)

Full name Threshold of HR Defrag
Abbreviation HRDefragThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the proportion threshold of HRDefragNum / idle HR channel in

the cell. This parameter can be set on BTS. Only when both BSC and BTS
can enable HRDfragSupport, and finished HR frags / idle HR channel in the
cell is no more than HRDefragThs, HR channel defragmentation function is
Description enabled, otherwise it is disabled.
Managed object Cell
4-26

Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 70
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.19 Percentage of HR Ts (HRTsPercentage)

Full name Percentage of HR Ts
Abbreviation HRTsPercentage
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When HR timeslot in the cell / general timeslot in the cell <

HRTsPercentage/100, the cell can generate new HR channel.
This parameter can be set on BSC and BTS. If the proportion of HR
timeslot in the cell is lower than HRTsPercentage/100 of BSC and BTS, the
Description cell can generate new HR channel.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.20 AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold (AmrHRThs)

Full name AMR Dynamic HR Conversion Threshold
Abbreviation AmrHRThs
3GPP name None
4-27

3GPP reference None
When busy timeslot/general timeslot >= AmrHRThs/100, and carrier and cell
support AMR, subsequent service prefers AMR voice rate.
Description This threshold value can be set on BSC and BTS, when "User cell dynamic
HR parameter" (UseCellDynHRPara) is yes, AmrHRThs value configured by
cell will be used, otherwise AmrHRThs configured by BSC is used.
Managed object BSC
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.21 FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load (FRThrHoSupport)

Full name FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load
Abbreviation FRThrHoSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description FR-HR HandOver Based On Cell Load
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-28

4.2.22 Start PA Output Voltage Tuning (Info_0_0)

Full name Start PA Output Voltage Tuning
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if TRX starts the function of adjusting PA voltage based on BTS

Description
output power.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.2.23 NCC permitted (NccPermitted)

Full name NCC permitted
Abbreviation NccPermitted
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Add or Delete NCC within value range
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-29


The interface of basic parameters 3 is shown in Figure 4-3.
4.3.1 Average bursts count surveyed by RACH (AvgSlots)

Full name Average bursts count surveyed by RACH
Abbreviation AvgSlots
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Average bursts count surveyed by RACH specifies the number of bursts

measured on RACH. RACH channel overloads if receiving signal levels of
this parameter BP are less than RACH Receiving signal level threshold for
Description busy burst. BTS uses this parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 60
Change mode Offline
4-30

Relationship None
4.3.2 Threshold of RACH receiving signal level (RachBuysThs)

Full name Threshold of RACH receiving signal level
Abbreviation RachBuysThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the threshold for receiving signal level in RACH
bursts. If the value is exceeded (that is less than RACH receiving signal
Description level threshold for busy burst dBm), system considers that as a busy RACH.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.3 RACH load indication period (OverloadPrd, s)

Full name RACH load indication period
Abbreviation OverloadPrd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-31

According to GSM specification, TRX sends periodic OVERLOAD message

to notify BSC until overload disappears. Overload sending period specifies
period for TRX to send OVERLOAD message. It is one of the configuration
Description parameters of BTS (all TRXs under BTS use the same period).
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.4 BA Show (BcchBaInd)

Full name BA Show
Abbreviation BcchBaInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BA indication of BCCH. Adjacent cell list can be broadcast on BCCH and

transferred on SACCH. The adjacent cell list transferred on BCCH can be
different from that on SACCH. When MS reports the measurement data
of adjacent cell, either BCCH adjacent cell list or SACCH adjacent cell
list will be referred. Therefore, to know which adjacent cell list is referred
by MS, a BA indication is added when transferring adjacent cell list on
BCCH and SACCH. When reporting the measurement result, MS notifies
the network side about the corresponding BA indication of the referred
adjacent cell list. As a result, the network side recognizes which adjacent
cell list this MS uses.
This parameter describes the BS indication value when the adjacent cell
list being transferred on BCCH. In the case of transferring adjacent cell list
on SACCH, the BA indication value used is the reverse of the parameter.
l 0: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis,
2ter) is 0; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5,
5bis, 5ter) is 1.
l 1: BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on BCCH (System message 2, 2bis,
2ter) is 1; BA Show (BcchBaInd) value on SACCH (System message 5,
Description 5bis, 5ter) is 0.
4-32

Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.5 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin)

Full name MIN received signal level to access
Abbreviation RxLevAccessMin
3GPP name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
To prevent MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal

communications after access), and from unreasonably wasting the radio
sources of network, it is prescribed in GSM system that the receiving
level be greater than a threshold for MS to access the network, that is,
MS Min RxLev to Access (the minimum receiving level for MS to access
the network).
In addition, it is one of the criteria for MS to select and reselect the cell.
The parameter will be broadcast to all MSs in a cell through the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. MIN received
signal level to access is one of the cell selection parameters.
Recommended value is usually approximated according to MS receiving
sensitivity. When network observes uneven traffic distribution in certain
cells, MIN received signal level to access increases the resulting C1 and C2
to decrease the cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this
parameter cannot be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring
void area across cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem.
With this measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value
should not exceed -90 dBm. Define the parameter value to 10 (that is,
from -101 ~ -100 dBm) at initial network rollout stage or lower, which is
higher than the receiving sensitivity of MS (that is, -102 dBm). However, 2
dB increase in parameter value is allowable in situations where network
Description coverage is not a problem.
4-33

Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 10 (-101 ~ -100 dBm)
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-02-02-007 Support of C1 Criteria
Relationship None
4.3.6 MAX number of re-transmitting events times (MRetrans)

Full name MAX number of re-transmitting events times
Abbreviation MRetrans
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
MS sends the channel request message on RACH channel to the network

to start immediate assignment process.
RACH is an ALOHA channel, the network enables MS to send multiple
channel request messages before MS receives the IMMEDIATE
ASSIGNMENT message to increase the access success rate of MS.
Maximum number of allowable resend time depends on MAX number of
re-transmitting events times.
Network broadcasts this parameter information to MS in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages.
MAX number of re-transmitting events times is one of the control
parameters of GSM system.
l For the cell radius over 3 km and the area with small traffic, it can be set
as 3 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 7) to improve
the access success rate of MS.
l For the cell radius less than 3 km and the area with common traffic, it
Description can be set as 2 (that is, the maximum number of resending times is 4);
4-34

l Define value as 1 (maximum number of resending times is 2) for the

micro cell.
l Define value as 0 (maximum number of resending times is 1) for the
micro cell with heavy traffic and the cell with congestion.
Managed object Cell
0~3
l 0: 1 times;
l 1: 2 times;
l 2: 4 times;
Value range l 3: 7 times;
Unit None
Default value 2 (4 times)
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.7 Number of slots to spread transmission (TxInteger)

Full name Number of slots to spread transmission
Abbreviation TxInteger
3GPP name Tx_integer
The parameter is used at MS side. It belongs to the PRACH control

parameters and it is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. In establishment
of a connection, MS usually will send the channel request message in
the PRACH channel to the network.
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve MS access success rate, the
network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages before
packet assignment message is received. If MS does not receive any
response for the previous channel request message, MS resends channel
request message after waiting for a random period. Network uses S
Description parameter to determine random waiting time.
Managed object Cell
4-35

0 ~ 15
Assume timeslot number is S, so
l 0: S=12;
l 1: S=15;
l 2: S=20;
l 3: S=30;
l 4: S=41;
l 5: S=55;
l 6: S=76;
l 7: S=109;
l 8: S=163;
l 9: S=217;
Value range l 10 ~ 15: reserved
Unit None
Default value 14
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.8 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)

Full name Control channel MAX power level
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMaxCch
3GPP name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
During the communication between MS and BTS, the transmission power

is controlled by the network. The network sets the power for MS through
the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (SACCH
has 2 header bytes. One is the power control byte and the other is the
timing advance byte).
MS must extract the power control header from downward SACCH and
takes the specified transmission power as output power. If the power level
of MS cannot output the power value, it will output the closest transmission
power that can be output.
For SACCH is Channel Associated Signaling and it has to be used together
with SCCCH and TCH, so the power control of MS starts after MS receives
Description
SACCH.
4-36

The power of MS before receiving SACCH (that is the power when sending
channel request on RACH) is determined by Control channel MAX power
level.
Control channel MAX power level is one of the cell selection and reselection
parameters of MS, involving calculation of C1 and C2 values.
This parameter is broadcast to all MS in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4.
If this parameter is set too large, the MS near BTS will interfere the adjacent
channels. If it is too small, the MS at the cell boundaries will have low
access success rate.
success rate, the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible.
Generally, it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS)
and 0 (for GSM1800MS).
In practice, after setting this parameter, perform dialing test at the cell edge,
increase or decrease the value of this parameter according to the MS
access success rate and access time tested with different parameter setup.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.9 Number of multiframes of the PCH (BsPaMframe)

Full name Number of PCH multiframes
Abbreviation BsPaMframs
3GPP name BS-PA-MFRMS
4-37

Number of multiframes of the PCH specifies the repeat cycle of PCH group
subchannel using multiple 51-MultiFrame structures. It is one of the system
control parameters.
According to GSM Specifications, a unique IMSI identifies MS and paging
group. IMSI determines the PCH sub-channel for MS in a paging group.
In the actual network, MS only tunes in the paging sub-channel to which it
belongs and ignores the contents of other paging sub-channels, and shuts
off the power supply of some hardware equipment in the MS to save the
power overhead of MS. In other IDLE time, MS shuts off the hardware
equipment power supply to save power. Number of PCH multiframes
determines the number of paging sub-channels of the paging channel in a
cell.
MS uses this parameter to find out its home paging group, so as to
monitor corresponding paging sub-channel. Network broadcasts the
parameter information to all MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 message. Number of multiframes of the PCH is
Description one of the system control parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 2~9
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-02-01-001 paging
Relationship None
4.3.10 Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message (T3105d,

10ms)
Full name Interval of SDCCH re-sending phy info message
Abbreviation T3105d
3GPP name T3105
4-38

It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION

message during an asynchronous handover of SDCCH channel. This timer
is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
l Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL IN-
FORMATION message.
l Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can
be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message
from the former channel.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOR-
Description MATION message will be redelivered.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 67
Unit 10 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.11 Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message (T3105f,

10ms)
Full name Interval of TCH re-sending PHY INFO message
Abbreviation T3105f
3GPP name T3105
It is the interval for resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION

message during an asynchronous handover of TCH channel. This timer is
one of configuration parameters of BTS.
l Timer Start: It starts when network sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL IN-
FORMATION message.
l Timer Stop: It stops when the network receives a layer-2 frame that can
be correctly decoded or receives the HANDOVER FAILURE message
from the former channel.
l Overtime Action: If the timer is overtime, RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOR-
Description MATION message will be redelivered.
Managed object Cell
4-39

Value range 1 ~ 32
Unit 10 ms
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.12 MAX resending times for physical information (NY1)

Full name MAX resending times for physical information
Abbreviation NY1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BTS sends RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message to notify MS the

advanced time value that is used during asynchronous handover process
to be in accordance with GSM specifications. BTS starts the T3105 timer
after the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message is sent once. BTS
resends message RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION and restart the
T3105 timer if the timer stops and fails to decode the frames in second
layer correctly (format A or B) or TCH frames.
MAX resending times for physical information decides maximum number of
resending times for RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message. This
Description parameter is one of the BTS configuration parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 5 ~ 35
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-40

4.3.13 Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes)

Full name Number of blocks reserved for AGCH
Abbreviation BsAgBlkRes
3GPP name BS_AG_BLKS_RES
This parameter means the number of blocks used for AGCH in

51-MultiFrame. It is recommended that this value of the cells in the same
local area is identical.
Description When the GroupCallControl field is set to 1, BsAgBlkRes cannot be set to 0.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.14 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel (T200_0, 5ms)

Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch channel
Abbreviation T200_0
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None
T200 is the timer used on various control channels in LAPDm protocol of

Description BTS. There are 7 kinds of T200.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
4-41

Relationship None
4.3.15 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel (T200_1,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/full rate channel
Abbreviation T200_1
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None

Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.16 Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel (T200_2,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling facch/half rate channel
Abbreviation T200_2
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None

Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
4-42

Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.17 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel
(T200_3, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi0 channel
Abbreviation T200_3
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None

Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.18 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel

(T200_4, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with sdcch channel
Abbreviation T200_4
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None
4-43


Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.3.19 Lapdm Timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel (T200_5,

5ms)
Full name Lapdm timer for controlling sdcch sapi3 channel
Abbreviation T200_5
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None

Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 5 ms
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-44

4.3.20 Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel
(T200_6, 10ms)
Full name Lapdm Timer for controlling sacch with tch sapi3 channel
Abbreviation T200_6
3GPP name T200
3GPP reference None

Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit 10 ms
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4 Optional Parameters

The interface of optional parameters is shown in Figure 4-4.
4-45

Figure 4-4 Optional Parameters
4.4.1 Early category classmark sending control (ECSC)

Full name Early category classmark sending control
Abbreviation ECSC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specification, MS transmits appended class mark

information (Classmark 3) to the network through the CLASSMARK
CHANGE message as soon as possible.
Early category classmark sending control determines if the network
supports ECSC function. Network broadcasts the parameter information
to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3
message.
If there is a cell in another frequency band in adjacent cell for handover
or the current cell itself is extended GSM cell and the function of early
category classmark sending control is enabled, set ECSC as Yes,
Description otherwise set as No.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
4-46

Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.2 IMSI attach/detach allowed (ImsIadAllowed)

Full name IMSI attach/detach allowed
Abbreviation ImsIadAllowed
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
IMSI attach/detach allowed determines if cell allows IMSI Attach/Detach

procedure. IMSI detach occurs when MS reports switch-off or when the
SIM card is taken out from the MS.
The network (normally VLR) marks Detach flag in subscriber information
table. Such procedure assists the network to prevent unnecessary paging
broadcast message to MS. Accordingly, the IMSI Attach process means
that the MS reports entering the working status to the network or the MS
checks after the SIM card is re-inserted into the MS if the LAI where the
MS is located is consistent with the original one saved. If yes, the IMSI
Attach process will be started; otherwise, the location updating process
will be started instead.
The network (normally VLR) marks Attach flag in subscriber information
table.
This parameter is included in Control channel information and is used for
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.
Description This parameter of each cell in the same location area should be identical.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-47

4.4.3 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess)

Full name Cell bar access
Abbreviation CellBarAccess
3GPP name CELL_BAR_ACCESS
PLMN carriers can determine if MS is allowed to access a specific cell (for

example the cell in test or the cell for absorbing traffic only).
Network broadcasts cell bar access information to MS in the cell through
Description RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.4 Call re-establishment allowed (CallReestablish)

Full name Call re-establishment allowed
Abbreviation CallReestablish
3GPP name RE
For the call drop caused by radio link failure resulted from burst interference
or high building, MS could originate call re-establishment process to restore
the call. However, the network determines if reestablishment is allowed
by enabling CallReestablish.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, message.
Description Call re-establishment allowed is one of the network function parameters.
Managed object Cell
4-48

Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.5 Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed (DtxDwlink)

Full name Downlink discontinuous transmission allowed
Abbreviation DtxDwlink
3GPP name DTX
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0

3GPP TS 48.008 V5.12.0
3GPP reference 3GPP TS 48.058 V5
DTX mode is an optional downlink feature of GSM System.

The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system
does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber
conversation. This parameter participates in determining to use DTX mode
in downlink direction.
Actually, using DTX in downlink direction (in CHANNEL ACTIVATION
message and MODE MODIFY message sent to BTS) is determined
together by this parameter and DTX indication in downlink direction in
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message and HANDOVER REQUEST message
of MSC.
l Yes: enable;
Description l No: disable
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-02-003 Discontinuous Transmission Downlink
Relationship None
4-49

4.4.6 Uplink discontinuous transmission (DtxUplinkBcch)

Full name Uplink discontinuous transmission
Abbreviation DtxUplinkBcch
3GPP name DTX
The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the system

does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the subscriber
conversation.
This parameter controls how MS uses the DTX mode. System broadcasts
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message to all MSs in the
cell. In addition, it may be necessary to notify MSs of older versions
(of the first stage) through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE6 message on SACCH. For MSs of newer versions, the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message contains Uplink discontinuous
transmission. This parameter is one of the network function parameters.
l MS could use DTX;
l MS should use DTX;
l MS should not use DTX.
If both BTS equipment and TRAU support the DTX mode, set the parameter
Description as 1 (use DTX). Otherwise set it as 2 (not use DTX).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-02-004 Discontinuous Transmission Uplink
Relationship None
4.4.7 Emergency call allowed (EmergencyCall)

Full name Emergency call allowed
4-50

Abbreviation EmergencyCall
3GPP name EC
Generally, a valid SIM card is required for any MS in GSM Network to get
various network services. But the operators could decide if to allow MS
emergency call service for the MS without SIM card or with SIM card whose
access level is disabled by current cell, for example the police station.
Select Yes for this parameter to enable this function.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to MS in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, message.
Call re-establishment allowed is one of the network function parameters.
l No: Do not allow Emergency call for MSs whose access level is 0~9.
For the MSs whose access level is 11~15, if its corresponding access
control bit is T, the emergency call is also not allowed.
l Yes: Allow Emergency call for all MSs.
GSM specifications define emergency call phone number as 112, which
is different from Chinese emergency call, but 112 is generally connected
to the automatic voice service to inform the users about the number of
various special services. Hence, EC should be set as No, that is to allow
Description the emergency call.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-01-03-001 Emergency Call Handling
Relationship None
4.4.8 Cell bar qualify (CellBarQualify)

Full name Cell bar qualify
Abbreviation CellBarQualify
3GPP name CBQ, CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
3GPP TS 44.018 V5.22.0

4-51

This parameter preferably selects certain cells in the cell selection process
according to capacity, traffic and functional difference in overlapping areas.
This function can be implemented by configuring CellBarQualify.
CellBarQualify is used to limit cell priority in special case. Network
broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. It is
one of the cell selection parameters. The validity of this parameter depends
upon cell reselection parameter indication.
Select 'No' for Cell Bar Access and No for Cell bar qualify, that is, the cell
priority is defined as Normal. MS preferably enter some types of cells. Set
the priority of this cell type as Normal, while the priorities of other cells
are set to Low. In some cases, such as micro cellular application and
Description dual-frequency networking, this setting will not affect the cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.4.9 Access control (AccessControl)

Full name Access control
Abbreviation AccessControl
3GPP name AC CN, Access Control Class N
All MSs in GSM system have an access class (15 classes in total). The
MSs that are in the class ranging between 0 and 9 are common ones. The
MSs that are in the class ranging between 11 and 15 are special MSs (no
access class 10). Therefore, the system can disable the MSs with certain
access classes to access the cell (for example during the installation and
commissioning or the congestion control). This information can reach MS
inside the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and
4 messages through Access control. It is also one of the system control
4-52

The degree of congestion for any CCCH or processor overload during

congestion control can be reduced by temporarily prohibiting one type or
multiple types of subscribers from accessing the system (for subscribers of
access levels 0 ~ 9). In general, the system shows the following overload
conditions:
l RACH overload, which should be found in the "CCCH LOAD INDI-
CATION" message and processed by BSS according to the standard
GSM08.58;
l AGCH overload, which should be found in the "DELETE INDICATION"
message first, and handled by BSS by not sending the "IMMEDIATE
REJECT" message;
l PCH overload, which should be found in the "CCCH LOAD INDICA-
TION" message, and the BSS will not make any process but notify the
MSC;
l Other types of overload, which can be found in the OVERLOAD mes-
sage, for example, MTP overload.
Input the control level value to do add or delete action.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 9, 11 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-01-001 MS Access Control
Relationship None
4.4.10 HBTS preofread support (HBTSScanSupport)

Full name HBTS preofread support
Abbreviation HBTSScanSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the switch of searching frequency.
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
4-53

Change mode Offline
If HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) is set to 0, this parameter can

Relationship
be set but is invalid.
4.4.11 RSSI threshold (RSSlThrd)

Full name RSSI threshold
Abbreviation RSSlThrd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description RSSI threshold
Unit None
Default value 100
Change mode Offline

Relationship
4.4.12 Preofread freqband type (GSM1900Support)

Full name Preofread freqband type (GSM1900Support)
Abbreviation GSM1900Support
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if GSM900 frequency band is supported.
4-54

GSM900/DCS1800/GSM850,
Value range
0 indicates unsupported; 1 indicates supported.
Unit None
Default value GSM900/DCS1800/GSM850
Change mode Offline

Relationship be set but is invalid.
This parameter value has influence on the value of range of HBTS BARANG.
4.4.13 Range of HBTS BARANG

Full name Range of HBTS BARANG
Abbreviation HBTSRange
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
HBTSRangeLow and HBTSRangeHigh are configured in pair. You can set

multiple ranges.
Description HBTSRangeLow: the lower absolute RF channel id; HBTSRangeHigh: the
upper absolute RF channel id.
Input the range value and you can do the Add or Delete action.
Value range 0 ~ 124, 128 ~ 251, 512 ~ 885, 975 ~ 1023
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
HBTS scan site number (HBTSScanSiteNum) and Preofread freqband type

Related parameters
(GSM1900Support)

Relationship If "Preofread freqband type" = 0, range of HBTS BARANG is [0,124], [128,251],
[512,885], or [975,1023]. If "Preofread freqband type" = 1, range of HBTS
BARANG is [0,124], [128,251], [512,810], or [975,1023].
4-55

4.5 Cell Selection Parameters

The interface of cell selection parameters is shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Cell Selection Parameters
4.5.1 Additional reselection parameter indication (AdditionReselPI)

Full name Additional reselection parameter indication
Abbreviation AdditionReselPI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2

parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network
carriers decide if to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter. Additional
reselection parameter indication is to notify MS if C2 criterion is adoptable
during the cell reselection.
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages.
Additional reselection parameter indication is one of the cell selection
Description parameters. Value Instruction:
4-56

l Yes: MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters re-
lated to computing C2 from the rest bytes SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYS-
TEM INFORMATION TYPE 7 or 8.
l No: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection
and parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest octets of the
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 message (SI4 Rest Octets).
Generally, the system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used. Normally this
parameter is No. It should be Yes when the system adopts the system
messages 7 and 8, and the cell reselection uses C2.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.2 Cell reselection parameter indication (CellReselPI)

Full name Cell reselection parameter indication
Abbreviation CellReselPI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Cell reselection parameter indication notifies the MS if to use C2 as the cell

reselection parameter and if there is the related parameter for calculating
C2.
It indicates if the related parameter for calculating cell reselection standard
C2 is contained in SYSTEM INFORMATION message and if C2 standard
is adopted in the cell reselection. The successive Cell reselection offset,
Temporary offset and Penalty time are invalid, and MS takes C1 as the cell
reselection standard when this value is No.
This parameter is broadcast to all MS in the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell reselection parameter
indication is one of the cell selection parameters. Value Instruction:
l Yes: MS gets parameters to compute C2 from cell broadcast system
Description messages and regard C2 as a cell reselection standard. Parameters
4-57

Cell bar qualify, Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and Penalty
time are invalid.
l No: MS considers C1 parameter as a cell reselection standard. Pa-
rameters Cell bar qualify, Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and
Penalty time are invalid.
Enable this parameter, if related cell adopts C2 as the cell reselection
standard. Otherwise, disable it.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.3 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset,2db)

Full name Cell reselection offset
Abbreviation ReselOffset
3GPP name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
The cell reselection due to radio channel quality takes C2 as the standard.
C2 is formed according to C1 parameter, and some special offset
parameters, to add the special influence as to enable MS to enter some
cells in priority. Usually, such measures allow balancing the traffic on the
network.
Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2: Cell reselection offset,
Temporary offset, and Penalty time.
Cell reselection offset is a magnitude value, which indicates the human
modified value of C2. Calculate a modified value of C2 to encourage or
prevent MS accessing a certain cell, so as to implement balance network.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to all MSs in the cell through
upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
The setting of Cell reselection offset, Temporary offset and the Penalty
Description
time are classified into three cases:
4-58

l In case of large traffic or poor communication quality inside a cell due

to certain causes, normally MS is expected not to work in that cell (that
is, certain repulsion to that cell).
Penalty time can be set as 31 in such cases. Temporary offset is
invalid, and the numerical value of C2 equals C1 minus this parameter
Cell reselection offset. Therefore, the C2 value corresponding to the
cell is decreased, and reduces the possibility that MS reselecting the
cell. Besides, the proper value of this parameter Cell reselection offset
can be set according to the repulsive nature of cell. The more is the
repulsive nature, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in
case of a smaller Cell reselection offset.
l For cells with small traffic and low equipment utilization, normally MS is
encouraged to work in that cell (that is, certain propensity to that cell).
Cell reselection offset must be set between 0 ~ 10 (corresponding to
0 ~ 20 dB) in this case, according to tendency of the cell. The more
is the tendency, the larger is the Cell reselection offset. Vice versa in
case of a smaller Cell reselection offset. It is usually better to set the
Temporary offset same as Cell reselection offset, or a little higher than
Cell reselection offset. The main function of Penalty time is to avoid
frequent cell reselection of MS. The common recommended setting
is 1 (20 seconds) or 2 (40 seconds) (the 1800 cell of dual-frequency
network is such a case).
l For cells with ordinary traffic, usually ReselOffset should be set as 0
and PenaltyTime as 31. Thus, C2 is equal to C1, that is, without human
factors on the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.4 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset, 10dB)

Full name Temporary offset
Abbreviation TemporaryOffset
4-59

3GPP name TEMPORARY_OFFSET
network.
Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the
temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on
C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time.
Description upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit 10 dB
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.5 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s)

Full name Penalty time
Abbreviation PenaltyTime
3GPP name PENALTY_TIME
4-60

network.
Temporary offset, and Penalty time. Temporary offset indicates the
temporary modification value for C2. Temporary means that it only acts on
C2 for a period and the period depends on parameter Penalty time.
Description upon Cell reselection parameter indication.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit 20 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.6 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ReselHysteresis, 2dB)

Full name Cell reselecting hysteresis level
Abbreviation ReselHysteresis
3GPP name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Whenever MS moves across the two cell boundary-regions with different

location area codes, it initiates Location Update (LU) procedure in IDLE
mode.
C2 values obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are different
because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS to select
cell frequently. In this case, LU interval is more than cell reselection
interval. This affects call success rate, due to unreachable paging response
Description to calling party.
4-61

This increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio
resources to be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate
of the system, as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
In addition, value difference must be greater than the value specified in
CRH.
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. Cell
reselecting hysteresis level is one of the cell selection parameters.
Define Cell reselecting hysteresis level to 4 or 5 and make certain
adjustments in following cases:
l Increase cell reselection parameters of adjacent cells with different LAC.
Signaling traffic overload often occurs due to large demand of services.
l When the adjacent cells in different location areas have large over-
lapped coverage, it is suggested to increase the CRH parameter.
l If the adjacent cells with different LACs are poor in overlapped coverage,
that is, there is coverage gap, or the adjacent place is an area with
few slow moving objects such as the expressway, the CRH parameter
should be set as 1 ~ 3 (that is, 2dB ~ 6dB for the CRH level).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit 2dB
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.7 New setup cause indication (NECI)

Full name New setup cause indication
Abbreviation NECI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-62

The serving channels in GSM system can be classified into channels

with full rate and channels with half rate according to GSM specifications.
Common GSM system supports channels with full rate. The network
operators decide if the network support half rate service.
The new setup reason denotes the NECI to notify MS if the area supports
the half rate service. The parameter notifies MS through the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages. NECI is one
of networks functional parameters.
l No: half rate service access not supported by this cell;
Description l Yes: half rate service access supported by this cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.8 Power offset indication (PowerOffsetInd)

Full name Power offset indication
Abbreviation PowerOffsetInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides if offset value is added for Control channel MAX
power level parameter while sending access request message on RACH
for Class 3 MS of GSM1800. The necessity of offset value depends on
Power offset indication, that is, this parameter decides if Power offset
indication is valid. This parameter also affects MS calculating cell selection
and cell reselection standards C1 and C2.
Network broadcasts the parameter information to MSs in the cell through
Description RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
4-63

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.9 Power offset (PowerOffset, 2dB)

Full name Power offset
Abbreviation PowerOffset
3GPP name POWER OFFSET
According to the GSM specification, for Class 3 MS of GSM 1800, the

transmission power for sending access request message on RACH is to
the value of Control channel MAX power level plus a modified value. Power
offset specifies the modified value. It determines if this parameter is valid.
This parameter also affects the calculation of cell selection standard C1
and cell reselection standard C2. Network broadcasts the parameter
information to MSs in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION
Description TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~3
Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.5.10 Position of NCH channel (NchPosition)

Full name Position of NCH channel
Abbreviation NchPosition
3GPP name NCH Position
4-64

3GPP
reference 3GPP TS44.018 V8.9.0
In GSMR, NCH is used to notify MS of the existing VBS and VGCS calls in the cell,
so that MS can add them to its call. It occupies CCCH. This parameter defines the
specific position of NCH, that is, NCH starts occupying continuous n CCCH blocks
from the m block. Where, n is the number of occupied blocks, and m is the ID of
the starting block.
The relations among NchPosition, n, and m are as follows:
l If NchPosition is 0 ~ 6, then n=1, m=NchPosition;
Description
l If NchPosition is 7 ~ 12, then n=2, m=NchPosition-7;
l If NchPosition is 0 ~ 27, then n=7, m=0;
Managed
object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 27
Unit None
Default value 0
Change
mode Offline
Related ZGRB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function

features ZGRB-01-01-003 Supporting VBS
Related
Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes)
parameters
The value of the parameter Number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BsAgBlkRes)
Relationship
affects Value range of this parameter.
Related
4.5.11 Max times of VGCS UPLINK GRANT sending (Ny2)

Full name Max times of VGCS UPLINK GRANT sending
Abbreviation Ny2
3GPP name Ny2
3GPP
4-65

During uplink competition, after receiving the uplink access message, the network
side sends a VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to MS and enables T3115 timer. If
the network side does not receive any MS link setup message before timeout of
Description timer, it sends the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message again after the timeout. This
parameter decides the number of times for repeatedly sending VGCS UPLINK
GRANT message.
Managed
object Cell
Value range 5 ~ 16
Unit Times
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Related
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.12 Protective time for Listener establishment link (T3115)

Full name Protective time for Listener establishment link
Abbreviation T3115
3GPP name T3115
3GPP
During uplink competition, after receiving the uplink access message, the network
side sends a VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to MS and enables T3115 timer.
If the network side does not receive any MS link setup message before timeout
Description of timer, it sends the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message again after the timeout.
This parameter decides the protective duration for Listener establishment link at
network side.
Managed
object Cell
Value range 10 ~ 32
4-66

Unit 10 ms
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Related ZGRB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function

features ZGRB-01-01-003 Supporting VBS
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.13 Allow send uplink request from RACH for cell

(SupRachULAcc)
Full name Allow send uplink request from RACH for cell
Abbreviation SupRachULAcc
3GPP name Uplink Access Indication
3GPP
This parameter determines whether the cell allows sending uplink request from
Description RACH.
This parameter is supported from version 8.00.00 and is not used presently.
Managed
object Cell
No
Value range 0: no, indicates that the cell does not support applying for uplink talker from REACH
channel.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
4-67

Related
4.5.14 FACCH notification period (TNotify_FACCH)

Full name FACCH notification period
Abbreviation TNotify_FACCH
3GPP name Periodical FACCH notification period
3GPP
reference 3GPP TS 43.068 V8.5.0
priority is higher than a specified threshold. This parameter decides the period of
Description
sending notification on FACCH.
Managed
object Cell
Value range 1~5
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Related
ZGRO-01-01-004 Notification of a call on FACCH
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.15 Allow periodical FACCH notification on dedicated channel

(Notify_P2PInd)
Full name Allow periodical FACCH notification on dedicated channel
Abbreviation Notify_P2PInd
3GPP name Sending Periodical notification on FACCH in dedicated mode
3GPP
reference 3GPP TS 43.068 V8.5.0
4-68

priority is higher than a specified threshold. This parameter decides whether the cell
Description
allows periodically sending FACCH notification on common point-to-point channel.
Managed
object Cell
Yes, No
Value range 0: no, indicates not supporting periodical notification on dedicated channel; 1: yes,
indicates supporting periodical notification on dedicated channel.
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.16 Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel

(InbandNotify)
Full name Allow periodical notification on FACCH channel
Abbreviation InbandNotify
3GPP name inband notification
3GPP
priority is higher than a specified threshold. This parameter decides whether the
Description
cell allows sending FACCH notification.
Managed
object Cell
Yes, No
Value range 0: no, indicates not allowing periodical notification on FACCH channel; 1, yes,
indicates allowing periodical notification on FACCH channel.
Unit None
4-69

Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.17 Broadcast period for uplink busy (T3151)

Full name Broadcast period for uplink busy
Abbreviation T3151
3GPP name T3151
During a VGCS call, if talker exists, the network side periodically sends the
"uplink busy" message on the channel. This parameter determines the period for
Description
sending the "uplink busy" message.
Managed object BSC
Unit 100 ms
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGB-01-01-002 Supporting VGCS Function
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4.5.18 Broadcast period for uplink free (TULFree)

Full name Broadcast period for uplink free
Abbreviation TULFree
4-70

3GPP name None
3GPP
reference 44.018
In VGCS service, if talker priority is not supported, a terminal can preempt the call
Description right only when uplink is free. This parameter defines the period of free broadcast
uplink at network side.
Managed
object Cell
Value range 2 ~ 15
Unit 100 ms
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Related
None
features
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.6 Service Process Additional Parameters

The interface of service process additional parameters is shown in Figure 4-6.
4-71

Figure 4-6 Service Process Additional Parameters
4.6.1 Directed retry indication (DrInd_0)

Full name Directed retry indication
Abbreviation DrInd_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if directed retry process is used. Network assigns

corresponding service channel for MS in an adjacent cell, if there is no
service channel available in serving cell.
Directed retry indication defines a special handover process that can reduce
the call drop ratio. Directed retry falls into intra-BSC directed retry and
inter-BSC directed retry. The former one does not need the participation
Description of MSC, while the latter one does.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-72

Related parameters Inter Directed retry indication (DrInd_1)
When this parameter is Yes, you can set Inter Directed retry indication
Relationship
(DrInd_1).
4.6.2 Inter directed retry indication (DrInd_1)

Full name
Inter directed retry indication
Abbreviation DrInd_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if inter directed retry is used, that is, inter-BSC directed retry.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Directed retry indication (DrInd_0)
Relationship When DrInd_0 is Yes, you can set this parameter.
4.6.3 Queue allowed when assign (QueueInd_0)

Full name Queue allowed when assign
Abbreviation QueueInd_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides if queuing is allowed in assignment process. Cell

Description improves the call drop rate with the use of such techniques.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
4-73

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.4 Queue allowed when handover (QueueInd_1)

Full name Queue allowed when handover
Abbreviation QueueInd_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides if queuing can be performed during a handover

Description process and when there are no available channels in the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.5 Preemption allowed when assign (PreemptionInd_0)

Full name Preemption allowed when assign
Abbreviation PreemptionInd_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It decides if forced disconnection is allowed during the assignment. The pri-

ority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is
valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected
(handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover re-
Description quest with higher priority. Assignment request indicates the call status.
4-74

Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.6 Preemption allowed when handover (PreemptionInd_1)

Full name Preemption allowed when handover
Abbreviation PreemptionInd_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It decides if forced disconnection is allowed during the handover. The pri-

ority in the assignment request or handover is valid and the preemption is
valid. Those connections with low priority can be forcefully disconnected
(handover) to allocate their resources to other assignments or handover re-
Description quest with higher priority. A handover request indicates the call status.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.7 When assigned forced handover (ForcedHoInd_0)

Full name When assigned forced handover
Abbreviation ForcedHoInd_0
4-75

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the low priority subscribers can be forcefully han-
dover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This
Description parameter represents if forced handover is allowed during assignment.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.8 When handover forced handover (ForcedHoInd_1)

Full name When handover forced handover
Abbreviation ForcedHoInd_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the low priority subscribers can be forcefully han-
dover to other cell, so that high priority subscribers can obtain channels. This
Description parameter represents if forced handover is allowed during handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-76

4.6.9 Number of candidate cells for handover (CandidateNum)

Full name Number of candidate cells for handover
Abbreviation CandidateNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides maximum number of candidate cells for handover

that can be contained in BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message from
Description BSC to MSC.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.10 Fast average indication (FastAvg)

Full name Fast average indication
Abbreviation FastAvg
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Network may not perform handover or power control if less measurement

data is available during call process. The average calculating process
for these processes is enabled only when the measured data reaches a
certain window size.
Common average process does not take place, for the five measured
values BSC receives. BSC directly calculates the average of the 5
measured values if the fast average process is adopted.
There are three cases resulting in insufficient data for calculating the
average value, that is, call establishment period, after handover and after
power control. After performing power control once, former measured
values are discarded in situations where they could result in an error
control (measured values without the influence on handover control are
Description still existing).
4-77

In addition, old measured values are discarded after the handover has
occurred keeping it from causing error control (the forward and backward
cells are in the same BSC).
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.11 BCCH switch allowed (CanBcchExch)
Full name BCCH switch allowed
Abbreviation CanBcchExch
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter decides if the cell allows BCCH switch.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-04-001 Automatic BCCH Recovery
Relationship None
4.6.12 SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed (CanSdcchDyn)

Full name SDCCH dynamic configuration allowed
Abbreviation CanSdcchDyn
4-78

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter decides if the cell allows SDCCH dynamic configuration.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-02-003 Dynamic Configuration of SDCCH
Relationship None
4.6.13 Minimal resource threshold (ResourceThs, %)

Full name Minimal resource threshold
Abbreviation ResourceThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Minimum resource threshold allowed by the cell, which is used to calculate

Description dynamic cell priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.14 Baseband hopping TRX exchange support (Info_0_3)

Full name Baseband hopping TRX exchange support
4-79

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if automatic baseband hopping is supported.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.6.15 Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call

(FacchCallInd_0)
Full name Allowed FACCH call setup after emergency call
Abbreviation FacchCallInd_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC can allocate the suitable TCH channel when an MS attempts to ac-
cess the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell. That is the
Description so-called FACCH call establishment.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
ZGRB-03-01-004 Immediate TCH Assignment

Related features ZGRB-01-03-001 Emergency Call Handling
Relationship None
4-80

4.6.16 Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond

(FacchCallInd_1)
Full name Allowed FACCH call setup when page respond
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-01-004 Immediate TCH Assignment
Relationship None
4.6.17 Allowed call setup on FACCH (FacchCallInd_2)

Full name Allowed call setup on FACCH
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
4-81

Relationship None
4.6.18 Allowed call reestablished on FACCH (FacchCallInd_3)

Full name Allowed call reestablished on FACCH
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7 System Parameters

The interface of system parameters is shown in Figure 4-7.
4-82

Figure 4-7 System Parameters
4.7.1 Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd)

Full name Interference averaging period (InterfAvgPrd)
Abbreviation InterfAvgPrd
3GPP name INTAVE
BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels.

BTS calculates the average of recent interference values on periodic basis
and converts it into corresponding interference band information. Then BTS
transfers to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message to consider
it as a factor in channel allocation strategy. This parameter is one of the
Description BTS configuration parameters.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 31
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-001 Idle Channel Measurement
4-83

Relationship None
4.7.2 Interference Band Boundary (InterfBoundary_0~

InterfBoundary_5)
Full name Interference Band Boundary
Abbreviation InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5
3GPP name LIMITn
BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated traffic channels.

BTS calculates the average of recent interference values on periodic basis
and converts it into corresponding interference band information. BTS then,
transfers to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION message to consider
it as a factor in channel allocation strategy.
The interface boundaries are used to help the conversion of the interference
level (average) value into corresponding interference band information.
Altogether six boundaries determine five interference bands. In fact, it is
unnecessary to set interference boundary 0 and interference boundary 5.
One of them represents infinity and the other represents negative infinity.
This parameter, describing the remaining four boundaries, is one of the
BTS configuration parameters.
Description Generally, -85 ~ -115 dBm is used for interference boundaries 1 ~ 4.
Managed object Cell
Assuming the value of interference boundary is L:

l L=0: -110 dBm;
l L=1: -109 dBm
...
l L=63: -47 dBm;
l L=Other: reserved
Interference Band Boundary 0, Value range: 0;
Interference Band Boundary 1~4, Value range: 0~63;
Value range Interference Band Boundary 5, Value range: 63;
Unit None
Default value Interference band boundary 0~5: [0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 63]
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-001 Idle Channel Measurement
4-84

Relationship None
4.7.3 Radio link timeout on MS side (MsRadioLKTmOut)

Full name Radio link timeout on MS side
Abbreviation MsRadioLKTmOut
3GPP name RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT
This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at Ms side,

transmitted on BCCH or SACCH by BSS.
Radio link counter S is used to evaluate radio link failure. When MS cannot
decode SACCH message (BFI=1), S decrements; when MS successfully
receives SACCH message (BFI=0), S increases by 2. If S is decreased to
Description 0, it indicates radio link fault, call should be reestablished or released.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.4 Radio link failure criterion (ConFailCriterion)

Full name Radio link failure criterion
Abbreviation ConFailCriterion
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-85

The network side (BTS) may judge if the radio link fails according to two
criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the other is
based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. Radio link failure criterion
determines the method that the BTS uses as the standard to judge
connection failure.
If SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure,
BTS uses the same value of Radio link timeout and the same process as
MS does. Thus, BTS avoids inconsistent judgment standards in the uplink
and downlink directions. Meanwhile, the Receiving level threshold and
Receiving quality threshold parameters are invalid.
If the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to
judge connection failure, BTS will use the two parameters: Receiving level
threshold (RxLevThs) and Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs).
Value range is as follows:
l 1: Uplink SACCH Error Rate Based (in order to ensure the same judg-
ment standard on uplink and downlink);
Description l 2: RXLEV/RXQUAL Measurement Based
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.5 Radio link timeout on BSS side (BsRadioLKTmOut)

Full name Radio link timeout on BSS side
Abbreviation BsRadioLKTmOut
3GPP name RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT
This parameter is the maximum value of radio link counter S at BSS side,
transmitted on PBCCH by BSS under the leading of packet system message
Description 2.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
4-86

Unit None
Default value 64
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.7.6 Receiving level threshold (RxLevThs)

Full name Receiving level threshold
Abbreviation RxLevThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
criteria: One is based on the uplink SACCH error rate and the other is
based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.
The radio link is considered as failed if BTS detects one of the following
conditions: The uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold;
The uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. This only
applies, if the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard
to judge a connection failure. Receiving level threshold specifies the
threshold of receiving level.
This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard
to judge connection failure (Radio link failure criterion is 1). Receiving level
Description threshold is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
4-87

Relationship None
4.7.7 Receiving quality threshold (RxQualThs)

Full name Receiving quality threshold
Abbreviation RxQualThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference GSM 12.21
criteria. One is based on uplink SACCH error rate, and the other is based
on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.
If the measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge
a connection failure, the radio link will be considered as failed when BTS
detects that the uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold or
the uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. Receiving
quality threshold specifies the receiving threshold quality.
If the uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge a connection
failure, this parameter is invalid. This parameter is one of the configuration
Description parameters of BTS.
Managed object Cell
0~7
l 0: corresponding BER range < 0.2%;
l 1: 0.2 ~ 0.4%;
l 2: 0.4 ~ 0.8%;
...
l 6: 6.4 ~ 12.8%;
Value range l 7: > 12.8%
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-88

4.7.8 Radio link failure checking period (RxLevQualprd)

Full name Radio link failure checking period
Abbreviation RxLevQualprd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference GSM 12.21
Period to detect radio link failure at network side (in the unit of SACCH multi-
frame), including the detection of channel strength (dBm) and signal quality
Description received in each channel.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 63
Unit SACCH multiframe
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8 Other Parameters

The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 4-8.
4-89

Figure 4-8 Other Parameters
4.8.1 Preprocessing indication (Preprocess)

Full name Preprocessing
Abbreviation Preprocess
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The survey report contains the large amount (message amount) of Abis
interface information. Preprocess of the survey report can be transferred
to BTS to reduce the burden of Abis interface link. After preprocess, BTS
averages the survey data of MS by its own, and reports it to BSC in a
lower frequency.
Average reporting period can be two, three or four SACCH multi-frames
(480 ms). That is, the frequency decreases from the original twice/s to
once/2s, so the message amount of Abis interface decreases. However,
the decrease of message amount still depends on if the message length
before preprocess is same as that after preprocess. One disadvantage
of preprocess is that the handover control and power control are not in
time, which increases the possibility of disconnection rate. This parameter
determines if to use preprocess and its period or not.
Description l 0: Do not use preprocess
4-90

l 2: Use preprocess; the average reporting period is 2 SACCH multi-

frames
frames
frames
l Other values: Reserved
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~4
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8.2 Reserved Rate of eMLPP (EmlppThs)

Full name eMLPP channel Reserved time
Abbreviation EmlppThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines eMLPP channel reserved time, that is, the proportion
Description of eMLPP channel in all available channels in the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-91

4.8.3 Use cell EMLPP Threshold (UseCellEmlppThs)

Full name Use cell EMLPP Threshold
Abbreviation UseCellEmlppThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines if eMLPPThs is used. If yes, you should select cell
Description property, otherwise to select BSC property.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
ZGRO-01-03-001 eMLPP
Related features ZGRO-01-01-003 Adaptive Multi-rate Codec (AMR)
Relationship None
4.8.4 Support frequency offset correct (Info_0_1)

Full name Support frequency offset correct
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if frequency offset correction is supported.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-92

4.8.5 Support maximum power on handover command (Info_0_2)

Full name Support maximum power on handover command
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if maximum power on handover command is supported.
Managed object BSC
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.8.6 Cell Support Encryption Mode (CipherMode)

Full name Cell Support Encryption Mode
Abbreviation CipherMode_0~CipherMode_7
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Cell Support Encryption Mode is the encryption mode supported by cell. The
required encryption algorithm is contained in BSSAP CIPHER MODE COM-
MAND or BSSAP ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or BSSAP HANDOVER COM-
MAND message sent by the MSC side. By checking this parameter, BSC can
learn if the cell supports this required encryption algorithm to give a proper
Description response.
Managed object Cell
8 kinds, non cipher mode, A5/1~A5/7 cipher mode. A5/3 cipher mode is
not used.
Value range Value range: Yes, No
Unit None
Default value [Yes, No, No, No, No, No, No, No]
Change mode Offline
4-93

Related features ZGRB-06-02-001 Support of A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
Relationship None
4.8.7 Channel Select Strategy

Full name Channel Select Strategy
Abbreviation ChanSelectStrategy
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It is based on IMSI resource allocation.
Managed object BSC
Level 1~15, value range is:

According to channel select order of MSC, when prefer TCHF and cell
congest change to prefer TCHH
Prefer TCHF, when cell congest change to prefer TCHH
Prefer TCHH
Only TCHF
Value range Only TCHH
According to channel select order of MSC, not consider if cell congest
According to channel select order of MSC, when prefer TCHF and cell
congest, change to prefer TCHH if AMR-HR supported
Prefer TCHF, not consider if cell congest
Prefer TCHF, when cell congest, change to prefer TCHH if AMR-HR
supported
Unit None
level 1 ~ 15, the default value is: according to channel select order of MSC,
Default value
when prefer TCHF and cell congest change to prefer TCHH.
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-01-03-001 eMLPP
Relationship None
4-94

4.9 GPRS Basic Parameters

If Support GPRS in Basic Params 1 is set to support GPRS, the tabs of GPRS
parameters appear.
The interface of GPRS basic parameters is shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 GPRS Basic Parameters
4.9.1 SGSN ID (SGSNID)

Full name SGSN ID
Abbreviation SGSNID
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
SGSN serial number assigned by internal BSC, which is assigned while user
creates SGSN. This serial number cannot be modified and can be deleted
Description after creation.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value Depends on the actual configuration.
4-95

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.9.2 NSEI (NSEI)

Full name NSEI
Abbreviation NSEI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In GPRS protocol stack, every unique BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC)

that is NSEI+BVCI for each GPRS cell belongs to Network Service Entity
(NSE). NSEI uniquely identifies every NSE. Generally, one BSC is divided
into one service entity. In view of expandability, the ZXG10 system also
allows BSC to be attached with several NSEs.
Only when user firstly configures NSE in "Relevant configuration at GB
Description interface", this parameter is optional.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Depends on the NSE configuration at Gb interface
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.9.3 BVCI (BVCI)

Full name BVCI
Abbreviation BVCI
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-96

BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) provides an approach for communication

between different BSSGP entities. The peer-to-peer Point-to-Point (PTP) or
Point-to-Multipoint (PTM) or inter-signaling entity transmission of BSSGP
PDUs lies on BVC.
Each virtual connection has one identifier, that is, BVCI. It enables the
network service layer at the bottom layer to route BSSGP PDUs to the peer
Description entity very effectively. One NSE carries only one signaling BVC (BVCI=0).
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.9.4 RAC
Full name RAC (RAC)
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
4-97

Relationship None
4.9.5 PS service busy level (PsBusyLevel)

Full name PS service busy level
Abbreviation PsBusyLevel
3GPP name None
3GPP
reference None
It indicates the busy degree of PS services in a cell. It is mainly used to calculate

the key value of UPUDSP and dynamically bind DSP according to the sorting. Set
Description the value according to the actual situation to ensure a reasonable allocation of DSP
resources.
Managed
object Cell
1~5
l 1: little traffic
l 2: a little traffic
Value range
l 3: average traffic
l 4: much traffic
l 5: heavy traffic
Unit None
Default value 3
Change
mode Offline
Related
features ZGRO-03-04-002 BSC Boards Backup
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
4-98

4.10 GPRS Other Parameters 1

The interface of GPRS other parameters 1 is shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 GPRS Other Parameters 1
4.10.1 Additional reselect parameter indicator (AddResPI2)

Full name Additional reselect parameter indicator
Abbreviation AddResPI2
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the C1 and C2

parameters, according to the definition in the GSM specification. Network
carriers decide if to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter.
Additional reselection parameter indication is to notify MS if C2 criterion is
adoptable during the cell reselection.
System broadcasts through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3
and TYPE4 messages to MS in the cell. It is one of the cell selection
parameters.
Description
4-99

l Yes: MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters re-
lated to computing C2 from the rest bytes SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE 7 or 8.
l No: MS should obtain the PI parameter related to the cell reselection
and parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest octets of the
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 message (SI4 Rest Octets).
Generally, system information TYPE 7 and TYPE 8 are rarely used, this
parameter must be set as No, otherwise some MS (for example NEC)
are not able to access the network.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.2 SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)

Full name SI13 Sending Position
Abbreviation Si13Locate
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Parameter used at the MS side. SI13 sending position indicates the

scheduling position of SI13 on BCCH.
SI13 is related to the GPRS services. SI13 can be sent on either of the
following: BCCH Norm position. In this case, it occupies the BCCH block
with TC = 4; TC = ((FN DIV 51) mod (8)).
BCCH Ext position. In this case, it occupies one fixed AGCH block with
TC = 0. SI13 is sent with low success rate on the BCCH Ext position,
because SI13 has to compete with other messages, such as IMMEDIATE
ASSIGNMENT message, for delivery opportunity. For this case, the
parameter value of Access Allowed Reserved Blocks must be set greater
Description than 0. Otherwise, SI13 will not be sent.
Managed object Cell
Value range BCCH Norm, BCCH Ext
4-100

Unit None
Default value BCCH Norm
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.3 Route area code (RAC)

Full name Route area code
Abbreviation RAC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at the MS side. It is broadcast to the MS in SI3, SI4,

SI7 and SI8. RAC is similar to the BCC function in the GSM system. In
some cases, such as inter-BSC cell reselection, the GPRS network assigns
different RAC values to adjacent cells with the same route area code to
ensure that MS can initiate the Routing Area Updating process.
In this way, when MS receives different RAC values in the cells with the
same routing area code, it initiates the Routing Area Updating process
Description similar as when it spans two different routing areas.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.4 Minimal number of idle CS channel (CsChansThs)

Full name Minimal number of idle CS channel
4-101

Abbreviation CsChansThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
DBS uses this parameter on BSC MP. It indicates minimum threshold of the
number of IDLE channels under the CS status, when the network converts
the switchable channel to the PS channel.
System may fail to convert a dynamic switchable channel to a PS channel,
if the number of idle CS channels is lower than the threshold. When a PS +
CS channel in the CS status is released, it can be converted and used by PS
Description if the total number of idle channels in the cell is greater than this threshold.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.5 Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)

Full name Packet access priority threshold
Abbreviation PriAcThr
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcast to the MS in the PSI13 and

SI13 messages, indicating the priority level of MS packet access allowed by
Description the cell. as similar to the function of ACCESS CLASS.
Managed object Cell
No package access, Allow priority 1, Allow priority 1-2, Allow priority 1-3,
Value range Allow priority 1-4, Allow priority
Unit None
Default value Allow packet access with the priority level 1-4
Change mode Offline
4-102

Relationship None
4.10.6 Packet System Information Send Speed (SendSpeed)

Full name Packet System Information Send Speed
SendSpeed (PSI2, PSI3, PSI3BIS, PSI4, PSI5, PSI13, PSI3ter, PSI8,

Abbreviation PSI3quater)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used for global process on BRP. Packet System

Information Send Speed indicates if various types of PSI messages are
sent at high rate. There is limited packet system messages (16) sent at
high rate, and the number of sent messages of each type varies depending
on the length of the message. Therefore the user can only set approximate
requirements for sending rate of each system message type.
Before sending the message, the global process dynamically specifies the
sending rate of each packet system message type according to the user
Description requirement and the system limitation.
Managed object Cell
Value range 9 types, Yes, No
Unit None
Default value [Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.7 Overload report period on PRACH (OvLoadPer, s)

Full name Overload report period on PRACH
Abbreviation OvLoadPer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-103

Parameters used by FUC at BTS side. The interval of PRACH overload

Description period reported by BTS and informed by BSC.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.8 Link error counter (RLTimeout)

Full name Link error counter
Abbreviation RLTimeout
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used by BTS. BSC informs this parameter to BTS through
O&M message, explaining measurement counter while BTS can't correctly
Description decode GPRS data.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.9 PRACH receive signal level threshold (PrachBusyT)

Full name PRACH receive signal level threshold
4-104

Abbreviation PrachBusyT
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BTS uses this parameter. PRACH channel overload is one of the reasons
for overload control. The busy ratio of random access burst decides the
PRACH overload.
If a bursts level exceeds the value specified by PRACH receive signal level
Description threshold, the burst is considered as a busy burst.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.10 Average measuring bursts number on PRACH (MeaAvgSlot)

Full name Average measuring bursts number on PRACH
Abbreviation MeaAvgSlot
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BTS uses this parameter. It indicates the bursts number on PRACH. PRACH
channel overloads if receiving signal levels of AvgSlots BPs are lower than
PrachBusyT. It is a parameter used by BTS. The BTS needs to be synchro-
Description nized when modifying the parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
4-105

Default value 60
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.11 Buffer threshold of paging message (PccchIndTh_0, %)

Full name Buffer threshold of paging message
Abbreviation PccchIndTh_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Paging message buffer is overloaded threshold for packet paging channel

PPCH. The judgment scheme is as follows: i. Calculate the paging mes-
sage buffer corresponding to a paging channel. ii. Divide the message num-
ber stored in the buffer by the maximum storage amount. iii. Multiply the
obtained percentage by 100. Compare the result with the threshold. If the
Description result exceeds the threshold, then the overload can be decided.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.12 Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period

(PccchIndTh_1, %)
Full name Queue length threshold in 64 multiframe paging period
3GPP name None
4-106

3GPP reference None
FUC on BTS uses this parameter information. It indicates overload

threshold in PCCCH (PRACH, PPCH) threshold. This parameter is an array
with 3 elements, in the unit of %.
l PccchIndTh[0]: paging message buffer is overloaded for packet paging
channel PPCH. Its decision mechanism is to first calculate paging mes-
sage body buffer corresponding to one paging channel, then message
total quantity saved in this buffer divided by maximum storage to gain
a percentage, multiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it
exceeds it will be considered as overload;
l PccchIndTh[1]: paging group overload threshold of packet paging chan-
nel. Its decision mechanism is to first accumulate the message ready
to issue in buffer queue for each paging group pair, then divided by ac-
cumulation of maximum storage in buffer queue corresponding to each
paging group, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it ex-
ceeds the threshold, it will be considered as overload;
l PccchIndTh[2]: PRACH overload threshold. Its decision mechanism is
to first divide total blocks quantity of this PRACH by busy blocks on a
PRACH, multiplied by 100, compared with this threshold, if it exceeds
Description the threshold, it will be considered as overload.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.10.13 PRACH overload threshold ratio (PccchIndTh_2, %)

Full name PRACH overload threshold ratio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-107

Total block quantity on this PRACH divided by busy blocks on a PRACH, mul-
tiplied by 100, then compared with this threshold, if it exceeds this threshold,
Description it will be considered as overload.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

4-108

4.11.1 Support CCN mode (CCNActive)

Full name Support CCN mode
Abbreviation CCNActive
3GPP name CCN_ACTIVE
This parameter indicates if the cell supports CCN mode. CNN mode refers to
cell alternating notification. When BSS supports CCN mode, if MS does cell
reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICA-
TION message notification should be delivered to network in normal case.
After network receives this message, it can send specific system message
Description about standby cell to MS.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.2 Cell support system message status flow (SIStatusInd)

Full name Cell support system message status flow
Abbreviation SIStatusInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the cell supports system message status flow,
broadcast to MS in SI13 and PSI13. It describes if the network supports PSI
(SI) Status process. MS informs its network side which PSI (SI) subsets are
required for received PSI (SI) message by sending Packet PSI (SI) Status
message on PACCH. This parameter is used in CCN mode, to assist finishing
Description NACC fast cell reselection
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
4-109

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.3 Allow SOLSA MS to access (Exc_Acc)

Full name Allow SOLSA MS to access
Abbreviation Exc_Acc
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
System broadcasts this parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, and SI7 messages.

In addition, the parameter information is available in PSI3 and Psi3bis mes-
sages of local and neighboring cells. The network uses Allow SOLSA MS to
Description Access to prevent MS from residing in the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.4 CCCH SplitPgCycle support (SpgcSuport)

Full name CCCH SplitPgCycle support
Abbreviation SpgcSuport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-110

A parameter used at the MS side and the FUN side. System broadcasts
to MS through PSI3 and SI13 messages. CCCH SplitPgCycle support indi-
cates if to support the SplitPgCycle function on CCCH. Split_Pg_Cycle
means sending the PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET PAGING
and PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages on multiple
Description blocks.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.5 Extended paging supported (EpageMode)

Full name Extended paging supported
Abbreviation EpageMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to support extended paging. Extended paging

means that MS still can receive and analyze the message within 3 intervals
Description after the blocks indicated by its paging group.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-111

4.11.6 PSI status supported (PsiStatInd)

Full name PSI status supported
Abbreviation PsiStatInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used at the MS side and on the BRP. It is broadcast

to the MS in the PSI1 message, indicating if the network supports the
PACKET PSI STATUS message.
This function is optional. When PsiStatInd = 1, MS can send the PACKET
PSI STATUS message to the network and indicate the current value of the
PSI message stored on it. Later, the network sets PSI message for this MS
on the PACCH to speed up the subsequent flow of MS. Otherwise MS has to
Description listen to the PSI message only at the time points scheduled by the network.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.7 Cell support extendable uplink TBF (Ext_UTBF)

Full name Cell support extendable uplink TBF
Abbreviation Ext_UTBF
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if the cell supports extended uplink TBF. After
BSS receives CV=0 uplink block, if the cell supports extended uplink TBF,
it enters into extended uplink TBF status. At this time, it continues assign
uplink block resource to MS. If new uplink data is required to send during
extended uplink, re-establishment of uplink TBF is not required.
This function requires extended uplink function should be supported at
Description MS side.
Managed object Cell
4-112

Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.8 Uplink delay time (UIDelayTime, ms)

Full name Uplink delay time
Abbreviation UlDelayTime
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates uplink delay time, to describe uplink TBF delay time. When uplink
TBF is released, if extended uplink TBF function is not supported, this timer
starts, access to uplink delay state, to wait for downlink LLC arrival. Release
Description uplink TBF after timer is timeout.
Managed object Cell
Unit ms
Default value 1000
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.9 Downlink delay time (DIDelaytime, ms)

Full name Downlink delay time
Abbreviation DlDelaytime
3GPP name None
4-113

3GPP reference None
It indicates downlink TBF delay time. When downlink TBF is released, this
timer starts, access to delay state, to wait for new downlink LLC frame. Re-
Description lease downlink TBF after timer is timeout.
Managed object Cell
Unit ms
Default value 2000
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-013 Delayed TBF Release in DL
Relationship None
4.11.10 Extend uplink TBF time (ExtUITBFTime, ms)

Full name Extend uplink TBF time
Abbreviation ExtUITBFTime
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates extended uplink TBF delay time. When uplink TBF is released,
if extended uplink TBF function is supported, this timer starts, access to ex-
tended uplink TBF state, to wait for new uplink LLC frame. Release uplink
Description TBF after timer is timeout.
Managed object Cell
Unit ms
Default value 1500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-114

4.11.11 Interval number of GPRS TBF downlinks RRBP

(GPRSDIRrbpInterVal)
Full name Interval number of GPRS TBF downlinks RRBP
Abbreviation GPRSDIRrbpInterVal
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that downlink Gprs TBF requires MS to send Packet Downlink

Description Ack/Nack.
Managed object Cell
Value range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.12 Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP

(EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal)
Full name Interval number of EGPRS TBF downlinks RRBP
Abbreviation EGPRSDIRrbpInterVal
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that downlink EGPRS TBF requires MS to send EGPRS Packet Don-
Description wlink Ack/Nack.
Managed object Cell
Value range 6 ~ 60
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
4-115

Relationship None
4.11.13 Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK

(GPRSUIAckInterVal)
Full name Interval number of GPRS TBF uplinks ACK
Abbreviation GPRSUlAckInterVal
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that uplink Gprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to
Description MS.
Managed object Cell
Value range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.14 Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK

(EGPRSUIAckInterVal)
Full name Interval number of EGPRS TBF uplinks ACK
Abbreviation EGPRSUlAckInterVal
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Interval that uplink Egprs TBF network sends Packet Downlink Ack/Nack to
Description MS.
Managed object Cell
Value range 3 ~ 20
Unit None
4-116

Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.15 Single Block Assign Offset (SBAssOffset)

Full name Single Block Assign Offset
Abbreviation SBAssOffset
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Uplink two-phase access. The MS initiates channel request, and network

Description allocates single resource block to the MS. This parameter indicates the
searching range of this resource block.
Managed object Cell
Value range 6 ~ 12
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.16 Polling retry times (PollingRetryTime)

Full name Polling retry times
Abbreviation PollingRetryTime
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Send polling request to MS from network side. If no any reponse is received

Description from the MS. The system can send the max number of polling. The MS
instance is released after reaching the max number.
4-117

Managed object Cell
Value range 3 ~ 12
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.17 Uplink measure report period (Ulmeasureperiod, ms)

Full name Uplink measurement report period
Abbreviation Ulmeasureperiod
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used by UPPB, describing uplink measurement report pe-

Description riod reported by BTS and handled by BSC.
Managed object Cell
Unit ms
Default value 800
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.18 Calculating period of load on PPCH (LoadPer, s)

Full name Calculating period of load on PPCH
Abbreviation LoadPer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-118

This parameter is used by FUC at BTS side, describing period to calculate

Description PPCH channel load.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 16
Unit s
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.19 PSI1 send period (Psi1RepPer)

Full name PSI1 Send Period
Abbreviation Psi1RepPer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
A parameter used at the MS side and the FUN side. System broadcasts to
MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI3 messages of local and adjacent cells. PSI1
send period indicates the sending period and destination of the PSI1 mes-
sage in a cell. PSI1 contains information of cell reselection, PRACH control,
control channel description, and possible global power control parameters.
Description As long as PBCCH exists, the message is always sent at high repetition rate.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 15
l 0: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 1 multiframes;
l 1: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 2 multiframes;
...
Value range l 15: The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 16 multiframes;
Unit s
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-119

4.11.20 Selective granularity (USFGranularity)

Full name Selective granularity
Abbreviation USFGranularity
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It is assigned to the MS in PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message, indi-

cating the uplink block allocation granularity of the GPRS MS from the net-
Description work when the cell uses "dynamic allocation".
Managed object Cell
0~1
l 0: allocation granularity is 1 for uplink block;
Value range l 1: allocation granularity is 4 for uplink block
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.21 Abis timeslots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)

Full name Abis Timeslots Reserved for Packet Service
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
To ensure the PS can get required information, the number of Abis timeslots
Description
alloated to PS service is 1 by default, and modification is not recommended.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 1
4-120

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.11.22 The MAX of Abis for GPRS user (Info_1_8)

Full name The MAX of Abis for GPRS user
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the max number of Abis bounded for new allocated channel for the
Description
GPRS user while there is sufficient Abis resource.
Managed object Cell
Value range At most one Abis, At most two Abis, At most four Abis,
Unit None
Default value At most four Abis
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters Abis timeslots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)
If the Abis timeslot resource is insufficient, Abis timeslot is allocated by "Abis

Relationship
timeslots reserved for packet service (Info_1_0)".
Related
interfaces None
4.11.23 EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1

(Info1_1_0)
Full name EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1
Abbreviation Info1_1_0
3GPP name None
3GPP
reference None
4-121

This parameter indicates whether EDGE initial downlink channel allocation is

based on multislot capability 1 (that is, uplink 1 downlink 1) or the actual multislot
Description
capability brought by the MS.
This parameter is modified in version 8.00.200a.
Managed
object Cell
Yes, indicating EDGE initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1

Value range
No, indicating EDGE initial downlink allocation by actual multislot capability
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.11.24 GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1

(Info1_1_4)
Full name GPRS initial downlink allocation by multislot class 1
3GPP name None
3GPP
reference None
This parameter indicates if GPRS initial downlink allocation is based on multislot

capability 1 (that is, uplink 1 downlink 1) or the actual multislot capability brought by
Description
the MS.
Managed
object Cell
Yes, No
Value range Yes: GPRS user allocation is based on multislot capability 1
No: GPRS user allocation is based on actual multislot capability
Unit None
4-122

Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None

4.12.1 C/I (Sc)

Full name C/I
Abbreviation Sc
4-123

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC uses MEAN_BEP as C/I to indicate radio transmission quality, and

adjusts block allocation according to radio transmission quality. Divide
MEAN_BEP into 7 grades, and each grade corresponds to a weight. The
weight is dynamically added to the weight calculated from UMTS QoS
parameters, as the evidence of allocating shared block.
Allocation weight that corresponds to MEAN_BEP grade is as follows:
MEAN_BEP grade MEAN_BEP value Allocation weight
0 0 ~ 4 -3*Sc
1 5 ~ 9 -2*Sc
2 10 ~ 13 -Sc
3 14 ~ 17 0
4 18 ~ 21 Sc
5 22 ~ 26 2*Sc
Description 6 27 ~ 31 3*Sc
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.2 ARP (Sa)

Full name ARP (Sa)
Abbreviation sa
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-124

It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by ARP parameters

(priority level).
Allocation weight that corresponds to ARP is as follows:
ARP Allocation weight
1 2*Sa
2 Sa
Description 30
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~8
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.3 THP (St)

Full name THP
Abbreviation St
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It adjusts allocation weight for shared radio block by THP parameters

included in interactive service.
Allocation weight that corresponds to THP is as follows:
THP Allocation weight
00
1 St
2 2*St
3 3*St
4 4*St
5 5*St
6 6*St
7 7*St
Description 8 8*St
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~8
4-125

Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.4 Support PS Queuing (PsQueueInd)

Full name Support PS Queuing
Abbreviation PsQueueInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
If PFC is supported, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signature

QoS parameters from user side. When QoS guarantee rate for user
signature is unsatisfied (including through grabbing), and the QoS
parameter allows queuing, and if this parameter is enabled, iBSC allocates
radio resource to user according to Best Effort, and insert the user into the
queue, to wait for allocation of radio resource. Queuing time can be gotten
through PFC process; otherwise if this parameter is disabled, access to this
service is directly refused.
Description When this parameter is Yes, you can set PsMaxQueueInstNum.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)
Relationship When this parameter is Yes, you can set PsMaxQueueInstNum.
4-126

4.12.5 Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)

Full name Max PS Queue Count (PsMaxQueueInstNum)
Abbreviation PsMaxQueueInstNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the number of allowed queues in the cell. When the
user number in queue reaches this value, the service that should be queued
Description should be refused to access.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 16
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Support PS Queuing (PsQueueInd)
Relationship When PsQueueInd is Yes, you can set this parameter.
4.12.6 Support PS Preemption (PsPreemptionInd)

Full name Support PS Preemption
Abbreviation PsPreemptionInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When PFC is supported, iBSC allocates radio resource according to signa-

ture QoS parameters from user side. When signed QoS guarantee rate can't
be satisfied and user own QoS parameter allows preemption. When this pa-
Description rameter is enabled, this user can preempt radio resource with low priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
4-127

Relationship None
4.12.7 Support 3G NACC (Support3GCCN)

Full name Support 3G NACC
Abbreviation Support3GCCN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates if NACC to 3G cell is supported.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-02-02-011 Inter-BSC NACC
Relationship None
4.12.8 Support PS Prmp CS (PSPrmpCSSupport)

Full name Support PS Prmp CS
Abbreviation PSPrmpCSSupport
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates when dynamic channel with preferred PDCH is oc-
Description cupied, to determine if the channel can be preempted by PS service.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
4-128

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.9 Maximal resource for POC service (POCSrcThs,%)

Full name Maximal resource for POC service
Abbreviation POCSrcThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the percent of current PS resource occupied by POC service.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.12.10 Transform from uplink delay to extend (Info1_1_16)

Full name Transform from uplink delay to extend
3GPP name None
3GPP
reference None
4-129

This parameter indicates whether the instance can be transformed from the delay
status to the extended uplink status.
Description The transformation details are: If MS supports extended uplink status, then stop the
delay timer and start uplink block allcation to enter the extended uplink status.
Managed
object Cell
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.12.11 Max Num of resend packet assignment (Info1_1_8)

Full name Max Num of resend packet assignment
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When the number of times of resending assignment messages exceeds the

maximum number of times of resending packet assignment messages specified at
background, the TBF Release message is resent to notify MS to release TBF.
During the service process, if CTRL_ACK is lost, then judge the assignment type
that MAC is waiting for. If the assignment type is consistent with that MAC is
waiting for, then the number of resending assignment messages increments and
Description the uplink/downlink assignment message is resent. If it exceeds the maximum
number of resending assignment messages but the assignment acknowledgement
message from MS is still not received, then the TBF Release message is issued
from network and TBF is released. If the assignment type is inconsistent with
that MAC is waiting for, then the assignment timer is cleared and the assignment
message will not be resent.
4-130

Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.12.12 Resource adjust for CS preempt (Info1_1_17)

Full name Resource adjust for CS preempt
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When events, such as CS preemption, that require releasing PS channel occur,

the control plane judges whether the timeslot to be released is important timeslot
or unique timeslot after receiving the dynamic channel conversion message. If
the timeslot is not important or unique, then the control plane initiates resource
Description
adjustment and sends the resource assignment message to the user plane. The
user plane then sends packet uplink/downlink assignment message or timeslot
reallocation message to MS.
Managed object Cell
Yes, No
Value range
0: No; 1: Yes
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
4-131

Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.12.13 Subcell selection of PS channel allocation (PSALLOCSC_0)

Full name Subcell selection of PS channel allocation
Abbreviation PSALLOCSC_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
After subcell is configured, user can control the subcell selection strategy by this
parameter. The strategy includes preferring the first subcell, preferring the second
Description
subcell, and only selecting the first subcell.
Managed object Cell
Prefer subcell 1, prefer subcell 2, only subcell 1

l 0: Prefer subcell 1
Value range
l 1: Prefer subcell 2
l 2: Only subcell 1
Unit None
Default value Prefer subcell 1
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.12.14 RXLEV threshold in subcell 1 (PSALLOCSC_1)

Full name RXLEV threshold in subcell 1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-132

After subcell is set, this parameter is used to control the level threshold for
selecting the first subcell. When PS channel is in the second subcell, if the level is
smaller than PSALLOCSC_1 and TA is larger than PagBlkRes, then it is necessary
Description
to move to the first subcell.
(PSALLOCSC_1+10) is smaller than or equal to PSALLOCSC_2.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 20
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.12.15 RXLEV threshold in subcell 2 (PSALLOCSC_2)

Full name RXLEV threshold in subcell 2
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
After subcell is set, this parameter is used to control the level threshold for
selecting the second subcell. When PS channel is in the first subcell, if the level is
more than PSALLOCSC_2 and TA is less than PagBlkRes, then it is necessary to
Description
move to the second subcell.
(PSALLOCSC_1+10) is smaller than or equal to PSALLOCSC_2.
Managed object Cell
4-133

0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Unit None
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Related
features None
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
Related
interfaces None
4.13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell options parameters is shown in Figure 4-13.
4-134

Figure 4-13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters
4.13.1 T3168 (s)

Full name T3168 (s)
Abbreviation T3168
3GPP name T3168
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the GPRS cell option

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages.
T3168 indicates the maximum time to wait for PACKET UPLINK
ASSIGNMENT message after MS sends PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST
message (or PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message with Channel
Description Request Description IE).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0.5 ~ 4.0 (Step length is 0.5)
Unit s
Default value 4.0
Change mode Offline
4-135

Relationship None
4.13.2 T3192(ms)
Full name T3192(ms)
Abbreviation T3192
3GPP name T3192
Parameter used at the MS side.

During the packet downlink transmission, if RLC data block is the final
downlink data block to be transmitted, the network sends the RLC data
block with the Final Block Identifier (FBI) domain as 1. It contains an
effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the downlink TBF.
For each RLC data block that receives FBI with value 1 and contains
effective RRBP domain:
l In acknowledged mode, the MS sends PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message whose FBI domain is 1 on the uplink block
specified by the RRBP domain.
l In unacknowledged mode, MS sends the PACKET CONTROL AC-
KNOWLEDGE message in the uplink block specified as per RRBP
field. Then, the MS will start T3192.
T3192 releases the resources, stop discreet listening to the PDCCH
channel when it expires, and turns to the paging channel for discreet
listening. If an MS receives PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT or
PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message from the network within
the protection period of the T3192 timer, it stops T3192 and transfer to the
Description packet transmission status.
Managed object Cell
Value range 500, 1000, 1500, 0, 80, 120, 160, 200
Unit ms
Default value 500
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-136

4.13.3 T3142(s)
Full name T3142(s)
Abbreviation T3142
3GPP name T3142

This timer starts if the MS receives immediate assignment refusal or DTM
Description refusal during packet access. This timer does not function if the MS in
original cell does not allow to initiate access request but the MS does cell
reselection prior to the timer timeout.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.4 T3172(s)
Full name T3172(s)
Abbreviation T3172
3GPP name T3172

This timer starts if the MS receives PACKET ACCESS REJECT message
during packet access. The MS disables packet access if this timer is
Description timeout. The MS changes to idle status if this timer is timeout prior to
receiving assignment message. After this timer timeout, the MS does not
disable packet access in this cell, but should not take channel request as
paging response except the MS receives paging request message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit s
4-137

Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.5 DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)

Full name DRX mode holding time
Abbreviation DrxTimeMax
3GPP name DRX_TIMER_MAX

messages, indicating the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX.
When changing from the packet transmission mode to the packet idle
mode, the MS should first enter the non-DRX mode. Minimum values of
this parameter and DRX_TIMER_MAX parameters determine the time
Description length for MS to stay in the Non-DRx mode.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64
Unit s
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-010 GPRS non-DRX Mode
Relationship None
4.13.6 MAX blocks transmission in each TS (BsCvMax)

Full name Max Blocks Transmission in Each TS
Abbreviation BsCvMax
3GPP name BS_CV_MAX
4-138


messages, indicating the value of the maximum blocks (BS_CV_MAX)
sent on each timeslot.
This parameter decides the time of T3198 used by the MS as the sending
party (= time represented by BS_CV_MAX), the time of T3200 used by the
MS in the non-DRX mode (= 4 x the time represented by BS_CV_MAX),
and the value of N3104max (=3 x (BS_CV_MAX+3) x Number of timeslots
assigned in the uplink).
All uplink data blocks sent by MS contain the COUNT DOWN VALUE (CV)
field. The network can use this field to calculate the data blocks to be sent
Description on current uplink TBF.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.7 Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)

Full name Packet control acknowledgment type
Abbreviation CtraCKType
3GPP name CONTROL_ACK_TYPE
This parameter is used on RLC/MAC layer of BRP and at MS side. System

broadcasts to MS through PSI1, PSI13, and SI13 messages. Packet control
acknowledgment type indicates the default format for MS to send PACKET
Description CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4 access bursts, RLC/MAC control block
Unit None
Default value RLC/MAC control block
4-139

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.8 Access burst type (AccessType)

Full name Access burst type
Abbreviation AccessType
3GPP name ACCESS_BURST_TYPE

messages, indicating if to use the 8-bit or 11-bit access burst in PRACH,
PTCCH/U and the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMNT message.
The main difference between the two types is that 11-bit access burst can
Description take more content than 8-bit access burst.
Managed object Cell
Value range 8 bits, 11 bits
Unit None
Default value 8 bits
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.9 N3102 decrease step (PanDec)

Full name N3102 decrease step
Abbreviation PanDec
3GPP name PAN_DEC
4-140

Parameter used at the MS side. They belong to the GPRS cell option
parameters, and they are broadcast to the MS in the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages, indicating the values of parameters of PAN_DEC, PAN_INC
and PAN_MAX. After each cell reselection, the MS will set the initial value
of N3102 as the PanMax value.
1. When MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to
move V(S) forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but the maximum value
should not exceed PanMax).
2. When MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182 will
start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message
that enables V(S) < V(A) + W(S), T3182 stops. If T3182 expires, the MS
will subtract PanDec from N3102. When the condition satisfies N3102
< 0, the MS will take cell reselection as abnormal release. When one of
Description PanDec, PanInc, and PanMax is zero, N3102 is invalid.
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.10 N3102 increase step (PanInc)

Full name N3102 increase step
Abbreviation PanInc
3GPP name PAN_INC
4-141

1. When the MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to
2. When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182
will start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.11 N3102 MAX (PanMax)

Full name N3102 Max
Abbreviation PanMax
3GPP name PAN_MAX
4-142

1. When the MS receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to
2. When the MS detects the stall condition (V(S) = V(A) + W(S)), T3182
will start. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message
Managed object Cell
Value range 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.13.12 GPRS phone init coding

Full name GPRS phone init coding
Abbreviation GPRSInitattselt_0~GPRSInitattselt_3
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the default-coding mode for GPRS MS initial ac-
cess, under different Abis interface link bandwidths. This is a four-dimen-
sional array, indicating GPRS uplink init coding scheme, GPRS downlink init
coding scheme, GPRS uplink max coding scheme, and GPRS downlink max
Description coding scheme.
Managed object Cell
4-143

l GPRS uplink init coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;

l GPRS downlink init coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;
l GPRS uplink max coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4;
Value range l GPRS downlink max coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4.
Unit None
Default value [CS2, CS2, CS4, CS4]
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-03-05-002 Initial Coding Scheme per Cell Settable
Relationship None
4.13.13 GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0)

Full name GPRS phones init code can be changed
Abbreviation InitAttachExch_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if GPRS phones default code can be changed dy-
Description namically.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters

The interface of GPRS NC survey parameters is shown in Figure 4-14.
4-144

Figure 4-14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters
4.14.1 Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)

Full name Packet Idle mode
Abbreviation NcRepPerI
3GPP name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I
Parameter used at the MS side. System broadcasts the parameter

information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 messages. This parameter
indicates the period of MS reporting cell reselection survey in packet IDLE
mode. When Network control order is NC0, the parameter information is
not necessary to broadcast through PSI5 message.
Description This parameter also can be sent to MS through PMO message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Unit s
Default value 61.44
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-02-02-012 Network Controlled Cell Reselection
4-145

Relationship None
4.14.2 Packet transmission mode (NcRerPerT, s)

Full name Packet transmission mode
Abbreviation NcRerPerT
3GPP name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to NC measurement parameter,

which is broadcast to MS in system message SI2Quater and PSI5
message. This parameter indicates the period of MS reporting cell
reselection survey in packet transmission mode. When Network control
order is NC0, the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast
through PSI5 message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0.48, 0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68, 15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Unit s
Default value 3.84
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.3 Extended measurement report order (MeaOrder)

Full name Extended measurement report order
Abbreviation MeaOrder
3GPP name MEASUREMENT_ORDER
Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1

message, indicating the survey report command of MS in the cell.
Description This parameter indicates if PSI5 is sent.
4-146

Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.4 Network control order (CtrlOrder)

Full name Network control order
Abbreviation CtrlOrder
3GPP name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the network control survey

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5, PSI13, SI3, and
SI2quater messages, indicating the network control command used in the
cell. If the parameter equals to NC0, then NC survey parameters (NC hold
time in non-drx mode, and Cell Reselection Survey Report Period) can be
ignored; if the parameter is NC1 or NC2 and NC measurement parameters
are ignored, use the default value.
l NC0: MS controls cell reselection, and there is no survey report;
l NC1: MS controls cell reselection and sends the survey report;
l NC2: The network controls cell reselection and MS sends the survey
Description report.
Managed object Cell
Value range NC0, NC1, NC2
Unit None
Default value NC0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-147

4.14.5 NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)

Full name NC hold time in non-drx mode
Abbreviation NcNoDrxPer
3GPP name NC_ NON_DRX_PERIOD
Parameter used at the MS side. This parameter belongs to network

control survey and is used at MS side. System broadcasts the parameter
information to MS through SI2Quater and PSI5 message. This parameter
indicates the minimal time for an MS to stay in the non-DRX mode after
sending an NC survey report. When Network control order is NC0,
the parameter information is not necessary to broadcast through PSI5
message.
Managed object Cell
Value range No non-DRX mode, 0.24, 0.48, 0.72, 0.96, 1.20, 1.44, 1.92
Unit s
Default value 0.48
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.6 Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)

Full name Extended measurement report order
Abbreviation ExMeaOrder
3GPP name EXT_MEASUREMENT_ORDER
4-148

Parameter used at the MS side. System broadcasts to MS through PSI5

message. This parameter indicates if the MS performs extended survey. In
addition, it indicates how to interpret the other extended survey parameters
(Type of extended measurement report and Report period of extended
measurement).
l EM0: MS performs no extended survey
Description l EM1: MS must send the extended survey report to the network
Managed object Cell
Value range EM0, EM1
Unit None
Default value EM0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.7 Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)

Full name Type of extended measurement report
Abbreviation ExtRepType
3GPP name EXT_REPORTING_TYPE
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the extended survey

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5 message, indicating
the type of the extended survey report of MS. System sends the parameter
information through the PSI5 message when Extended measurement
report order is EM1.
l Type I: This type of report must be extended if the frequency points for
the extended survey are among the six strongest carrier frequencies,
even if the BSIC decoding is successful. The report should cover the
receiving signal level and the successfully decoded BSIC (if any);
l Type II: This type of report must be extended if all the frequency points
for the extended survey are located in the six strongest carrier frequen-
cies, the BSIC decoding is successful and the NCC part is allowed for
survey. The report should cover the receiving signal level and the suc-
Description cessfully decoded BSIC;
4-149

l Type III: Use this type of report to report all the frequency points for the
extended survey. No BSIC decoding is necessary. The report should
contain the receiving signal level. Besides, the interference of each car-
rier frequency should be reported.
Managed object Cell
Value range Type1, Type2, Type3
Unit None
Default value Type 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.8 Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)

Full name Report period of extended measurement
Abbreviation ExtRepPer
3GPP name EXT_REPORTING_PERIOD
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the extended survey parame-

ters and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI5 message, indicating the interval
of extended survey report. System sends the parameter information through
Description the PSI5 message when Extended measurement report order is EM1.
Managed object Cell
Value range 60, 120, 240, 480, 960, 1920, 3840, 7680
Unit s
Default value 1920
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-150

4.14.9 The Size of Test Report's Slip Window (Wnd)

Full name The Size of Test Report's Slip Window
Abbreviation Wnd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used.
When the number of measurement reports reaches this parameter setting
Description value, average processing is done for measurement report.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.14.10 Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window

(AllowedRepNum)
Full name Allowed report number of the same cell in Slip Window
Abbreviation AllowedRepNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When NC2 network controls the cell reselection, this parameter is used.
When adjacent cell receives average level, and the number of valid mea-
surement report received in slip window is lower than setting value, this cal-
Description culation should be punished.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~6
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
4-151

Relationship None
4.15 GPRS Power Control Parameters

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 GPRS Power Control Parameters
4.15.1 Filter period in the packet idle mode (T_AVG_W, s)

Full name Filter period in the packet idle mode
Abbreviation T_AVG_W
3GPP name T_AVG_W
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the global power control and
GPRS power control parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1,
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the
Description signal intensity for power control in the packet idle mode.
4-152

Managed object Cell
0 ~ 31
l 0: filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes;
...
Value range l 26~31: filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes.
Unit s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.2 Filter period in packet transmission mode (T_AVG_T, s)

Full name Filter period in packet transmission mode
Abbreviation T_AVG_T
3GPP name T_AVG_T
PSI13 and SI3 messages. This parameter indicates the filter period of the
Description signal intensity for power control in the packet transmission mode.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 31
...
Value range l 26 ~ 31: reserved
Unit s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
4-153

Relationship None
4.15.3 PSI4 sending mark (Psi4Send)

Full name PSI4 sending mark
Abbreviation Psi4Send
3GPP name INT_MEAS_CHANNEL_LIST_AVAIL
This parameter belongs to global power control and is used at MS side. It

belongs to the global power control parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS
in the PSI1 message. This parameter indicates if the optional PSI4 message
is broadcast. This message contains a list of channels that interferes with
Description the survey.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.4 Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)

Full name Power control measurement channel
Abbreviation PcMeasChan
3GPP name PC_MEAS_CHAN
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter indicates the position where the
Description downlink power strength is surveyed for uplink power control.
Managed object Cell
4-154

Value range BCCH, PDCH
Unit None
Default value BCCH
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.15.5 Power control parameter (Alpha)

Full name Power control parameter
Abbreviation Alpha
3GPP name ALPHA
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter determines the MS transmission
Description power control Alpha ().
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 10
parameters controlled by MS transmitting power is Alpha (),
l 0: = 0.0;
l 1: = 0.1;
...
l 10: = 1.0;
Value range l 11~15: = 1.0
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-155

4.15.6 Filter constant of power control (N_AVG_I)

Full name Filter constant of power control
Abbreviation N_AVG_I
3GPP name N_AVG_I
PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter is a filter constant used to opti-
Description mize the interference signal intensity in power control.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

The interface of GPRS cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 4-16.
4-156

Figure 4-16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS via system message

by BTS. In the GPRS system, C32 is used as the standard for cell
reselection. Similar to the C2 standard in GSM, there is a cell reselection
offset parameter (ReselOff) for calculation of the C32 standard. When the
offset represented by this parameter is 0dB, it need not be indicated in
the packet system message.
Managed object Cell
4-157

0 ~ 31
l 0: -52 dB;
l 1: -48 dB;
...
l 22: +12 dB;
...
l 31: +48 dB
Step between -52 ~ -12 dB and 12 ~ 48 dB is 4 dB, and step of -12 ~ 12
Value range dB is 2 dB.
Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-02-02-009 Support of C31 and C32 Criteria
Relationship None
4.16.2 Reselection offset 2 (ReselOff_1)

Full name Reselection offset 2

system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. Similar to the C2
standard in GSM, there is a cell reselection offset parameter (ReselOff)
for calculation of the C32 standard. When the offset represented by this
parameter is 0dB, it need not be indicated in the packet system message.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 31
l 0: -52 dB;
l 1: -48 dB;
...
l 22: +12 dB;
...
Value range l 31: +48 dB
4-158

Unit 2dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


reselection. Similar to the C2 standard in GSM, there is a temporary offset
parameter TempOffset for calculation of the C32 standard and it provides
the C32 standard with a negative offset.
Managed object Cell
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.4 Reselection temporary offset 2 (TempOffset_1, dB)

Full name Reselection temporary offset 2
4-159


system, C32 is used as the standard for cell reselection. Similar to the C2
standard in GSM, there is a temporary offset parameter TempOffset for
calculation of the C32 standard and it provides the C32 standard with a
negative offset.
Managed object Cell
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


reselection. There is a temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative
offset, similar to C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on
PenalTime of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 31
l 0: 10s;
l 1: 20s;
...
Value range l 31: 320s
4-160

Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.6 Penalty time of cell reselection 2 (PenalTime_1, 10s)

Full name Penalty time of cell reselection 2

temporary offset in C32 that provides a negative offset, similar to C2 in
GSM system. The effective time depends on PenalTime of cell reselection.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 31
l 0: 10s;
l 1: 20s;
...
Value range l 31: 320s
Unit 10 s
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-161

4.16.7 Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_Resel_0, s)

Full name Interval of reselecting the same cell
Abbreviation T_Resel_0
3GPP name T_RESEL

by BTS. When MS performs a cell reselection that causes abnormal
release of this cell, it is not allowed to reselect this cell again within the
T_RESEL period, unless there is no other cells for selection. When the
time represented by this parameter is the default value (5s), it does not
need to be broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.8 Interval of reselecting the same cell 2 (T_Resel_1, s)

Full name Interval of reselecting the same cell 2
Abbreviation T_Resel_1
3GPP name T_RESEL
Parameter used at the MS side. Inform MS on PACCH. When MS performs

a cell reselection that causes abnormal release of this cell, it is not allowed
to reselect this cell again within the T_RESEL period, unless there is no
other cells for selection. When the time represented by this parameter is
the default value (5s), it does not need to be broadcast to the MS in the
PSI3 message.
4-162

Managed object Cell
Value range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120, 300
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.9 Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_Thr_0)

Abbreviation HCS_Thr_0
3GPP name HCS_THR

broadcast to MS via system message by BTS. It indicates the HCS signal
strength threshold of the cell.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm;
l 1: -108 dBm;
Value range ...
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-163

4.16.10 Threshold of HSC signal level 2 (HCS_Thr_1)

Full name Threshold of HSC signal level 2
Abbreviation HCS_Thr_1
3GPP name HCS_THR

informed to MS on PACCH. It indicates the HCS signal strength threshold
of the cell.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm;
l 1: -108 dBm;
Value range ...
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


broadcast to MS via system message by BTS. It specifies the HCS priority
of the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
4-164

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.12 HCS priority 2 (PrioClass_1)

Full name HCS Priority 2

informed to MS on PACCH. It specifies the HCS priority of the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.13 C31 hysteresis (C31_Hyst_0)

Full name C31 hysteresis
Abbreviation C31_Hyst_0
3GPP name C31_HYST
4-165

Parameter used at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS through system

message by BTS, which indicates if CellReselHys parameter functions
on C31 standard.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.14 C31 hysteresis 2 (C31_Hyst_1)

Full name C31 hysteresis 2
Abbreviation C31_Hyst_1
3GPP name C31_HYST
Parameter used at the MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH and

specifies if to use the parameter CellReselHys on the C31 standard.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-166

4.16.15 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys_0, dB)

Full name GPRS cell reselection hysteresis
Abbreviation ReselHys_0
3GPP name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

by BTS.
MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection
in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination
cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for
two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio
channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently.
The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s.
However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This
increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to
be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system,
as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
GSM specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis
(CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection according
to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell (whose location
zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than that of local cell,
and meanwhile the value difference must be greater than that required
by the parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
4-167

Relationship None
4.16.16 GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2 (ReselHys_1, dB)

Full name GPRS cell reselection hysteresis 2
Abbreviation ReselHys_1
3GPP name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Parameter used at the MS side. Inform MS on PACCH.

MS needs to go through location updating process after cell reselection
in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the original cell and destination
cell are in different locations. C32 values obtained at the boundary for
two adjacent cells are different because of fading characteristic of radio
channel. It causes MS to select cell frequently.
The interval between the two cell reselections of MS is not less than 15 s.
However, 15 s is extremely short time in terms of location updating. This
increases the signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to
be fully utilized. In addition, it decreases call completion rate of the system,
as MS cannot respond to paging during location update.
GSM specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis
(CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection according
to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell (whose location
zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than that of local cell,
and meanwhile the value difference must be greater than that required
by the parameter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 6
4-168

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.17 Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys_0, dB)

Full name Routing reselection hysteresis
Abbreviation RaReselHys_0
3GPP name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

message by BTS. This parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in
selecting a cell in another routing area when MS is in IDLE or BUSY mode.
When this parameter has the same value as CellReselHys, it does not
need to be broadcast in the PSI3 message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.18 Routing reselection hysteresis 2 (RaReselHys_1, dB)

Full name Routing reselection hysteresis 2
Abbreviation RaReselHys_1
3GPP name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
4-169

Parameter used at the MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH. This

parameter specifies extra hysteresis value used in selecting a cell in
another routing area when MS is in IDLE or BUSY mode. When this
parameter has the same value as CellReselHys, it does not need to be
broadcast in the PSI3 message.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Unit dB
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.19 Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry_0)

Full name Random access attempt permitted
Abbreviation RadAcRetry_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

message by BTS, which indicates if MS is allowed to attempt to access
another cell (if any).
If there is abnormal release in the packet transmission, the MS will discard
all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform
abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell. If
there are other suitable cells, the MS cannot reselect the original cell within
T_RESEL seconds.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
4-170

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.20 Random access attempt permitted 2 (RadAcRetry_1)

Full name Random access attempt permitted 2
Abbreviation RadAcRetry_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Parameter used at the MS side. It is informed to MS on PACCH, which

indicates if MS is allowed to attempt to access another cell (if it exists).
If there is abnormal release in the packet transmission, the MS will discard
all running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells, it should perform
abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after initializing new cell. If
there are other suitable cells, the MS cannot reselect the original cell within
T_RESEL seconds.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.21 Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_Qual_0)

Full name Usage of cell reselection offset
Abbreviation C32_Qual_0
3GPP name C32_QUAL
4-171


message by BTS, which indicates if the exceptional rule is used when
ReselOff is adopted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.22 Usage of cell reselection offset 2 (C32_Qual_1)

Full name Usage of cell reselection offset 2
Abbreviation C32_Qual_1
3GPP name C32_QUAL
Parameter used at the MS side. It is informed to the MS on PACCH, and it

specifies if to use the exceptional rule for ReselOff.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-172

4.16.23 GPRS access minimum signal level 1 (RxLevAsMin_0)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level 1

by BTS.
It indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS
system. To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving
signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee
normal communications after accessing) and from unreasonably wasting
radio sources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that the
receiving level be more than a threshold level for MS to access the network,
that is, Min RxLev Needed (the minimum receiving level that allows MS to
access the cell).
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.24 GPRS access minimum signal level 2 (RxLevAsMin_1)

Full name GPRS access minimum signal level 2
4-173


It indicates the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS
system. To prevent the MS from accessing the system at a low receiving
signal level (usually, the poor communication quality cannot guarantee
normal communications after accessing) and from unreasonably wasting
radio sources of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that the
receiving level be more than a threshold level for MS to access the network,
that is, Min RxLev Needed (the minimum receiving level that allows MS to
access the cell).
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 12
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.25 Priority threshold (Prio_Thr, dB)

Full name Priority threshold
Abbreviation Prio_Thr
3GPP name PRIO_THR
4-174

System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and

SI7 messages. This parameter relates to GPRS access minimal signal level
Description in calculation of C4 standard.
Managed object Cell
Unit dB
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.26 HCS exist (HCS_Exist_0)

Full name HCS exist
Abbreviation HCS_Exist_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Cell Structure (HCS) and broadcast to MS via system message by BTS.
This parameter indicates if the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and
HCSTHr) exist in the cell. If the local cell does not use HCS parameters,
the HCS parameters of other cells will also be ignored, that is, all the cells
use the HCS signal strength threshold of infinity.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-175

4.16.27 HCS exist 2 (HCS_Exist_1)

Full name HCS exist 2
Abbreviation HCS_Exist_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Cell Structure (HCS) and be informed to MS on PACCH. This parameter
indicates if the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and HCSTHr) exist in the
cell. If the local cell does not use HCS parameters, the HCS parameters
of other cells will also be ignored, that is, all the cells use the HCS signal
strength threshold of infinity.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.28 GPRS MAX initial access signal level 1 (MsTxMaxCch_0)

Abbreviation MsTxMaxCch_0
4-176


by BTS.
transmission power.
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is set
too large, the MS near BTS will interfere the adjacent channels. If it is too
small, the MS at the cell boundaries will have low access success rate.
To set it, observe the following principle: Under the precondition that the
MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate,
the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Generally,
it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for
GSM1800MS).
parameter settings to determine if to increase or decrease the value of
the parameter.
The value is same as that in appendix.
Description status, which only functions while PBCCH is set.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.29 GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2 (MsTxMaxCch_1)

Full name GPRS MAX initial access signal level 2
Abbreviation MsTxMaxCch_1
4-177


transmission power.
MS, involved in calculation of C1 and C2 values. If this parameter is set
too large, the MS near BTS will interfere the adjacent channels. If it is too
small, the MS at the cell boundaries will have low access success rate.
To set it, observe the following principle: Under the precondition that the
MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate,
the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Generally,
it is recommended to set this parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for
GSM1800MS).
parameter settings to determine if to increase or decrease the value of
the parameter.
The value is same as that in appendix.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.30 LSA ID (LSA_Id)

Full name LSA Mark
Abbreviation LSA_Id
3GPP name LSA ID
4-178

System broadcasts the parameter to MS in SI4, SI6, SI7, and PSI3 mes-
sages of serving cell. In addition, system broadcasts the parameter informa-
tion in PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. LSA ID specifies
Description LSA identifier of the cell.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.16.31 LSA Offset (LSA_Offset)

Full name LSA Offset
Abbreviation LSA_Offset
3GPP name LSA_OFFSET
System broadcasts the parameter information to MS through SI4, SI6 and

SI7 messages. This parameter defines the offset value for LSA reselection
Description between two cells with the same LSA priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-179

4.17 GPRS Channel Parameters

The interface of GPRS channel parameters is shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 GPRS Channel Parameters
4.17.1 PAGCH reserved blocks (PagBlkRes)

Full name PAGCH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PagBlkRes
3GPP name BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the PCCCH organization

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message.
This parameter indicates the number of blocks where neither packet paging
nor PBCCH can appear in a 52-frame multiframe. On these blocks, only
PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH can appear. The UPLINK ASSIGNMENT
message will be sent in priority on these fixed blocks to speed up
establishment of the uplink TBF.
After sending the channel request on PRACH channel, MS waits for the
uplink assignment message on all PCCCH channels of the same timeslot
Description as the PRACH channel.
Managed object Cell
4-180

Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.2 PBCCH reserved blocks (PbcchBlks)

Full name PBCCH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PbcchBlks
3GPP name BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the PCCCH structure

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. This
parameter indicates the number of blocks assigned as PBCCH in a
52-frame multiframe (altogether 12 blocks).
PBCCH blocks are used at the same time by the packet system messages
sent at high rate and low rate. A message that is sent at high rate has
higher priority. This parameter must be configured together with the
PSI1_REPEAT_PERIOD parameter in the PSI1 message to ensure that
the block resources are available for the packet system messages, sent
Description both at high and low rates.
Managed object Cell
PBCCH occupies 1 block in multi-frame, PBCCH occupies 2 blocks in multi-

frame, PBCCH occupies 3 blocks in multi-frame, PBCCH occupies 4 blocks
Value range in multi-frame
Unit None
Default value PBCCH occupies four blocks in the multiframe.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-181

4.17.3 PRACH reserved blocks (PrachBlks)

Full name PRACH reserved blocks
Abbreviation PrachBlks
3GPP name BS_PRACH_BLKS
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the PCCCH organization

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. This
parameter indicates the number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH
channel in the PDCH channel that bears PCCCH.
These blocks must be identified by USF = FREE. MS can use this
Description parameter or USF = FREE to carry out the PRACH assignment.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.4 Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)

Full name Interval range of packet access attempt
Abbreviation TxInt
3GPP name TX_INT
Parameter used at the MS side. It belongs to the PRACH control

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. In
establishment of a connection, MS usually will send the channel request
message in the PRACH channel to the network.
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS
access, the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages
before it receives the packet assignment message. If MS does not get
any response for the previous channel request message, it can resend a
Description channel request message after waiting for a random period. Interval range
4-182

of packet access attempt is used to determine the time length of random

waiting. It is the number of delay timeslot randomly connected.
Both interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of
packet access attempt (S) commonly determine random access time.
Managed object Cell
Value range 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.5 Interval period of packet access attempt (S)

Full name Interval period of packet access attempt
Abbreviation S
3GPP name S

It belongs to the PRACH control parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS
in the PSI1 message. In establishment of a connection, MS usually will
send the channel request message in the PRACH channel to the network.
As PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS
access, the network allows the MS to send multiple channel request
messages before receiving the packet assignment message. When the
previous channel request message is not responded, MS will wait for a
random period to re-send the channel request message. Parameter S
decides the random waiting time. It is used to calculate the minimum
timeslot number between two channel requests.
Both interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt) and Interval period of
Description packet access attempt (S) commonly determine random access time.
Managed object Cell
Value range 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217
Unit s
Default value 109
4-183

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.6 MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans)

Full name MAX Times of Attempt
Abbreviation MaxRetrans
3GPP name MAX_RETRANS

parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. indicating
the maximum attempts of random access allowed on PRACH for the MSs
with radio priorities 1 ~ 4.
This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first array element
Description corresponds to maximum number of attempts allowed for radio priority 1.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1, 2, 4, 7
Unit None
Default value [4, 4, 4, 4]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.7 Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass)

Full name Access control level
Abbreviation AccCtrlClass
3GPP name ACC_CONTR_CLASS
4-184

It indicates MS access control level to access cell. Common MS has the

class 0 ~ 9 and special MS has the class 11 ~ 15. Class 10 does not exist.
System can prohibit MS with some access class to enter the cell according
to this parameter. System allows access of a mobile with access class, N =
0, 1 ...9, 11 ...15. It allows emergency calls when the eleventh digit = EC.
(For convenient programming, C10 is always 0)
If the Nth bit of access control level is 0 (0 represents access allowed,
1 represents access not allowed), it will allow the access of MS with
AccCtrlClass =N (N=0, 1, ... 9, 11, ... 15). Bit 11= EC represent that
Emergency Call is available.
This parameter consists of two bytes (16 bits).
The first bit: C15, C14, C13, C12, C11, C10, C9, C8;
The second bit: C7, C6, C5, C4, C3, C2, C1, C0
l Parameter allows cell access when Cn is 0, which indicates that MS with
access class of N is not forbidden (N =0,1,..., 9, 11,..., 15)
l Parameter forbids cell access when Cn is 1, which indicates that MS
with access class of N is forbidden (N = 0, 1,..., 9, 11,..., 15)
Description l C10 is always 0.
Managed object Cell
Value range Value range: Yes, No
Unit None
Default value [No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No, No]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.8 Access Persist Level (PersistLev)

Full name Access Persist Level
Abbreviation PersistLev
3GPP name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL
4-185


parameters, and it is broadcast to the MS in the PSI1 message. The
network sets a level threshold P I (I = 1, 2, 3, 4) for MS of various radio
priorities.
For each attempt of packet access, MS abstracts a random value R with
even distribution probability from the set {0, 1 15}. System allows MS to
initiate an attempt of packet access only when P I is lower than or equal
to R.
This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first element corresponds
Description to the access and persisting level of radio priority 1.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Unit None
Default value [0, 0, 0, 0]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.9 Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel

(HybridOccuSupp)
Full name Support of subscriber occupying other preference channel
Abbreviation HybridOccuSupp
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if subscriber occupying other preference channel

is supported. It indicates this kind of preference channel is busy, other chan-
Description nels are idle, to determine if this preference channel is occupied.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-009 Flexible Priority Handling of Packet Data Channel
4-186

Relationship None
4.17.10 Support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference

channel (AllowPsMove)
Full name Support of PS subscriber moving out of other preference channel
Abbreviation AllowPsMove
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if support subscriber moving out of other prefer-

ence channel. It indicates if the user that occupies other channels should be
Description removed.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.11 Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level

(AllowCsMove)
Full name Support of CS subscriber moving Access Persist Level
Abbreviation AllowCsMove
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if support switching some CS subscriber cell to

other timeslot, to leave blank for original timeslot for getting larger PS avail-
Description able timeslot group.
Managed object Cell
4-187

Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.12 Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving

(SfPreferBusyThs, %)
Full name Congeneric service threshold for PS-moving
Abbreviation SfPreferBusyThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
During this application, on the gained preferential channel on this side, it is

better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than allo-
cated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target function
Description in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 100
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.17.13 Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving

(OpPreferBusyThs)
Full name Un-congeneric service threshold for PS-moving
4-188

Abbreviation OpPreferBusyThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
During this application, on the gained preferential channel on opposite side,

it is better that existing QoS quota / total available QoS quota is lower than
allocated result for this percentage, to calculate target evaluation target func-
Description tion in combination with un-congeneric occupying threshold.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18 EDGE Property Parameters

If Support GPRS in Basic Params 1 is set to support EDGE, the EDGE property tab
appears.
The interface of EDGE property parameters is shown in Figure 4-18.
4-189

Figure 4-18 EDGE Property Parameters
4.18.1 Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame (GttpLapdmNum)

Full name Max number of GTTP Lapdm frame
Abbreviation GttpLapdmNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates the maximum of GTTP Lapdm frames.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-190

4.18.2 Support EGPRS packet channel request access program

(EgprsPacketChreq)
Full name Support EGPRS packet channel request access program
Abbreviation EgprsPacketChreq
3GPP name EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of SI13,

PSI1 and PSI13. It indicates if the cell supports EGPRS_PACKET_CHAN-
NEL_REQUEST access flow. If the cell supports EGPRS and this flow, the
EGPRS terminal is able to originate EGPRS packet access flow on RACH
Description or PRACH (if PBCCH exists).
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.3 Support uplink LA+IR quality control (IrSupportUp)

Full name Support uplink LA+IR quality control
Abbreviation IrSupportUp
3GPP name RESEGMENT
It indicates if the cell supports "uplink IR quality control". If it does, the net-
work could set the RESEGMENT in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK, PACKET
UPLINK ASSIGNMENT and PACK TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message
as FALSE to inform MS system of using IR quality control mode, and MS
Description uplink retransmission could not be segmented.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
4-191

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.4 Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function (PreemptiveRans)

Full name Take "Preemptivetrans bit" function
Abbreviation PreemptivetRans
3GPP name PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION
It indicates if the cell uses "Preemptivetrans bit". If the cell supports

that function, network indicates MS if to send the RLC data of
PENDING-ACK when there is no data in NACK status and no new
RLC data block to be transmitted or the transmission window is full by
PRE_EMPTIVE_TRANSMISSION in PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK
message.
l Yes: Use preemptive transmission. MS should not send the data block
in PENDING-ACK status. But for the last piece of current TBF, even if
its status is PENDING -ACK, it should be transmitted.
l No: Do not use preemptive transmission. MS should send the oldest
data in PENDING-ACK status, then the second oldest data. If all data
Description in PENDING-ACK status have been sent, repeat from the oldest one.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4-192

4.18.5 Average filter period for uplink BEP (BEPperiodUp)

Full name Average filter period for uplink BEP
Abbreviation BEPperiodUp
3GPP name BEP_PERIOD
This parameter is internal parameter of PCU. The meaning of this parameter

is the same as BEPPeriodDown, but it is to caculate the uplink measurement
Description data inside of PCU.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.6 Average filter period for downlink BEP (BEPperiodDown)

Full name Average filter period for downlink BEP
Abbreviation BEPperiodDown
3GPP name BEP_PERIOD
Network broadcasts this parameter to MS in GRPS CELL OPTIONS of

SI13, PSI1 and PSI13. In EGPRS system, EGPRS MS will determine to
report the MEAN_REP_AV (average error bit rate of the radio block) and
CV_BEP_AV (variance coefficient of radio block error bit rate) under the
whole TBF, or the measurement data per time slot MEAN_BEP_TNx (0-7).
The specification defines the formula of these measurement data (refer to
05.08 10.2.3.2.1). There is an oblivion factor e, whose value is defined by
Description average period of BEP filter.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Unit None
Default value 4
4-193

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.7 EGPRS phone quality measure mode (LinkQuameaMode)

Full name EGPRS phone quality measure mode
Abbreviation LinkQuameaMode
3GPP name LINK_QUALITY_MEASUREMENT_MODE
This parameter is sent to MS in Downlink Assignment message. It indicates

the measurement report mode of EGPRS MS in the cell. EGPRS measure-
ment could be performed based on each impulse, which is to measure by the
granularity of BURST. The feature of rapid EGPRS measurement makes the
network side be able to respond the change of radio environment quickly, so
Description as to choose the most proper coding mode and perform power control.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
4.18.8 EGPRS Phone Init Coding

Full name EGPRS Phone Init Coding
Abbreviation EGPRSInitAttSelt_0~EGPRSInitAttSelt_3
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
4-194

This is a four-dimensional array, indicating GPRS uplink INIT coding scheme,

GPRS downlink INIT coding scheme, GPRS uplink MAX coding scheme,
GPRS downlink MAX coding scheme, and the default coding scheme for
Description EGPRS phones.
Managed object Cell
Value range MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9
Unit None
Default value [MCS6, MCS6, MCS9, MCS9]
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-05-001 Modulation and Coding Scheme 1~9
Relationship None
4.18.9 EGPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_1)

Full name EGPRS phones init code can be changed
Abbreviation InitAttachExch_1
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if the coding method of GPRS/EGPRS MS in cell could be

Description changed dynamically.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes, No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-05-001 Modulation and Coding Scheme 1~9
Relationship None
4-195

4-196

Chapter 5
Cell Object Parameters
This chapter describes cell object parameters.
Table of Contents
TRX Parameters ........................................................................................................5-1
Power Control Parameters .......................................................................................5-22
Handover Control Parameters ..................................................................................5-48
UTRAN Handover Control Parameters ................................................................... 5-111
UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ............................................................................5-124
Adjacent Cell Parameters.......................................................................................5-168
Frequency Hopping System Parameters ................................................................5-219
5.1 TRX Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell and choose Create
> TRX from the shortcut menu. The Create TRXl interface is displayed.
TRX parameters are divided into two sub-interfaces. If the site is an IP access point, the
TRX information interface will add IP Parameters tab.
In the configuration tree, double-click OMC > GERAN Subnetwork > BSC Managed
Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Site Rack. Right-click
the slot of the TRX to be created and choose Create Panel. The Create Panel dialog box
is displayed.
5.1.1 TRX Info Parameters

Figure 5-1 shows the TRX information interface.
5-1

Figure 5-1 TRX Info Parameters
5.1.1.1 TRX ID (TrxId)

Full name TRX ID
Abbreviation TrxId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
TRX number in the cell. According to GSM specifications, one cell can have
Description 64 carriers at most.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1 ~ 60
Unit None
Default value Sort in order.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-2

Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters
5.1.1.2 TRX Type (TrxType)

Full name TRX Type
Abbreviation TrxType
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Common TRX is suitable for common cell. After adding the function of
supporting extended cell, a third type of TRX is added -- Expand TRX,
realizing large coverage range.
l In common cell, TRX Type shall be configured as Normal TRX;
l TRX Type shall be set to Extended TRX if sub-cell is not supported in
extended cell. Sub-cell 1 shall be set to extended TRX in extended cell
if the sub-cell is supported. There is no special requirements on sub-cell
Description 2.
Managed object TRX
Value range Common TRX, Expand TRX
Unit None
Default value Common TRX
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Timeslot number
Relationship This parameter value has influence on the Value range of TSC.
5.1.1.3 Priority (TrxPriority)

Full name Assign Priority of the Trx
Abbreviation TrxPriority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes priorities for allocating carriers of the same type. 1
represents the highest priority. Select channels on carriers with high priority
Description when allocating channels.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1~5
Unit None
5-3

l When "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is No, default value is 3;

Default value l When "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is Yes, default value is 1;
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-03-02-002 Enhancement on Channel Allocation
Related parameters BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)
The value of BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark) has influence on the

Relationship
default value of this parameter.
5.1.1.4 BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)

Full name BCCH carrier frequency
Abbreviation BcchMark
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description One and only one BCCH carrier frequency must be configured in a cell.
Managed object TRX
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Priority (TrxPriority)
Related parameters Support FHS
This parameter impacts the default value of Priority (TrxPriority) and the
Relationship
Value range of Support FHS.
5.1.1.5 Static power level (PwRreduction)

Full name Static power level
Abbreviation PwRreduction
3GPP name static RF power step
5-4

This parameter represents the static power level of transceiver. Usually a

static power control is added on the basis of TRX transmission power spec-
ified by Static power level. Namely, a restriction is added based on the
maximum transmission power, thus to get the actual maximum transmission
power Pn of the TRX. The dynamic power control is implemented based on
Description the maximum transmission power Pn.
Managed object TRX
Max output power, Max output power - 2 dB, Max output power - 4 dB, Max
output power - 6 dB, Max output power - 8 dB, Max output power - 10 dB,
Max output power - 12 dB, Max output power + 1.5 dB, Max output power +
Value range 1 dB, Max output power + 0.5 dB
Unit None
Default value Max output power
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-04-02-002 Static BTS Power Control
Relationship None
5.1.1.6 Power level (PowerClass)

Full name Power level
Abbreviation PowerClass
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter can configure power level of carrier, which can convert this
value to actual power value, used to calculate path loss and CI value in mea-
Description surement report.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1~8
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-5

5.1.1.7 Support FHS

Full name Support FHS
Abbreviation None
3GPP name hopping
This parameter indicates if frequency-hopping is supported. When this

parameter is set to "base band freq-hopping", BhGroupId is added in the
interface. When this parameter is set to "RFID freq-hopping", frequency is
screened and FhsID is added.
Description Note: S8001 only has a frequency, and doesn't support frequency-hopping.
Managed object TRX
l If "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is No, the Value range is No, base band
freq-hopping, and RFID freq-hopping.
l If "BCCH Carrier (BcchMark)" is Yes, the Value range is No and base
Value range band freq-hopping.
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
ZGRO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping

Related features ZGRO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Related parameters BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark)
The value of BCCH carrier frequency (BcchMark) has influence on the

Relationship
Value range of this parameter.
5.1.1.8 BhGroupId
Full name BhGroupId
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-6

Select the BhGroupId if the frequency hopping mode is baseband

frequency hopping. After multiple TRXs configures the same frequency
Description group id, the frequencies for these TRXs will be added into the frequency
hopping system identified by BhGroupId. In the process of hopping, it
uses the same MA frequency list.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Related parameters BhGroupId in frequency hopping system
Select the BhGroupId if the frequency hopping mode is baseband

Relationship
frequency hopping.
5.1.1.9 FhsID
Full name FhsID
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Select the FhsID if the configured frequency hopping mode is RF hopping.

Description This trx uses the MA frequency list configured in frequency hopping
system.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-03-001 Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Related parameters FhsID in frequency hopping system
Relationship Select the FhsID if the configured frequency hopping mode is RF hopping.
5-7

5.1.1.10 Frequency
Full name Frequency
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Select the frequency point of this transceiver.
Managed object TRX
l Frequency band is GSM900: 1~124;

l Frequency band is EXT900: 0~124, 975~1023
l Frequency band is DCS1800: 512~885;
l Frequency band is PCS1800: 512~810;
Value range l Frequency band is GSM850: 128~251;
Unit None
Default value Based on the set frequency
Change mode Offline

ARFCN list (CaArfcnList)

Related parameters Frequency band (FreqBand)
Based on the setting of subsequent TRX frequency, the system

automatically fills it into this box.
Relationship
The value of frequency band has influence on the Value range of this
parameter.
5.1.2 Channel Info Parameters

Channel information interface is shown in Figure 5-2.
5-8

Figure 5-2 Channel Info Parameters
5.1.2.1 TSC
Full name TSC
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Number to identify timeslot.
Managed object TRX
l When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Normal TRX", eight timeslot numbers

are displayed on the interface, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7;
l When "TRX Type (TrxType)" is "Extended TRX", four timeslot numbers
Value range are displayed on the interface, such as 0, 2, 4, and 6;
Unit None
Default value Same as Value range
Change mode Offline
Related parameters TRX Type (TrxType)
Relationship The value of TRX Type has influence on the Value range of this parameter.
5-9

5.1.2.2 TS Channel Combination

Full name TS Channel Combination
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines combined types of timeslot channel. Correlation

with the following several parameters is as follows:
l CBC supported (SmsCbUsed).
If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is No, that is, CBC is not supported,
the system automatically final all timeslot channel combinations in the
cell. If CBC channel exists, it is changed to SDCCH.
If "CBC Supported (SmsCbUsed)" is Yes, that is, CBC is supported,
the system automatically find all timeslot channel combinations in the
cell. If a non-BCCH channel is found for a carrier, it is changed to
SDCCH+CBCH.
l GPRS service supported (PsSupport)
If "GPRS Supported (PsSupport)" is No, that is, GPRS is not supported,
the system automatically change all timeslot channels whose type
is PS in the cell to TCH.
l Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical
channel used by CCCH, along with SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two
combined channels: BCCH+SDCCH/4 and BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH.
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "a basic physical
channel used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 channel combination shall be one of these two
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "two basic physical
channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0 and 2 channel combination shall be these two
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "three basic
physical channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel
information parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination
shall be these two combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH
and BCCH+CCCH.
When CCCH Channel (CcchConf) is configured as "four basic physical
channels used by CCCH, regarless of SDCCH". In channel information
parameters, timeslot 0, 2, and 4 channel combination shall be these two
Description combined channels: FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH and BCCH+CCCH.
Managed object TRX
5-10

l TCH/F;
l TCH/H (0, 1)+FACCH/H (0, 1)+SACCH/TH(0, 1);
l SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8;
l FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH;
l BCCH+SDCCH/4;
l BCCH+CCCH;
l BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH;
l SDCCH+CBCH;
Value range l PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH;
Unit None
Default value TCH/F
Change mode Offline
ZGRB-03-02-005 GPRS-only (without voice) Timeslots Configurable

Related features ZGRB-03-02-006 Voice-only Timeslots Configurable
Relationship None
5.1.2.3 TSC
Full name TSC
Abbreviation TSC
3GPP name TSC
This parameter represents Training Serial Code (TSC) of the timeslot. There
are eight types of TSC, with low mutual dependency. It is used for reference
of delay compensation for adaptive balance circuit at receiving side. For the
Description timeslot where BCCH is, this parameter must be equal to BCC of the cell.
Managed object TRX
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-11

Relationship None
5.1.2.4 MAIO
Full name MAIO
Abbreviation MAIO
3GPP name Mobile Allocation Index Offset
During communication, the carrier number adopted on air interface is an

element of the MA set. Mobile Allocation Index (MAI) (0 =< MAI =< n-1) is a
variable for determining a definite element in the MA set.
According to the FH algorithm in GSM 05.02 specification, MAI is function
of the following aspects: TDMA Frame Number (FN) or Reduced TDMA
Frame Number (RFN), frequency Hopping Serial Number (HSN), and
Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). MAIO is an initial offset of MAI and
is used for preventing several channels to contend for the same carrier
at the same moment.
Generally, several basic FH units (timeslot or TDMA frame) constitute an
FH group. They have the same MA and HSN and the only difference
among them is MAIO. Thus the same MA and HSN are put in FHS/MA
table. When the FH group corresponding to the timeslot has no frequency
Description hopping, MAIO of the timeslot is invalid.
Managed object TRX
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

Related featuress ZGRO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Relationship None
5-12

5.1.2.5 Dynamic TS
Full name Dynamic TS
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
YES: Representing dynamic timeslot; NO: Representing fixedly configured

Description timeslot.
Managed object TS1 number
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.2.6 Ps Service Preference Property

Full name Ps Service Preference property
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Indicate if to do channel packet service preference or the type to do service

Description preference
Managed object TRX
Value range No preference, GPRS preference, EDGE preference, EDGE specialty
Unit None
Default value No preference
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-13

5.1.2.7 PDCH Precedence

Full name PDCH Precedence
Abbreviation PDCHPrecedence
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This timeslot is used as PDTCH as a preference. It only set for dynamic

Managed object TRX
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.2.8 TSC
Full name TSC
Abbreviation TSC
3GPP name training sequence Code
It is training serial code (TSC). TSC value in BCCH channel shall be same
Description as BCC value.
Managed object TRX
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-14

5.1.2.9 PDCH
Full name PDCH
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It is same as the property of "PDCH Precedence" parameter. It is only short-

Description cut method, uniformly configuring 8 timeslots for carrier.
Managed object TRX
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.2.10 Ps Service Preference

Full name Ps Service Preference
Abbreviation PDCHPrecedence
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if the channel prefers to be PS channel. It is only valid for dynamic

Managed object TRX
No preference, GPRS preference, EDGE preference, EDGE dedicated, EG-

Value range PRRS2-A preference, and EGPRRS2-A dedicated.
Unit None
Default value No preference
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-15

5.1.2.11 Dynamic ts
Full name Dynamic ts
Abbreviation Changeable
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if TCH can be dynamically allocated to CS or PS.
Managed object TRX
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5.1.3 IP Parameters
Figure 5-3 shows the IP parameters.
5-16

Figure 5-3 IP Parameters
5.1.3.1 Port No.

Full name Port No.
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
IP access. Port number shall be allocated for each carrier, and the number
Description will be determined by the port actually configured.
Managed object TRX
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-17

5.1.3.2 TRX Group No.

Full name TRX Group No.
Abbreviation TrxGroupNo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter refers to the number of TRX group. For IP sites, this parameter
is mandatory. For 100 Mbps platform, the number of TRXs in each TRX group
Description is smaller than or equal to 16. For GE platform, the number is smaller than or
equal to 28.
Managed object TRX
Value range 1 ~ 330
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.4 Panel Parameters

Carrier panel parameters are shown in Figure 5-4.
5-18

Figure 5-4 Panel Parameters
5.1.4.1 TRX Mode

Full name TRX Mode
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes working modes of carrier, including single or double carriers,

Description which determines 4 lines of multiplexer is used or DPCT/DDT is used.
Managed object BTS rack
l Under dual carrier mode, no four diversity, no DPCT or DDT setting;

l Under single carrier mode, only four diversity is configured;
l Under single carrier mode, four diversity + DPCT;
l Under single carrier mode, four diversity + DDT. At this time, Delay count
is valid.
Value range l Under single carrier mode, no four diversity, no DPCT or DDT setting;
Unit None
5-19

Under double carrier mode, no 4 lines of multiplexer, no DPCT or DDT con-

Default value figured;
Change mode Offline
Support antenna hop

Related parameters Delay count
Support antenna hop is valid only if this parameter is set to dual carrier.
Relationship Delay count is valid only if this parameter is set to four diversity + DDT
under single carrier mode.
5.1.4.2 Delay Count

Full name Delay count
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It defines the symbol used on delayed transmitting.
Value range 1 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Working Modes
Delay count is valid only if TRX mode is set to single carrier, four diversity
Relationship
+ DDT.
5.1.4.3 Use IRC

Full name Use IRC
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-20

It determines if to use IRC.

l Not checked: do not use IRC
Description l Checked: use IRC
Value range Not checked, checked
Unit None
Default value Not checked
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.1.4.4 Support antenna hop

Full name Support antenna hop
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates if antenna hop is supported.

l No: indicates antenna hop is not supported;
Description l Yes: indicates antenna hop is supported;
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Working Modes
Relationship This parameter is valid only if TRX mode is set to Dual carrier.
5-21

5.2 Power Control Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell > Power Control.
The Power Control interface is displayed.
There are four tabs for basic power control. If the cell supports GPRS, the GPRS Power
Control tab is added.
5.2.1 Power Control Parameters

The interface of power control parameters is shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Power Control Parameters
5.2.1.1 Uplink rapid power control indication (UlRapidPcInd)

Full name Uplink rapid power control indication
5-22

Abbreviation UIRapidPcInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control

process. Rapid power control process is an option of BSC. Rapid power
control can decrease interference of the whole system and meet the need
of dynamic power control of rapidly moving MS.
The amplitude of power control used by rapid power control process each
time is no longer a fixed value, but an integer multiple of cell parameter
power control step (increase and decrease). This parameter determines
Description the availability of the rapid power control process.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-02-002 Dynamic MS Power Control
Relationship None
5.2.1.2 Downlink rapid power control indication (DlRapidPcInd)

Full name Downlink rapid power control indication
Abbreviation DIRapidPcInd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines the availability of the rapid power control

process. Rapid power control process is an option of BSC. Rapid power
control can decrease interference of the whole system and meet the need
of dynamic power control of rapidly moving MS.
The amplitude of power control used by rapid power control process each
time is no longer a fixed value, but an integer multiple of cell parameter
power control step (increase and decrease). This parameter determines
Description the availability of the rapid power control process.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-23

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-04-02-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control
Relationship None
5.2.1.3 Power control PwrDecrLimit

Full name Power control PwrDecrLimit
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is set for preventing MS from call drop due to fast power
control. It corresponds to different quality level. For example, PwrDecrLimit
[0] determines the maximum power decrease limit for calls with receiving
quality level 0 (Bit Error rate (BER) <0.2%). This parameter is valid for
both uplink and downlink.
This parameter is an array of eight elements, with element length of one
byte. PwrDecrLimit [n] determines the maximum power decrease limit
available for calls with quality level n. The Value range of each element is 0
Description ~ 38, standing for 0 ~ 38dB
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 38
Unit None
Default value [24, 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, 12, 10]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2 Power Survey Parameters

The interface of power survey parameters is shown in Figure 5-6.
5-24

Figure 5-6 Power Survey Parameters
5.2.2.1 Report period of measurement for power control (PwrCtrlReportPrd, SACCH

double frame)
Full name Report period of measurement for power control
Abbreviation PwrCtrlReportPrd
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Power control is performed at BTS side and BSC implements relevant perfor-
mance statistics. BTS uses this parameter to decide the periodicity to send
the preprocessed power measurement to BSC as an input for power control
Description analysis. This parameter is in the unit of SACCH multi-frame.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 254
Default value 240
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-25

5.2.2.2 Uplink power level Sample count (PcUlLevWindow)

Full name Uplink power level sample count
Abbreviation PcUlLevWindow
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In GSM system, BSC determines if to perform power control according to

measurement data. BSC uses the average value of measurement data to
avoid adverse influences caused by abrupt changes in measurement data
due to complex radio transmission.
BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value
of uplink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number
Description of used samples.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.3 Uplink level Weight (PcUlLevWeight)

Full name Uplink level Weight
Abbreviation PcUlLevWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Speech data is unavailable for silent period during conversation. GSM

specifications recommend Discontinuous Transmission Mode (DTX) to
control optimal usage of network resources during such silent periods.
In the DTX mode, the measurement data reported to BSC fall into two
types. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a
measurement period in the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average
of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to optionally select one type of
Description measurement data and use the data to calculate the average value.
5-26

The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement

results of all timeslots, and it is accurate. But the second type of
measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some
timeslots, and it is less accurate. Therefore, BSC, when averaging
the measurement values, uses different weights for the two types of
measurement data.
This parameter determines the weight for the first type of measurement
data when averaging uplink signal strength for power control. Weight for
the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.4 Downlink power level Sample count (PcDlLevWindow)

Full name Downlink power level Sample count
Abbreviation PcDlLevWindow
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average
value of downlink signal strength, i.e. to calculate the average value of the
Description number of used samples.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
5-27

Relationship None
5.2.2.5 Downlink level Weight (PcDlLevWeight)

Full name Downlink level Weight
Abbreviation PcDlLevWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description: According to GSM Specifications, discontinuous transmission

(DTX) refers to the process in which the system does not transmit signals in
the voice intermittent period during the subscriber communication process.
measurement data and use the data to calculate the average value.
measurement data.
data when averaging downlink signal strength for power control. Weight for
Description the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-28

5.2.2.6 Uplink quality level Sample count (PcUlQualWindow)

Full name Uplink quality level Sample count
Abbreviation PcUlQualWindow
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average value
of uplink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the number
Description of used samples.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.7 Uplink quality Weight (PcUlQualWeight)

Full name Uplink quality Weight
Abbreviation PcUlQualWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

5-29


measurement data.
data when averaging uplink signal quality for power control. Weight for the
second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.2.8 Downlink quality level sample count (PcDlQualWindow)

Full name Downlink quality level sample count
Abbreviation PcDlQualWindow
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

BTS uses this parameter to calculate the window size for the average
value of downlink signal quality, i.e. to calculate the average value of the
Description number of used samples.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
5-30

Relationship None
5.2.2.9 Downlink quality Weight (PcDlQualWeight)

Full name Downlink quality Weight
Abbreviation PcDlQualWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

measurement data.
data when averaging downlink signal quality for power control. Weight for
Description the second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-31

5.2.3 Power Adjust Threshold Parameters

The interface of power adjust threshold parameters is shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 Power Adjust Threshold Parameters
5.2.3.1 Increase uplink level Threshold (PcULInclLevThsThs), Value P

(PcULInclLevThsP), and Value N (PcULInclLevThsN)
Full name Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULInclLevThsThs/PcULInclLevThsP/PcULInclLevThsN
3GPP name None
According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon re-

ceived average value series of uplink signal strength. The decision process
is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal strength, if P of
the N values fall below relevant threshold value, increase MS (uplink) trans-
Description mission power to improve the uplink signal strength.
Managed object Cell
Increase uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range Threshold: 0 ~ 63; Value P: 1 ~31; Value_N: 1 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value [22, 3, 4]
Change mode Offline
5-32

Relationship None
5.2.3.2 Increase downlink level Threshold (PcDLInclLevThsThs), Value P

(PcDLInclLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclLevThsN)
Full name Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLInclLevThsThs/PcDLInclLevThsP/PcDLInclLevThsN
3GPP name None
According to GSM specifications, power control decisions depend upon

received average value series of uplink signal strength.
The decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of
downlink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Description signal quality.
Managed object Cell
Increase downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.3 Decrease uplink level Threshold (PcULRedLevThsThs), Value P

(PcULRedLevThsP), and Value N (PcULRedLevThsN)
Full name Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULRedLevThsThs/PcULRedLevThsP/PcULRedLevThsN
3GPP name None
5-33


uplink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal
Description strength.
Managed object Cell
Decrease uplink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.4 Decrease downlink level Threshold (PcDLRedLevThsThs), Value P

(PcDLRedLevThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedLevThsN)
Full name Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLRedLevThsThs/PcDLRedLevThsP/PcDLRedLevThsN
3GPP name None

downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Description signal strength.
Managed object Cell
Decrease downlink level can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
5-34

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.5 Increase uplink quality Threshold (PcULInclQualThsThs), Value P

(PcULInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcULInclQualThsN)
Full name Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULInclQualThsThs/PcULInclQualThsP/PcULInclQualThsN
3GPP name None

uplink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, increase MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal
Description quality.
Managed object Cell
Increase uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.6 Increase downlink quality Threshold (PcDLInclQualThsThs), Value P

(PcDLInclQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLInclQualThsN)
Full name Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
5-35

Abbreviation PcDLInclQualThsThs/PcDLInclQualThsP/PcDLInclQualThsN
3GPP name None

downlink signal quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, increase BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Managed object Cell
Increase downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.7 Decrease uplink quality Threshold (PcULRedQualThsThs), Value P

(PcULRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcULRedQualThsN)
Full name Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcULRedQualThsThs/PcULRedQualThsP/PcULRedQualThsN
3GPP name None

uplink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value,
Description reduce MS (uplink) transmission power to improve the uplink signal quality.
Managed object Cell
Decrease uplink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
5-36

Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.3.8 Decrease downlink quality Threshold (PcDLRedQualThsThs), Value P

(PcDLRedQualThsP), and Value N (PcDLRedQualThsN)
Full name Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
Abbreviation PcDLRedQualThsThs/PcDLRedQualThsP/PcDLRedQualThsN
3GPP name None

downlink signal quality, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, reduce BTS (downlink) transmission power to improve the downlink
Managed object Cell
Decrease downlink quality can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-37

5.2.4 Other Parameters

The interface of the other parameters is shown in Figure 5-8.
5.2.4.1 Power increasing step (PwrIncStep)

Full name Power increasing step
Abbreviation PwrIncStep_0 ~ PwrIncStep_3
3GPP name Pow_Incr_Step
It describes increase step, the value of each power control variation. It ap-
Description plies to both uplink and downlink directions.
Managed object Cell
Power increase step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range Value range is 2, 4, and 6.
Unit dB
It can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR, and AMR HR. Default
Default value value is 2.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-38

5.2.4.2 Power decreasing step (PwrRedStep, dB)

Full name Power decreasing step
Abbreviation PwrRedStep_0 ~ PwrRedStep_3
3GPP name Pow_Red_Step
It describes decrease step, the value of each power control variation. It ap-
Description plies to both uplink and downlink directions.
Managed object Cell
Power decrease step can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range Value range is 2 and 4.
Unit dB
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.4.3 Uplink power control allowed (PwrControlUl)

Full name Uplink power control allowed
Abbreviation PwrControlUl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines to enable or disable MS uplink power control in

Description the cell. This power control is only effective to TCH/F.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
5-39

Relationship None
5.2.4.4 Downlink power control allowed (PwrControlDl)

Full name Downlink power control allowed
Abbreviation PwrControlDl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to enable or disable BTS downlink power con-

Description trol in the cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related parameters PwrDynShare
Relationship If it is SDR BTS and this parameter is set to Yes, you can set PwrDynShare.
5.2.4.5 MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name MAX power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax_0 ~ MsTxPwrMax_3
3GPP name MS_TXPWR_MAX
5-40


has 2 header bytes, one is the power control byte and the other is the
power that can be output. During BSC power control, this parameter
determines the maximum transmission power available for MS in the cell.
BSC also uses it to calculate PBGT value.
Description The values are shown in appendix.
Managed object Cell
MAX power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range Value range is 0 ~ 31.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.4.6 MIN power level of MS (MsTxPwrMin)

Full name MIN power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMin_0 ~ MsTxPwrMin_3
3GPP name None
5-41


power that can be output. When BSC is performing power control, this
parameter is the minimal transmission power (that is, lower limit of power
control) that can be used by MS in the cell.
Managed object Cell
MIN power level of MS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.4.7 MIN power level of BS (BsTxPwrMin)

Full name MIN power level of BS
Abbreviation BsTxPwrMin_0 ~ BsTxPwrMin_3
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter controls the transmission power during communication be-

tween MS and BTS. SACCH carries the command with 2 header bytes in-
formation (power control byte and timing advance byte) from BSC to BTS.
During BSC control, this parameter determines the minimum transmission
Description power (that is, lower limit of power control) available for BTS in the cell.
Managed object Cell
5-42

MIN power level of BS can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR FR,
and AMR HR.
Value range is 0 ~ 15.
The maximum power level of BTS is Pn.
l 0: Pn;
l 1: Pn-2 dB;
...
Value range l 15: Pn-30 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.4.8 MIN interval of power control (SACCH double frame) (PcMinInterval)

Full name MIN interval of power control (SACCH double frame)
Abbreviation PcMinInterval_0 ~ PcMinInterval_3
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the minimum interval of power control. Usually, MS

still sends two measurement reports with the original power to BSC after en-
abling the power control. Signal level information contained in the reports is
inaccurate and can be ignored (information such as adjacent cell information
is still valid). Thus a minimum interval of power control is needed and signal
Description level information during the interval can be ignored.
Managed object Cell
MIN interval of power control can be divided into four kinds: FR, HR, AMR
FR, and AMR HR.
Change mode Offline
5-43

ZGRO-04-02-001 Dynamic BTS Power Control

Relationship None
5.2.5 GPRS Power Control Parameters

The interface of GPRS power control parameters is shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 GPRS Power Control Parameters
5.2.5.1 Expected signal intensity of MS (SS_BTS)

Full name Expected signal intensity of MS
Abbreviation SS_BTS
3GPP name SSb
This parameter is used for the uplink open loop power control. MS uses
GCH parameter for calculating uplink transmission power, based on the
following formula:
GCH = G0 -PBTS -SSb -48
Description This parameter decides the SSb parameter.
5-44

Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: -110 dBm;
l 1: -109 dBm;
...
Value range l 63: -47 dBm
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.2 Uplink power control strategy (UlPwCtrl)

Full name Uplink power control strategy
Abbreviation UlPwCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines GPRS uplink power control strategy, including

the following four modes: uncontrolled, open-loop control, close-loop control,
Description based on quality control.
Managed object Cell
Value range No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality
Unit None
Default value Non-control
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.3 Downlink power control strategy (DiPwCtrl)

Full name Downlink power control strategy
5-45

Abbreviation DlPwCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines GPRS downlink power control strategy, including

the following four modes: uncontrolled, open-loop control, close-loop control,
Description based on quality control.
Managed object Cell
Value range No control, Open-loop control, Close-loop control, Control based on quality
Unit None
Default value Non-control
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.4 Downlink power control mode (PwCtrlMode)

Full name Downlink power control mode
Abbreviation PwCtrlMode
3GPP name BTS_PWR_CTRL_MODE
This parameter determines the BTS downlink power control mode. BTS has
two power control modes: A and B. Mode A may be used for any allocation
Description mode, while mode B can only be used for the fixed allocation mode.
Managed object Cell
Value range A, B
Unit None
Default value A
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-46

5.2.5.5 Power control level (PwCtrlLev)

Full name Power control level
Abbreviation PwCtrlLev
3GPP name Power control level
This parameter determines GPRS power control precision, which describes

nominal output power and power control precision (dB) sent by MS under
Description each power control level.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.2.5.6 Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode (P0)

Full name Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in A mode
Abbreviation P0
3GPP name P0
This parameter is an optional downlink power control parameter contained

in assignment message. If P0 exists, power control is used. Otherwise, it is
not used. The value of Power descending of PDCH to BCCH in a mode can
not be modified in packet transmission mode unless re-assignment or new
assignment is established and such an assignment does not contain PDCH
Description of any previous assignment.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 15
l 0: P0=0 dB;
l 1: P0=2 dB;
...
Value range l 15: P0=30 dB
Unit None
5-47

Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3 Handover Control Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell > Handover Control.
The Handover Control interface is displayed.
There are seven tabs for handover control.
5.3.1 Handover Pretreatment Parameters

The interface of handover protreatment parameters is shown in Figure 5-10.
5-48

Figure 5-10 Handover Pretreatment Parameters
5.3.1.1 Number of zero allowed in AV (ZeroAllowed)

Full name Number of zero allowed in AV
Abbreviation ZeroAllowed
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement

data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the
measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal
strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported.
To avoid the negative impact of 0 on averaging, suppose occasional 0
is allowed and is not used in averaging, but excessive occurrences of 0
indicate that the signals of this adjacent cell are too poor.
If the number of zeroes in used for average calculation exceeds Number of
zero allowed in AV, then measurement average equals to sum of reported
values divided by Neighboring cell .
To be specific, during averaging, if the count of 0s in the sampling count
Description exceeds ZeroAllowed, these sampling values are hardly reliable, and
5-49

the measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided
by NCellWindow. If the count of 0s in the reported values does not
exceed ZeroAllowed, these sampling values are much reliable and the
measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided by
(NCellWindow the count of 0s).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.2 Uplink power level Sample count(HoUlLevWindow)

Full name Uplink power level Sample count
Abbreviation HoUlLevWindow
3GPP name N1..N8,P1..P8
In the GSM system, BSC makes handover decision according to the

measurement data. To avoid the negative impact of burst measurement
values resulting from complicated radio transmission, BSC, when making
handover decision, no longer uses the original measurement data but uses
a series of average values of the measurement data.
This parameter is the window size (number of sample values) used to
Description calculate average value of uplink signal intensity.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-50

5.3.1.3 Uplink level Weight (HoUlLevWeight)

Full name Uplink level Weight
Abbreviation HoUlLevWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

measurement data.
data when averaging uplink signal strength for handover. Weight for the
Description second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-51

5.3.1.4 Downlink power level Sample count (HoDlLevWindow)

Full name Downlink power level Sample count
Abbreviation HoDlLevWindow

This parameter represents the window size (number of sample values)
Description used to calculate average value of downlink signal intensity.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.5 Downlink level Weight (HoDlLevWeight)

Full name Downlink level Weight
Abbreviation HoDlLevWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

5-52


measurement data.
data when averaging downlink signal strength for handover. Weight for the
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.6 Uplink quality level Sample count (HoUlQualWindow)

Full name Uplink quality level Sample count
Abbreviation HoUlQualWindow

Description used to calculate average value of uplink signal quality.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
5-53

Relationship None
5.3.1.7 Uplink quality Weight (HoUlQualWeight)

Full name Uplink quality Weight
Abbreviation HoUlQualWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

measurement data.
data when averaging uplink signal quality for handover. Weight for the
Description second type of measurement data is set to 1 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-54

5.3.1.8 Downlink quality level Sample count(HoDlQualWindow)

Full name Downlink quality level Sample count
Abbreviation HoDlQualWindow

Description used to calculate average value of downlink signal quality..
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.9 Downlink quality Weight (HoDlQualWeight)

Full name Downlink quality Weight
Abbreviation HoDlQualWeight
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

5-55


measurement data.
data when averaging downlink signal quality for handover. Weight for the
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.1.10 Distance (DistanceWindow)

Full name Distance
Abbreviation DistanceWindow
3GPP name None

used to calculate average value of distance (timing advance) between
Description MS and BTS.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
5-56

Relationship None
5.3.1.11 Neighboring cell (NCellWindow)

Full name Neighboring cell
Abbreviation NCellWindow
3GPP name None

Description used to calculate average value of signal intensity for adjacent cells.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2 Handover Level Parameters

The interface of handover threshold parameters is shown in Figure 5-11.
5-57

Figure 5-11 Handover Level Parameters
5.3.2.1 Uplink receive level Threshold (HoUlLevThs), Value N (HoUlLevN), Value P

(HoUlLevP)
Full name Uplink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoUlLevThs / HoUlLevN / HoUlLevP
3GPP name None
According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength.
uplink signal strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold
value, perform handover to improve the uplink signal strength.
Parameter "HoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"HoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter HoUlLevP defines
the related P value. If this handover condition is met, an internal handover
is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of HoUlLevThs should be less than the threshold for
uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
Description power control does not work, perform handover.
Managed object Cell
5-58

Threshold: 0 ~ 63;
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Value range Value P: 1 ~20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
ZGRB-02-02-001 Basic Handover for PTP call

Related featuress ZGRB-02-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria for PTP call
Relationship None
5.3.2.2 Downlink receive level Threshold (HoDlLevThs), Value N (HoDlLevN), Value P

(HoDlLevP)
Full name Downlink receive level Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoDlLevThs / HoDlLevN / HoDlLevP
3GPP name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The decision
process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal
strength, if P of the N values fall below relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the downlink signal strength.
Parameter HoDlLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter
HoDlLevN defines the related N value, and parameter HoDlLevP defines
the related P value.
Usually the value of "HoDlLevThs" shall be less than the threshold for
downlink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
power control does not work, perform handover. This parameter can be set
to 15 by default (i.e. -96 dBm ~ -95 dBm), which is 3 dB larger than the
Description minimum access level value (RxLevAccessMin) of the cell.
Managed object Cell
5-59

Threshold: 0 ~ 63;
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.3 Uplink receive quality Threshold (HoUlQualThs), Value N (HoUlQualN), Value P

(HoUlQualP)
Full name Uplink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoUlQualThs / HoUlQualN / HoUlQualP
3GPP name None

process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink signal
quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the uplink signal quality.
Parameter HoUlQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter
HoUlQualN defines the related N value, and parameter HoUlQualP
defines the related P value.
Usually the value of "HoUlQualThs" shall be greater than the threshold
for uplink power control (increase). That is, perform power control first. If
Description power control does not work, perform handover.
Managed object Cell
5-60

Threshold: 0 ~ 7;
l 0: BER<0.2%;
l 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%;
...;
l 6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%;
l 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.4 Downlink receive quality Threshold (HoDlQualThs), Value N (HoDlQualN),

Value P (HoDlQualP)
Full name Downlink receive quality Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation HoDlQualThs / HoDlQualN / HoDlQualP
3GPP name None

process is as follows: For the latest N average values of downlink signal
quality, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value, perform
handover to improve the downlink signal quality.
Parameter HoDlQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter
HoDlQualN defines the related N value, and parameter HoDlQualP
defines the related P value.
In general, the Downlink receive quality Threshold shall be larger than
downlink power control (increase) threshold, i.e. perform power control
Description first, then perform handover if power control fails.
Managed object Cell
5-61

Threshold: 0 ~ 7;
l 0: BER<0.2%;
l 1: 0.2%<BER<0.4%;
...;
l 6: 6.4%<BER<12.8%;
l 7: 12.8%<BER
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.5 Uplink receive level of intro-ho (IntraHoUlLevN) Value N / Value P

(IntraHoUlLevP)
Full name Uplink receive level of intro-ho Value N/P
Abbreviation IntraHoUlLevN / IntraHoUlLevP
3GPP name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The
decision process is as follows: For the latest N average values of uplink
signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to strong uplink co-frequency
interference.
Parameter "IntraHoUlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"IntraHoUlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter
"IntraHoUlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is
met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of "IntraHoUlLevThs" shall be more than the threshold
Description for uplink power control (decrease).
Managed object Cell
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Value range Value P: 1 ~ 20
5-62

Unit None
Default value [3, 2]
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.6 Downlink receive level of intro-ho (IntraHoDlLevN) Value N / Value P

(IntraHoDlLevP)
Full name Downlink receive level of intro-ho Value N/P
Abbreviation IntraHoDlLevN / IntraHoDlLevP
3GPP name None

downlink signal strength, if P of the N values rise above relevant threshold
value, then perform handover. The handover is due to strong downlink
co-frequency interference.
Parameter "IntraHoDlLevThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"IntraHoDlLevN" defines the related N value, and parameter
"IntraHoDlLevP" defines the related P value. If this handover condition is
met, an internal handover is usually performed in the cell.
Usually the value of "IntraHoDlLevThs" shall be less than (or equal to) the
Description threshold for uplink power control (decrease).
Managed object Cell
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Value range Value P: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-63

5.3.2.7 Good C/I Threshold (GoodCiThs), Value N (GoodCiN), Value P (GoodCiP)

Full name Good C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation GoodCiThs / GoodCiN / GoodCiP
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also

depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX
frequency.
The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on common layer
TRX frequency and P of the latest N C/I values raise above the good C/I
threshold, then perform handover from common layer TRX frequency to
special layer TRX frequency.
Parameter "GoodCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter
"GoodCiN" defines the related N value, and parameter GoodCiP defines
Description the related P value.
Managed object Cell
Threshold: 0 ~ 255;
l 0: -127 dB;
l 1: -126 dB;
...
l 255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.8 Bad C/I Threshold (BadCiThs), Value N (BadCiN), Value P (BadCiP)

Full name Bad C/I Threshold, Value N, Value P
Abbreviation BadCiThs / BadCiN / BadCiP
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-64

If system adopts concentric technology, then handover decisions also

depend upon good Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I) of special layer TRX
frequency.
The decision process is as follows: If the paging is on special layer TRX
frequency and P of the latest N C/I values fall below the bad C/I threshold,
then perform handover from special layer TRX frequency to common layer
TRX frequency.
Parameter "BadCiThs" defines the related threshold, parameter "BadCiN"
defines the related N value, and parameter "BadCiP" defines the related
Description P value.
Managed object Cell
Threshold: 0 ~ 255;
l 0: -127 dB;
l 1: -126 dB;
...
l 255: 128 dB
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.9 Rapid handover Threshold (RapidHoThs) / Value N (RapidHoN)

Full name Rapid handover Threshold / Value N
Abbreviation RapidHoThs / RapidHoN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-65

During fast fading handover, some parameters shall be used. If the

measured signal intensity of a call is less than rapid handover threshold,
then it triggers handover of existing cell to most probable candidate cell.
RapidHoN counter defines the minimum times for which the measured
signal intensity of a call is less than the threshold.
"RapidHoThs" may be set as 15 (that is, -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default, the
same as the level threshold of ordinary handover. Parameter "RapidHoN"
shall be set to ensure that rapid handover is faster than the ordinary signal
Description level handover.
Managed object Cell
Threshold: 0 ~ 63;
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;

l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
l 63: > -48 dBm
Value range Value_N: 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.2.10 Distance handover value N (DistanceN) / Value P (DistanceP)

Full name Distance handover value N/value P
Abbreviation DistanceN / DistanceP

TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell
service range.
Parameter "DistanceN" defines the relevant N value, and parameter
Description "DistanceP" defines the relevant P value.
5-66

Managed object Cell
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.2.11 PBGT handover Value N (PBGTHoN) / Value P (PBGTHoP)

Full name PBGT handover Value N/Value P
Abbreviation PBGTHoN / PBGTHoP
3GPP name N1..N8, P1..P8
Value_N and Value_P in PBGT handover. In PBGT handover, if there are P

values of PBGT in N PBGT satisfying the handover determination condition,
Description the PBGT handover conditions are satisfied.
Managed object Cell
Value N: 1 ~ 20;
Unit None
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.3 Handover Condition Parameters

The interface of handover condition parameters is shown in Figure 5-12.
5-67

Figure 5-12 Handover Condition Parameters
5.3.3.1 Max Time Advance Threshold between MS and BTS (DistanceThs)

Full name Max Time Advance Threshold between MS and BTS
Abbreviation DistanceThs
3GPP name None

TA (distance), if P of the N values rises above relevant threshold value,
then perform handover. The handover is due to MS being out of the cell
Description service range.
Managed object Cell
Value range Common cell: 0 ~ 63; Extended cell: 0 ~ 219
Unit None
Default value 63
Change mode Offline
5-68


Related features ZGRB-02-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria for PTP call
Relationship None
5.3.3.2 MIN interval between inter-cell handover (HoMinInterval, s)

Full name MIN interval between inter-cell handover
Abbreviation HoMinInterval
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter specifies the interval value for which MS waits before the
actual inter-cell handover occurs. Such a timer is more predominant for MS
at the boundary regions between two cells, where inter-cell handovers
occur frequently. This parameter helps restrict frequent inter-cell handover
and guarantees call quality.
Inter-cell handover takes place when the timer exceeds the defined interval
value from the last inter-cell handover of MS. This parameter affects only
the inter-cell handover, but not common intra-cell or inter-cell concentric
handover. In addition, micro-cell has its own handover policy, so this
parameter is only effective for macro-cell layer and its above layer.
By default, it can be set to 5 for macro cell. But for micro cell, this parameter
Description only can be set to 0.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.3 Handover back penalty (HoBackPenalty)

Full name Handover back penalty
5-69

Abbreviation HoBackPenalty
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes the time limit for handover back to the original
cell. In other words, after handover is performed from cell A to cell B, it is
Description not allowed to perform handover from cell B back to cell A within the time
limit.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 60
Unit s
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.4 Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality (LayerPriority)

Full name Prior layer selecting parameter on signal level/quality
Abbreviation LayerPriority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter decides the priority to select and sequence the candidate
cells for handover. Received signal level and signal quality decides the
candidate cells for handover. Three options are available:
l First hand over to adjacent cells at the upper layer of the local cell, then
to those at the same layer, and finally to other adjacent cells;
l First hand over to adjacent cells at the same layer of the local cell, then
to those at the upper layer, and finally to other adjacent cells;
l All adjacent cells are treated in the same way.
This parameter determines to select one of above three methods. During
handover control process, this parameter has higher priority than normal
adjacent cells.
Value range:
l 1 (UPPER_LAYER): adjacent cell at above layer first, same layer
Description next,other adjacent cells finally;
5-70

l 2 (SAME_LAYER): adjacent cell at same layer first, above layer next,

other adjacent cells finally;
l 3 (ALL_LAYER): all adjacent cells are same.
Note: In general, micro cell adopts option 1 and macro cell adopts option 2.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~3
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.5 Handover to same layer other band neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
(PbgtHoLayer_0)
Full name Handover to same layer other band neighbor cell for PBGT permitted
Abbreviation PbgtHoLayer_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if Handover to same layer other band neighbor

Description
cell for PBGT is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-71

5.3.3.6 Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation for PBGT permitted
(PbgtHoLayer_1)
Full name Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation for PBGT permitted
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if Handover to neighbor cell with no layer relation

Description
for PBGT is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.7 Handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT (PbgtHoLayer_2)

Full name Handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if handover to upper layer neighbor cell for PBGT
Description
is allowed.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-72

5.3.3.8 Handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT (PbgtHoLayer_3)

Full name Handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter describes if handover to under layer neighbor cell for PBGT
Description
is allowed.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.9 Synchronism (HoPatternInd_0)

Full name Synchronism (HoPatternInd_0)
Abbreviation HoPatternInd_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description TA of the destination cell is same as that of the source cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-02-02-003 Handover Mode
Relationship None
5-73

5.3.3.10 Asynchronism (HoPatternInd_1)

Full name Asynchronism (HoPatternInd_1)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description TA of the destination cell is unknown.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.3.11 Pseudo-synchronization (HoPatternInd_2)

Full name Pseudo-synchronization (HoPatternInd_2)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description MS is able to calculate TA of the destination cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-74

5.3.3.12 Pre-synchronism (HoPatternInd_3)

Full name Pre-synchronism (HoPatternInd_3)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines the TA available for BSC.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4 Handover Control Parameters

The interface of handover control parameters is shown in Figure 5-13.
5-75

Figure 5-13 Handover Control Parameters
5.3.4.1 Allow SDCCH handover (HoControl_0)

Full name Allow SDCCH handover
Abbreviation HoControl_0
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if allow SDCCH handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRO-02-02-004 SDCCH/SDCCH Handover
Relationship None
5-76

5.3.4.2 Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference (HoControl_1)

Full name Allow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink

Description interference.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.3 Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to downlink interference (HoControl_2)

Full name Allow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to allow inter-cell handover attempt due to

Description downlink interference.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
5-77

Relationship None
5.3.4.4 Allow handover due to distance (HoControl_3)

Full name Allow handover due to distance
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow handover due to distance.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.5 Allow standard PBGT handover (HoControl_4)

Full name Allow standard PBGT handover
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow standard PBGT handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
5-78

Relationship None
5.3.4.6 Allow automatic handover based on traffic (HoControl_5)

Full name Allow automatic handover based on traffic
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow automatic handover based on traffic.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.7 Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference
(HoControl_8)
Full name Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink interference
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to allow intra-cell handover in super TRX chan-

Description nel due to downlink interference.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-79

Relationship None
5.3.4.8 Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference
(HoControl_9)
Full name Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink interference
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to allow intra-cell handover in super TRX chan-

Description nel due to uplink interference.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.9 Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
(HoControl_10)
Full name Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX

Description channel due to PBGT
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
5-80

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.10 Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority (HoControl_11)

Full name Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if to allow dynamic adjustment of handover pri-

Description ority.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.11 Allow rapid handover (HoControl_12)

Full name Allow rapid handover
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow rapid handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-81

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.12 Allow Macro-Micro delay handover (HoControl_13)

Full name Allow macro-micro delay handover
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow Macro-Micro delay handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.13 Allow Micro-Micro delay handover (HoControl_14)

Full name Allow Micro-Micro delay handover
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow Micro-Micro delay handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-82

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.14 Allow force transfer handover (HoControl_16)

Full name Allow force transfer handover
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if to allow forced transfer handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.15 Allow quality handover in uplink (HoControl_19)

Full name Allow quality handover in uplink
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes if uplink quality handover is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-83

Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.16 Allow level handover in uplink (HoControl_20)

Full name Allow level handover in uplink
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes if uplink level handover is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.17 Allow quality handover in downlink (HoControl_21)

Full name Allow quality handover in downlink
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes if downlink quality handover is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-84

Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.18 Allow level handover in downlink (HoControl_22)

Full name Allow level handover in downlink
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter describes if downlink level handover is permitted.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value Yes
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.4.19 Downlink rapid handover enable (HoControl_23)

Full name Downlink rapid handover enable
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter determines if downlink rapid handover is allowed.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
5-85

Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5.3.4.20 The priority of the handover from macro cell to micro cell (MacroMicroPrio)
Full name The priority of the handover from macro cell to micro cell
Abbreviation MacroMicroPrio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It describes if the macro-micro handover decision takes precedence of

Description
PBGT handover decision.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5 Other Parameters

The interface of other parameters is shown in Figure 5-14.
5-86

5.3.5.1 Penalty time for handover failure (HoFailPenalTime)

Full name Penalty time for handover failure
Abbreviation HoFailPenalTime
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the penalty time for destination cell if MS fails to
handover to the destination cell. During the penalty time, inter-cell handover
Description within BSC will not occur. This parameter determines penality duration.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-87

5.3.5.2 Difference of dynamic priority (DynPrioOffset)

Full name Difference of dynamic priority
Abbreviation DynPrioOffset
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a tolerable dynamic priority difference between the

destination cell and local cell during a handover when using direction-based
handover algorithm. During handover, if the first cells dynamic handover
priority is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS
moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the
difference between the two cells handover priorities is within the tolerable
Description difference. MS is handover to the second cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~7
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.3 PBGT difference (PbgtOffset)

Full name PBGT difference
Abbreviation PbgtOffset
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a tolerable power budget difference between desti-

nation cell and the local cell during a handover. During handover, if the first
cells PBGT is higher than that of the second cell but the second cell is in MS
moving direction, then the direction-based handover algorithm works if the
difference between the two cells PBGTs is within the tolerable difference.
MS is handover to the second cell. This parameter indicates this allowable
Description difference.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 20
5-88

Unit dB
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.4 Layer control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoLayrCtl)

Full name Layer control value for handover on traffic
Abbreviation TrafficHoLayrCtl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Layer selecting parameter on service quality handover. This parameter,

together with Frequency control value for handover on traffic, decides the
adjacent cells frequency band and layer selected during traffic handover.
When traffic handover condition is satisfied, as for the layer relation, four
choices are available for call selection and candidate cell arrangement. This
parameter decides which choice shall be selected. When implementing
traffic-based handover control in traffic process, this parameter has higher
priority than that of adjacent cells.
l 0: N, Not defined;
l 1: SAME, Adjacent cell and this cell are in the same layer (PBGT han-
dover is possible);
l 2: UPPER, Adjacent cell is upper layer of this cell (when this cell is
micro-cell);
l 3: LOWER, Adjacent cell is lower layer of this cell (when this cell is
Description macro-cell)
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~3
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-89

Relationship None
5.3.5.5 Frequency control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoFreqCtl)

Full name Frequency control value for handover on traffic
Abbreviation TrafficHoFreqCtl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the control value of layer for traffic handover, that
is. which frequency band should be handover to.
l GSM900 frequency band PA-GSM (ARFCN = 1 ~ 124)
l EXT900 frequency band E-GSM (ARFCN = 0 ~ 124, 975 ~ 1023)
l DCS1800 frequency band DCS1800 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 885)
l PCS1900 frequency band PCS1900 (ARFCN = 512 ~ 810)
l GSM850 frequency band (ARFCN = 128 ~ 251)
Description l RGSM frequency band (ARFCN = 0 ~ 124, 955 ~ 1023)
Managed object Cell
Value range GSM900, EXT900, DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.6 Threshold of traffic for handover (TrafficThs, %)

Full name Threshold of traffic for handover
Abbreviation TrafficThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
If TCH occupation rate of a cell is greater than this parameter value (num-
ber of occupied TCH channels / number of total TCH channels, not including
blocked idle channels), then it indicates the cell is too busy, and traffic han-
Description dover is triggered for the cell.
5-90

Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit %
Default value 70
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.7 The threshold for starting Downlink Rapid handover (DLRapidHoStartThs)

Full name The threshold for starting Downlink Rapid handover
Abbreviation DLRapidHoStartThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the threshold for starting rapid downlink level
handover. It is used to reduce handover times. When the downlink level of
the serving cell is smaller than or equal to the threshold, rapid handover is
started.
Description This parameter is supported from version 8.00.200a.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.8 Lag time for PBGT between different layers (PbgtHoParam_0)

Full name Lag time for PBGT between different layers
Abbreviation PbgtHoParam_0
5-91

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
To more effectively control traffic distribution in the cell at different layers,

while doing PBGT decision, add PBGT decision offset level in the cell at
different layers within certain duration, which is lag time for PBGT between
Description different layers.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 300
Unit s
Default value 50
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.9 Level offset for PBGT to up layer (PbgtHoParam_1)

Full name Level offset for PBGT to up layer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Description upper layer within certain duration.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-92

5.3.5.10 Level offset for PBGT to low layer (PbgtHoParam_2)

Full name Level offset for PBGT to low layer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Description lower layer within certain duration.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.11 The threshold for starting PBGT handover (PbgtHoStartThs)

Full name The threshold for starting PBGT handover
Abbreviation PbgtHoStartThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
You can do PBGT handover decision if the downlink level in current cell is
Description
lower than the starting level threshold of PBGT handover decision.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-93

5.3.5.12 Handover from macro to micro (MacroMicroStartThs)

Full name Handover from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroStartThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
You can do macro-micro handover decision if the downlink level in current

Description cell is no more than the starting level threshold of macro-micro handover
decision.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.5.13 Hyteresis timer when traffic handover (TrafficHyteresisTm, s)

Full name Hyteresis timer when traffic handover
Abbreviation TrafficHyteresisTm
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The interval time between two traffic handovers shall be higher than the
Description hysteresis time defined by this parameter if current cell initiates multiple
traffic handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit Second
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-94

5.3.6 Handover Arithmetic Parameters

The interface of handover algorithm parameters is shown in Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 Handover Arithmetic Parameters
5.3.6.1 Traffic handover threshold (TrafficLevThs)

Full name Traffic handover threshold
Abbreviation TrafficLevThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-95

This parameter is used for traffic handover. For the original handover con-
dition that adjacent cells level must be higher than that of this cell, modify it
so that adjacent cells level must be higher than this threshold. In this way,
traffic handover can be improved greatly. This threshold must be less than
the PBGT threshold in reverse direction. Otherwise, it may result in toggle
Description handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 24
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.2 Level offset during penalty (PenaltyLevOffset)

Full name Level offset during penalty
Abbreviation PenaltyLevOffset
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to perform an offset on the downlink level of this cell
Description in the penalty period.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-96

5.3.6.3 Uplink interference quality offset (QOffSetUl)

Full name Uplink interference quality offset
Abbreviation QOffSetUl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Check the relation between level and quality to judge if there is any
interference in service judgment channel when handover occurs in the cell.
rxqual-ul >= QoffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+SOffSetUl) or rxqual-dl
>= QOffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+SoffSetDl). Where, rxqual-xx is
uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink quality offset,
RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level, SoffSetxx is uplink/downlink level
offset.
After interference is confirmed, when service party requests channel from
database, which shall tell original occupation condition of database, then
Description the database select proper channels based on this information.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.4 Uplink interference level offset (SOffSetUl)

Full name Uplink interference level offset
Abbreviation SOffSetUl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-97

offset.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.5 Downlink interference quality offset (QOffsetDl)

Full name Downlink interference quality offset
Abbreviation QOffSetDl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
offset.
Managed object Cell
5-98

Value range 0~2
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.3.6.6 Downlink interference level offset (SOffSetDl)

Full name Downlink interference level offset
Abbreviation SOffSetDl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
offset.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-99

5.3.6.7 Invalid intra-handover time (TMaxiHo)

Full name Invalid intra-handover time
Abbreviation TMaxiHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great

interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available.
In such a case, MS shall be forbidden to perform handover within a certain
time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within the
invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to
have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and
restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time,
the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0.
If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover
parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period.
Description Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 16
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.8 MAX count of invalid intra-handover (MaxiHo)

Full name MAX count of invalid intra-handover
Abbreviation MaxiHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-100

If MS performs handover continuously in the cell, it indicates great

interference in this position and no appropriate channel is available.
In such a case, MS shall be forbidden to perform handover within a certain
time. The judgment method is as follows: If handover occurs within the
invalid intra-handover time, then the previous handover is considered to
have no influence on interference, the counter HoCount increases by 1 and
restart TMaxIHo. If handover occurs after the invalid intra-handover time,
the previous handover is considered valid and clear the counter to 0.
If the counter value reaches the value of MAX count of invalid intra-handover
parameter, then it indicates not to attempt handover within a certain period.
Description Perform penalty in intra-cell penalty mode.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.9 MAX path loss threshold on force handover (MaxLossThs)

Full name MAX path loss threshold on force handover
Abbreviation MaxLossThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Directed transfer is only for one designated cell and it is restricted by

a tolerable level difference. This level difference is lower than PBGT
handover threshold in reverse direction, thus to avoid oscillating handover.
Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. Therefore,
transfer reserved resource threshold is set. Perform forced transfer when
the destination cell resource is less than the threshold.
Select users with small path loss and small TA as transferred users. Users
are transferred when their path loss is less than this parameter and TA is
less than the MAX time advance threshold on force handover parameter.
This algorithm applies to cases such as dual-frequency networking, 900M
Description
cell and 1800M cell share the same site address.
5-101

Users decide only by path loss when MAX time advance threshold on force
handover is 63 and only by TA when MAX path loss threshold on force
handover is 150.
The N value of force handover parameter and P value of force handover
parameter are used for decision in actual situations. In other words,
handover conditions are met if P of N measurement reports satisfy
requirement.
Path loss L = BS_TXPWR - AV_RXLEV_DL
BS_TXPWR is transmission power of the carrier where occupied timeslot
locates. It depends on the carriers maximum transmission power,
static attenuation power, and power control. AV_RXLEV_DL is the
downlink-receiving level.
Therefore, forced handover shall meet the following requirements:
l Level of destination cell must be higher than local cell by maximum level
difference;
l Available resource of destination cell must be higher than transfer re-
served resource threshold;
l Path loss L must be less than MAX path loss threshold on force han-
dover and TA must be less than MAX time advance threshold on force
handover;
l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 150
Unit None
Default value 110
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.10 MAX time advance threshold on force handover (MaxTaThs)

Full name MAX time advance threshold on force handover
Abbreviation MaxTAThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-102


handover is 150.
requirement.
difference;
handover;
Description l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-103

5.3.6.11 N value of force handover (HoForceN)

Full name N value of force handover
Abbreviation HoForceN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

handover is 150.
requirement.
difference;
handover;
Description l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
5-104

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.6.12 P value of force handover (HoForceP)

Full name P value of force handover
Abbreviation HoForceP
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

handover is 150.
requirement.
difference;
Description served resource threshold;
5-105

handover;
l Destination cell is forced transfer cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7 Subcell Parameters

The interface of subcell parameters is shown in Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 Subcell Parameters
5.3.7.1 Dual band power offset (DuleBandOffset)

Full name Dual band power offset
Abbreviation DuleBandOffset
3GPP name None
5-106

3GPP reference None
It indicates the value to compensate power in the second cell in dual band
Description cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 50
Unit dB
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.2 The MAX of path loss (PathLossMax)

Full name The MAX of path loss
Abbreviation PathLossMax
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It is one of sucell handover parameters, indicating threshold parameters

Description while subcell 2 do path loss handover decision for subcell 1.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 150
Unit dB
Default value 126
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.3 The MIN of path loss (PathLossMin)

Full name The MIN of path loss
5-107

Abbreviation PathLossMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
One of the subcell handover parameters, the minimum path loss. If by-
PathLoss =< PathLossMin and TA =< SubCellTAMin, the second subcell
channel will be selected first, use RR_GETRADIOCHANNEL interface of
DBS to apply channel; if byPathLoss > PathLossMin or TA > SubCellTAMin,
only the channel of the first subcell is available, use RR_GETRADIOCHAN-
Description NEL interface of DBS to apply channel.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 150
Unit dB
Default value 120
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.4 The MAX of time advance (SubCellTAMax)

Full name The MAX of time advance
Abbreviation SubCellTAMax
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Description while subcell 2 does TA handover decision for subcell 1.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-108

Relationship None
5.3.7.5 The MIN of time advance (SubCellTAMin)

Full name The MIN of time advance
Abbreviation SubCellTAMin
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

Description while subcell 1 does TA handover decision for subcell 2.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.6 N value of subcell handover (SubCellN)

Full name N value of subcell handover
Abbreviation SubCellN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell han-

dover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell
handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover
parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform han-
Description dover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 10
Unit None
5-109

Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.7 P value of subcell handover (SubcellP)

Full name P value of subcell handover
Abbreviation SubCellP
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is one of the conditions used to decide inter-subcell han-

dover. The judgment process is as follows: For the latest N value of subcell
handover sample average values, if SubcellP (P value of subcell handover
parameter) of the SubcellN values satisfy the condition, then perform han-
Description dover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 10
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.3.7.8 Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl_17)

Full name Subcell handover algorithm
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-110

This parameter defines two handover modes of subcell handover algorithm:

Description Concentric Handover; Handover based on path loss and TA.
Managed object Cell
Value range Concentric handover, Handover based on path loss and TA
Unit None
Default value Concentric handover
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell > UTRAN Handover
Control. The UTRAN Handover Control interface is displayed.
UTRAN handover control has two tabs.
5.4.1 Basic Properties 1 Parameters

The interface of basic property 1 parameters is shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Basic Properties 1 Parameters
5-111

5.4.1.1 Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure (HoFailPenalTm3G)

Full name Punishment period of UTRAN cell when handover failure
Abbreviation HoFailPenalTm3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a protection period to prevent immediate handover

after handover failure. Its unit time is the period of measurement or pretreat-
Description ment measurement report.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.2 Slide window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero
(HoWindow3G)
Full name Slide window size for calculating Ec/No or RSCP average value to be zero
Abbreviation HoWindow3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In GSM system, BSC uses the power level measurement data to manage
and control handover decisions. BSC uses average values instead of
original values of measurement data for handover decisions. It helps
prevent negative impact on network performance caused by abrupt
changes in measurement data. Average on measurement value in UTRAN
adjacent cell also shall be required.
HoWindowUTRAN of Ec/No or RSCP average is the window size to
calculate Ec/No or RSCP average in adjacent UTRAN cell, that is, sample
Description count used through average calculation.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 31
5-112

Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.3 Number that measurement value allowed to be zero (ZeroAllowed3G)

Full name Number that measurement value allowed to be zero
Abbreviation ZeroAllowed3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, MS can report to BSS the measurement

data of at most six adjacent cells with strongest signal strength. Thus the
measurement results might not be consecutive. For cells whose signal
strength is less than -110 dBm, the measurement data are not reported.
To avoid the negative impact of 0 on averaging, suppose occasional 0
is allowed and is not used in averaging, but excessive occurrences of 0
indicate that the signals of this adjacent cell are too poor. If the number of
zeroes in used for average calculation exceeds Number of zero allowed in
AV, then measurement average equals to sum of reported values divided
by Neighboring cell .
To be specific, during averaging, if the count of 0s in the sampling count
exceeds ZeroAllowed, these sampling values are hardly reliable, and
the measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided
by NCellWindow. If the count of 0s in the reported values does not
exceed ZeroAllowed, these sampling values are much reliable and the
measurement average will be the sum of the reported values divided by
Description (NCellWindow the count of 0s).
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-113

Relationship None
5.4.1.4 UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)

Full name UTRAN handover
Abbreviation ServiceHo
3GPP name None
3GPP reference Section 48.008
This parameter indicates UTRAN handover priority control. MSC sends Ser-
vice Handover parameter to BSC through ASSIGNMENT REQUEST and
HANDOVER REQUEST messages. Service Handover parameter has three
values, including prefer to UTRAN handover, not prefer to UTRAN handover,
disallow to UTRAN handover, taking actions on handover decision on sub-
sequent BSC. ServiceHo can be configured as the default value used while
MSC doesn't deliver Service Handover parameter, or configured as BSC
forcedly using the mode set by ServiceHo, but don't use Service Handover
Description parameter delivered by MSC.
Managed object Cell
Handover to UTRAN first; Not Handover to UTRAN first; Not allow to Han-
dover to UTRAN; According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first; Ac-
cording to MSC, default not handover to UTRAN first; According to MSC,
Value range default not allowed to handover to UTRAN.
Unit None
Default value According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN first
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.5 FDD/TDD handover (FDD/TDDPrio)

Full name FDD/TDD handover
Abbreviation FDDTDDPrio
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-114

This parameter indicates the priority control of FDD/TDD handover. When

FDD adjacent cell and TDD adjacent cell exist together, to control selection
sequence of target cell, we use FDDTDDPrio parameter to show if to prefer
Description to FDD cell handover or TDD cell handover.
Managed object Cell
Handover to FDD cell should be preferred; Handover to TDD cell should be

Value range preferred.
Unit None
Default value Handover to FDD cell should be preferred.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.6 Threshold for load sharing (LoadHoRSCPThsFDD)

Full name Threshold for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoRSCPThsFDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to traffic handover. Firstly you shall configure a

traffic handover threshold and inter-system handover switch.
This parameter is used to handover decision in 3G cell after traffic is
overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD RSCP average
values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of
the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the
sum of LoadHoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used
as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
5-115

Relationship None
5.4.1.7 Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing
(LoadHoEcNoThsFDD)
Full name Ec/No threshold when handover from GSM to 3G for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoEcNoThsFDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD RSCP average values
for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest
HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum of
LoadHoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, it can be used as traffic
handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoEcNoThsFDD.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.1.8 RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing
(LoadHoRSCPThsTDD)
Full name RSCP threshold when handover from GSM to TDD for load sharing
Abbreviation LoadHoRSCPThsTDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-116


overloaded. BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_TDD RSCP average
values for a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of
the latest HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the
sum of LoadHoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, it can be used
as traffic handover from GSM to UTRAN.
Description This parameter value shall be lower than HoRSCPThsFDD.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-117

5.4.2.1 Inter system handover supported (InterSysRdCtrl)

Full name Inter system handover supported
Abbreviation InterSysHoCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if intersystem handover within BSC is allowed. This

Description parameters determines if BSC can issue handover of 3G system.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.2 Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed (InterSysHoCtrl)

Full name Directed retry to UTRAN cell allowed
Abbreviation InterSysRdCtrl
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter determines if allow directed retry to UTRAN cell. When no

service channel is allocated in this cell, you can try redirected to adjacent
cell under allowed case by corresponding function switch. If this parameter
Description is configured as Yes, it can be redirected to 3G adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-118

5.4.2.3 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsFDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Threshold
Abbreviation HoRSCPThsFDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
BSC reserves at least HoRSCP_N_FDD RSCP average values for a

UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest
HoRSCP_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoRSCPThsFDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
UTRAN takes place and the adjacent cell is taken as candidate destination
Description cell for handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.4 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value N
Abbreviation HoRSCP_N_FDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD aver-

age values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and
Description HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
5-119

Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.5 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD RSCP Value P
Abbreviation HoRSCP_P_FDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoRSCP_P_FDD out of the latest HoRSCP_N_FDD aver-

age values are larger than or equal to the sum of HoRSCP_THS_FDD and
Description HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.6 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold (HoEcNoThsFDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Threshold
Abbreviation HoEcNoThsFDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-120

BSC reserves at least HoEcNo_N_FDD RSCP average values for a

UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of the latest
HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 25
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.7 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N (HoEcNo_N_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value N
Abbreviation HoEcNo_N_FDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are

larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetU-
Description TRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-121

5.4.2.8 Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P (HoEcNo_P_FDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN FDD Ec/No Value P
Abbreviation HoEcNo_P_FDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When at least HoEcNo_P_FDD out of HoEcNo_N_FDD average values are

larger than or equal to the sum of HoEcNoThsFDD and HoEcNoOffsetU-
Description TRAN, handover from GSM to UTRAN takes place.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.9 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold (HoRSCPThsTDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Threshold
Abbreviation HoRSCPThsTDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines a threshold value for handover from GSM to UTRAN
cell. BSC at least HoRSCP_N_TDD reserves RSCP average values for
a UTRAN adjacent cell. When at least HoRSCP_P_TDD out of the latest
HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
of HoRSCPThsTDD and HoRSCPOffsetUTRAN, handover from GSM to
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 35
Change mode Offline
5-122

Relationship None
5.4.2.10 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N (HoRSCP_N_TDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value N
Abbreviation HoRSCP_N_TDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sum
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 4
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.4.2.11 Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P (HoRSCP_P_TDD)

Full name Handover from GSM to UTRAN TDD RSCP Value P
Abbreviation HoRSCP_P_TDD
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-123

HoRSCP_N_TDD average values are larger than or equal to the sume
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 20
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell > UTRAN Cell
Control. The UTRAN Cell Control interface is displayed.
The interface of UTRAN cell control parameters have four tabs.

5-124

5.5.1.1 Channel location of si2quater broadcast (SI2QuaterPos)

Full name Channel location of si2quater broadcast
Abbreviation SI2QuaterPos
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates channel location of si2quater broadcast.
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: Broadcast on normal BCCH block;
l 1: Broadcast on extended BCCH block (AGCH_BLOCK reservation
Value range value will be 1)
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-125

5.5.1.2 CS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypeCS)

Full name CS measurement type reported by UE
Abbreviation ReportTypeCS
3GPP name REPORT_TYPE
It indicates enhanced measurement report for UE or measurement report

Description message.
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: Adopts enhanced measurement report message, if at least one
BSIC is configured for each frequency in BA list; otherwise, adopt en-
hanced measurement report message, otherwise using normal mea-
surement report.
Value range l 1: Adopts normal measurement report message
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.3 Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection (Qsearch_I)

Full name Measurement threshold of UE performing UTRAN cell reselection
Abbreviation Qsearch_I
3GPP reference Qsearch_I
3GPP name 3GPP TS 45.008 V5.22.0
This parameter indicates the measurement threshold of UE performing

UTRAN cell reselection. UE starts UTRAN reselection cell measurement
when average receiving level RLA_C of this cell is lower than (parameter
Description value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value: 8 ~ 15) the threshold.
Managed object Cell
5-126

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

l 0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm;
l 7: Indicates always;
l 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm;
Value range l 15: Indicates never
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.4 Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode (Qsearch_C)

Full name Threshold when UE performs search under specialized mode
Abbreviation Qsearch_C
3GPP name Qsearch_C
This parameter defines a threshold. When average receiving level RLA_C of

the cell falls below (parameter value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (parameter value:
Description 8 ~ 15) this threshold, UE searches the UTRAN adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

l 0 ~ 6: Indicates field strength L = -98 + n*4 dBm;
l 7: Indicates always;
l 8 ~ 14: Indicates field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dBm;
Value range l 15: Indicates never
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-127

5.5.1.5 Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C

(QsearchCInit)
Full name Initial parameter instead of qsearch_c before UE receiving qsearch_C
Abbreviation QsearchCInit
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to search and measure the cell data while MS doesn't
Description recieve Qsearch_C on SACCH.
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: Indicates Qsearch_I parameter;
Value range l 1: Indicates always measuring
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.6 CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtCS)

Full name CS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report
Abbreviation SvrBandRprtCS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the number of adjacent cells with the same frequency
band as in serving cell, which are included in the measurement report or the
Description strongest cell list.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
5-128

Relationship None
5.5.1.7 Max Number In Adjacent GSM cell (IndexStartEMR)

Full name Max Number In Adjacent GSM cell
Abbreviation IndexStartEMR
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the max number of adjacent GSM cells.
Managed object Cell
Value range 32 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 32
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.8 CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDrepQntCS)

Full name CS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells
Abbreviation FDDrepQntCS
3GPP name FDD_REP_QUANT
Description It indicates if MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement.
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the
unit is dBm;
l 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scram-
Value range ble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
Unit None
5-129

Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.9 Min Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_Qmin)

Full name Min Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin
3GPP name FDD_Qmin
This parameter indicates the minimum value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell
when it reselects adjacent cell. The value of Ec/No of the UTRAN cell
should be larger than the value defined by this parameter in order to
reselect the adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0= -20 dB
l 1= -6 dB
l 2= -18 dB
l 3= -8 dB
l 4= -16 dB
l 5= -10 dB
l 6= -14 dB
Value range l 7= -12 dB
Unit None
Default value 7
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-130

5.5.1.10 CS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(FDDMulRatrrptCS)
Full name CS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation FDDMulRatrrptCS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent

cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If
UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM
adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for
Description TDD cells).
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.11 FDD reselection offset (FDD_Qoffset)

Full name FDD reselection offset
Abbreviation FDD_Qoffset
3GPP name FDD_Qoffset
This parameter is used to reselect the UTRAN adjacent cell if the following
requirements are satisfied:
l Received signal code power (RSCP) of this adjacent cell is higher than
average receiving level RLA_C of this cell.
l RSCP of the adjacent cell is higher than RLA_C of all adjacent GSM
cells by at least FDD_Qoffset (FDD reselection offset) for more than 5
seconds. FDD_Qoffset of the cell increases by 5 dB if the cell is rese-
lected 15 seconds earlier.
l Ec/No (code-noise ratio) of this adjacent cell is larger than or equal to
designated FDD_Qmin (minimum value of code-noise ratio of UTRAN
Description reselected cell).
5-131

If more than one UTRAN cell meets above conditions, then select the cell
that has the largest RSCP.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.1.12 A minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection

(FDD_RSCPmin)
Full name A minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection
Abbreviation FDD_RSCPmin
3GPP name FDD_RSCPmin
This parameters specifies the minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD
cell re-selection. When a GSM cell is reselected to an adjacent 3G cell, its
RSCP should be larger than or equal to that of the GSM cell. If the adjacent 3G
cell's measurement value is RSCP, FDD_RSCPmin indicates the reselection
Description
threshold FDD_RSCP_threshold for that 3G adjacent cell.
This paramter is broadcast to MS in SI2quater on BCCH, and broadcast to MS
in PSI3quater on PBCCH and PACCH.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 15
Unit None
Default value 6
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5-132

5.5.1.13 Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

Full name Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin_Offset
3GPP name FDD_Qmin_Offset
This parameter specifies the offset of FDD_Qmin. This parameter must

work with FDD_RSCPmin, and the working principle is the same as that of
Description
FDD_RSCPmin.
Managed object Cell
0~7
2n)dB, that is,
Value range l 0: 0 dB
......
l 7: 14dB
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5.5.1.14 Require UE to send UTRAN class-mark change message early (ECSC_3G)

Full name Require UE to send UTRAN class-mark change message early
Abbreviation ECSC_3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates if requiring UE to send UTRAN classmark change message early
Managed object Cell
5-133

Yes/No
l NO: Not allowed to send UTRAN class mark change message
Value range l YES: Require UE to send UTRAN class mark change message early
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-134

5.5.2.1 CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRateCS)

Full name CS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell
Abbreviation ReportRateCS
3GPP name REPORTING_RATE
It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "CS

Description adjacent cell report priority".
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: Normal;
Value range l 1: Low
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.2 CS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtCS)

Full name CS Multiband report indication
Abbreviation MulBndRprtCS
This parameter is to control the number of reports of different adjacent cells

Description except the serving cell.
Managed object Cell
5-135

0, 1, 2, 3
band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports the adjacent
cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still more locations
remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent cell, regardless of
their frequency bands.
l 2: MS reports the measurement result of two adjacent cells with
strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding
frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports
the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still
more locations remaining, MS reports the second strongest adjacent
cell, regardless of their frequency bands.
l 3: MS reports the measurement result of three adjacent cells with
strongest signal in the frequency bands in adjacent cell list (excluding
frequency band of serving cell). In the remaining locations, MS reports
the adjacent cells in the frequency band of local cell. If there are still
more location remaining, MS reports the fourth strongest adjacent cell,
Value range regardless of their frequency bands.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.3 CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value (ScaleOrdCS)

Full name CS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value
Abbreviation ScaleOrdCS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-136

This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field
intensity. If the field intensity of a certain GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then
when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will map n+ ScaleOrdCS to the
original value corresponding to n. It applies only in the case that enhanced
measurement report message is used.
If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be
reported by setting this parameter. UE includes the SCALE value when it
reports enhance measurement report message. SCALE_ORD = 2, UE
Description uses the value of cell that reports the best signal level.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2
l 0: 0 dB;
l 1: 10 dB;
Value range l 2: Automatic, determined by UE
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.4 TDD reselection offset (TDD_Qoffset)

Full name TDD reselection offset
Abbreviation TDD_Qoffset
3GPP name TDD_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher
Description than the least offset of RLA_P in all GSM adjacent cells.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
Unit None
Default value 8
Change mode Offline
5-137

Relationship None
5.5.2.5 CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(TDDMulRatRrptCS)
Full name CS MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation TDDMulRatRrptCS
3GPP name XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent

cells included in measurement report or strongest cell list. If UTRAN/TDD
adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If
Description FDD technology is supported, remained part is given to FDD cell).
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.6 CS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtCS)

Full name CS UE report invalid cell level allowed
Abbreviation InvldBSICRprtCS
3GPP name INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING
When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells.
This parameter indicates if the system allows UE to report field intensity of
Description such cells.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
5-138

Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.7 CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication

(SearchPrioCS3G)
Full name CS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication
Abbreviation SearchPrioCS3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in

the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most
Description 25 frames for search in 13 seconds.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.8 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetCS850)

Full name GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation RprtOffsetCS850
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-139

when reporting to GSM850M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetCS850 value is
Description firstly reported.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Value range 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB per level.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.9 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS850)

Full name GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold
Abbreviation RprtThoCS850
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM850M adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS850 (dimensionless, corresponding
to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship for
different RXLEV), it can be reported.
As to if it can be reported in certain period, it also depends on signal level,
Description RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and RprtOffsetCS850.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
l 1 ~ 6: corresponding to 6 ~ 36 dB, 6dB per level
Value range l 7: never
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-140

Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Value range 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6 dB per level.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.11 GSM 900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoCS900)
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS900 (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported.
5-141

Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-142


3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1800 (dimensionless, correspond-
ing to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping relationship
for different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to if it can be reported in cer-
tain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, MulBndRprtCS and
Description RprtOffsetCS1800.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
5-143

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cells, only when signal level

in the cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoCS1900 (dimensionless,
corresponding to RXLEV portion in measurement report, different mapping
relationship for different RXLEV), it can be reported.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.16 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetCS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
5-144

Abbreviation FDDRprtOffsetCS
3GPP name XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET
when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetCS value is
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.17 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (FDDRprtThoCS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation FDDRprtThoCS
3GPP name XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD
When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding
different RXLEV), it can be reported. As to if it can be reported in certain
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, FDDMulRatRrptCS and
Description FDDRprtOffsetCS.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
5-145

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.18 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetCS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation TDDRprtOffsetCS
when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS, and RepPrioCS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetCS value is
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.2.19 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (TDDRprtThoCS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation TDDRprtThoCS
5-146

When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoCS (dimensionless, corresponding
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioCS, TDDMulRatRrptCS and
Description TDDRprtOffsetCS.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3 GPRS Parameters 1

The interface of GPRS params 1 is shown in Figure 5-21.
5-147

Figure 5-21 GPRS Parameters 1
5.5.3.1 PS offset which is added when ue reports rxlev value (ScaleOrdPS)

Full name PS offset which is added when UE reports rxlev value
Abbreviation ScaleOrdPS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines the added offset when UE reports signal field
intensity. If the field intensity of a certain GSM adjacent cell is n dBm, then
when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), UE will map n+ ScaleOrdPS to the
original value corresponding to n. It applies only in the case that enhanced
measurement report message is used.
If the field intensity of adjacent cell exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can
be reported by setting this parameter. If the field intensity of adjacent cell
exceeds -48 dBm, the real value can be reported by setting this parameter.
SCALE_ORD = 2, UE uses the value of cell that reports the best signal
Description level.
Managed object Cell
5-148

0, 1, 2
l 0: 0 dB;
l 1: 10 dB;
Value range l 2: Automatic, determined by UE
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.2 PS measurement type reported by UE (ReportTypePS)

Full name PS measurement type reported by UE
Abbreviation ReportTypePS
3GPP name REPORT_TYPE
This parameter indicates that UE uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT

Description or PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l With PBCCH:
0: Uses PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message
1: Uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT message.
l Without PBCCH:
0: If each frequency in BA (GPRS) list is configured with at least
one BSIC, PACKET ENHANCE MEASUREMENT REPORT is used;
otherwise PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT is used.
Value range 1: Uses PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-149

5.5.3.3 PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report (SvrBandRprtPS)

Full name PS number of same frequency adjacent cells in report
Abbreviation SvrBandRprtPS
3GPP name SERVING_BAND_REPORTING
This parameter defines the number of adjacent cells with the same frequency
band as in serving cell, which are included in the PS measurement report or
Description the strongest cell list.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.4 PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell (ReportRatePS)

Full name PS measurement reporting rate of adjacent cell
Abbreviation ReportRatePS
3GPP name REPORTING_RATE
It indicates frequency of measurement reports in adjacent cell, refer to "PS

Description adjacent cell report priority".
Managed object Cell
0, 1
l 0: Normal;
Value range l 1: Low
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-150

Relationship None
5.5.3.5 Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P)

Full name Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell
Abbreviation Qsearch_P_0/Qsearch_P_1
3GPP name Qsearch_P
Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell.

Searching 3G cell when signal level is lower than threshold 0 ~ 7
(corresponding to -98, -94, ..., -74 dBm), threshold 7 indicates always
searching; or searching while above threshold 8~15 (-78, -74, ..., -54 dBm),
Description threshold 15 indicates never search.
Managed object Cell
Idle state and transmission state.

Unit None
Default value Idle state and transmission state. Default value is 15.
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.6 FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Full name FDD GPRS reselection offset
Abbreviation FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0/FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1
3GPP name FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G FDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher
Managed object Cell
5-151


l 0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G FDD;
l 1 = -28 dB;
l 2 = -24 dB;
...
Value range l 15 = 28 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.7 TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Full name TDD GPRS reselection offset
Abbreviation TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0/TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1
3GPP name TDD_GPRS_Qoffset
When cell is reselected to 3G TDD adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be higher
Managed object Cell

l 0 indicates always selecting adjacent cells of this 3G TDD;
l 1 = -28 dB;
l 2 = -24 dB;
...
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-152

5.5.3.8 PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_QminPS)

Full name PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell
Abbreviation FDD_QminPS_0/FDD_QminPS_1
3GPP name FDD_Qmin
The value of Ec/No of the 3G cell shall be larger than the value defined by
Description this parameter in order to reselect the adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell

l 0 = -20 dB;
l 1 = -6 dB;
l 2 = -18 dB;
l 3 = -8 dB;
l 4 = -16 dB;
l 5 = -10 dB;
l 6 = -14 dB;
Value range l 7 = -12 dB
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.9 Offset of FDD_QminPS (FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS)

Full name Offset of FDD_QminPS
Abbreviation FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0/FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1
3GPP name FDD_Qmin_Offset
Description Offset of FDD_QminPS
Managed object Cell
5-153


l 0 = 0 dB;
l 1 = 2 dB;
l 2 = 4 dB;
l 3 = 6 dB;
l 4 = 8 dB;
l 5 = 10 dB;
l 6 = 12 dB;
Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.10 PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS)

Full name PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell
Abbreviation FDD_RSCPminPS_0/FDD_RSCPminPS_1
3GPP name FDD_RSCPmin
When the cell is reselected to 3G adjacent cell, its RSCP shall be no less
Description than this value.
Managed object Cell

l 0 = -114 dBm;
l 1 = -112 dBm;
l 2 = -110 dBm;
l 3 = -108 dBm;
...
l 14 = -86 dBm;
Value range l 15 = -84 dBm
Unit None
5-154

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.11 Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (FDDRprtTho2PS)

Full name Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP
Abbreviation FDDRprtTho2PS_0/FDDRprtTho2PS_1
3GPP name FDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD_2
It is the measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (while not specified

Description in byFDDRepQuant)
Managed object Cell

Unit None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.12 PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells (FDDRepOntPS)

Full name PS class of reported quantities of UTRAN adjacent cells
Abbreviation FDDRepQntPS
3GPP name FDD_REP_QUANT
Description It indicates if MS uses RSCP or Ec/No to report measurement.
Managed object Cell
5-155

0, 1
l 0: RSCP, receiving power of CPICH scramble of UTRAN cell at UE, the
unit is dBm;
l 1: Ec/No, ratio of the receiving power to thermal noise of CPICH scram-
Value range ble of UTRAN cell, the unit is dB.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.13 PS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report

(FDDMulRatRrptPS)
Full name PS MAX number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report
Abbreviation FDDMulRatRrptPS
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates the maximum number of UTRAN/FDD adjacent

cells included in packet measurement report or strongest cell list. If
UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells are not full, the vacancies are used for GSM
adjacent cells. (If TDD technology is available, the vacancies are used for
Description TDD cells).
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-156

5.5.3.14 PS multiband report indication (MulBndRprtPS)

Full name PS Multiband report indication
Abbreviation MulBndRprtPS
MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report contents of

six adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band, when
reporting the survey result of adjacent cells to the network.
In multi-band networking, MS can enter with priority into a specific frequency
band during handover. The MS reports the survey result according to the
signal intensity and the frequency band of the signals, according to the
actual situation.
MulBndRprtPS is used to notify MS to report contents of adjacent cells in
multiple frequency bands. It is one of the system control parameters.
The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each frequency band.
General principles to set the parameters are as follows: 0: If the traffic of
each frequency band is almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice
over the frequency band. 3: If the traffic of each frequency band is quite
different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific frequency band
Description with priority.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3
in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports
are in.
in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports
are in.
Value range in local cell frequency band. If still more space is available, MS reports
5-157


are in.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.3.15 TDD multi report PS (TDDMulRatRrptPS)

Full name TDD multi report PS
Abbreviation TDDMulRatRrptPS
3GPP name XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
This parameter indicates the MAX number of UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell in-
cluded in measurement report. If UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells are not full, the
vacancies are used for GSM adjacent cells (If FDD technology is supported,
Description remained part is given to FDD cell).
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4 GPRS Parameters 2

5-158

Figure 5-22 GPRS Parameters 2
5.5.4.1 PS UE report invalid cell level allowed (InvldBSICRprtPS)

Full name PS UE report invalid cell level allowed
Abbreviation InvldBSICRprtPS
3GPP name INVALID_BSIC_REPORTING
When BCC is not configured, NCC is permitted for BSIC of some GSM cells.
This parameter indicates if the system allows UE to report field intensity of
Description such cell.
Managed object Cell
Yes/No
l YES: Allow UE to report the field intensity of NCC permitted but BCC
invalid cells
l NO: Do not Allow UE to report the field intensity of NCC permitted but
Value range BCC invalid cells
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-159

5.5.4.2 PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication

(SearchPrioPS3G)
Full name PS UE search UTRAN adjacent cell in bsic decoding frame indication
Abbreviation SearchPrioPS3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter indicates if to allow UE to search UTRAN adjacent cells in

the frame where BSIC decoding is needed. If yes, then UE can use at most
Description 25 frames for search in 13 seconds.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.3 Reselection priority control of 2G/3G (ServiceCC)

Full name Reselection priority control of 2G/3G (ServiceCC)
Abbreviation ServiceCC
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It describes the reselection priority control of 2G/3G
Managed object Cell
Handover to 3G first; Not Handover to 3G first; Not allow to Handover to

3G; According to SGSN, default handover to 3G first; According to SGSN,
Value range
default not handover to 3G first; According to SGSN, default not allowed to
handover to 3G.
Unit None
Default value Handover to 3G first
5-160

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.4 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (RprtOffsetPS850)

Abbreviation RprtOffsetPS850
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and RprtOffsetPS850 value is
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.5 GSM850M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS850)

Abbreviation RprtThoPS850
5-161

cell is higher than or equal to RprtThoPS850 (dimensionless, correspond-
tain period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and
Description RprtOffsetPS850.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-162

Relationship None
5.5.4.7 GSM 900M Adjacent cell reporting signal level Threshold (RprtThoPS900)
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-163

Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
5-164

Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
When reporting to GSM1900M adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Value range 0 ~ 7: corresponding to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6 dB per level.
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-165

Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.12 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (FDDRprtOffsetPS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation FDDRprtOffsetPS
when reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and FDDRprtOffsetPS value is
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-166

5.5.4.13 UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (FDDRprtThoPS)

Full name UTRAN/FDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation FDDRprtThoPS
When reporting to UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, corresponding
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, FDDMulRatRrptPS and
Description FDDRprtOffsetPS.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.14 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset (TDDRprtOffsetPS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level Offset
Abbreviation TDDRprtOffsetPS
when reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cell, if signal level in two cells are
higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS, and RepPrioPS value is same, then
the cell with bigger sum of signal level value and TDDRprtOffsetPS value is
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
5-167

Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.5.4.15 UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold (TDDRprtThoPS)

Full name UTRAN/TDD Adjacent cell reporting signal level threshold
Abbreviation TDDRprtThoPS
When reporting to UTRAN/TDD adjacent cells, only when signal level in the
cell is higher than or equal to TDDRprtThoPS (dimensionless, corresponding
period, it also depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, TDDMulRatRrptPS and
Description TDDRprtOffsetPS.
Managed object Cell
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
l 0: always;
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6 Adjacent Cell Parameters

Below section introduces the adjacent cell parameters.
5-168

5.6.1 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters

Element > Config Set > BSC Function > Site Config > Site > Cell and choose
Create Adjacent Interference Cell. The Create Adjacent Interference Cell interface is
displayed.
The interface of adjacent interference cell parameters is shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters
5.6.1.1 Interference cell No. (IntfObjectId)

Full name Interference cell No.
Abbreviation IntfObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description Interference cell No.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1~6
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-169

5.6.1.2 Related cell DN (RelationDN)

Full name Related Cell DN
Abbreviation RelationDN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter defines BSS external cell DN: EcId or related BSS equipment
Description DN: BscId-SiteId-BtsId.
Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Related features ZGRB-02-02-005 Double BCCH Allocation List
Relationship None
5.6.2 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection. The Create Adjacent Cell Handover and
Reselection interface is displayed.
Interface of adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is shown in Figure 5-24
and Figure 5-25.
5-170

Figure 5-24 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters (1)
Figure 5-25 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters (2)
5-171

5.6.2.1 Adjacent cell handover and reselection ID (HoResObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell handover and reselection ID
Abbreviation HoResObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is an unique identification of adjacent cell handover and re-

Description selection object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.2 Priority of handover (Hopriority)

Full name Priority of handover
Abbreviation Hopriority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, cell priority shall be considered in sequenc-

ing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence
the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic
affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence
the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher
Description level of priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
5-172

Relationship None
5.6.2.3 Max power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name Max power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax

power that can be output. When BSC controls the power, the parameter is
the maximum transmission power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS
max power level is also a parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.2.4 MIN power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

Full name MIN power level for handover access
Abbreviation RxLevMin
5-173

This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH)
required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide
preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly
monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells
with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are
potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than
minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell.
cells, MIN access level increases the resulting C1 and C2 to decrease
the cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this parameter
cannot be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring void area
across cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem. With this
measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value shall not
exceed -90dB. Define the parameter value to 10 (that is, from -101 dBm ~
-100 dBm) at initial network rollout stage or lower, which is higher than the
receiving sensitivity of MS (that is, -102 dBm). However, the 2 dB increase
in parameter value is allowable in situations where network coverage is
Description not a problem.
Managed object Cell
0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-174

5.6.2.5 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

Full name MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT
Abbreviation HoMarginPbgt
3GPP name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT
value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The
decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is
greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed
to find a more suitable cell.
This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover
Description from an adjacent cell to local cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.6 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)
Full name Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO
Abbreviation HoMarginRxLev
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, handover decisions depend upon received

average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. In handover caused by
the level, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent
Description cell to local cell.
5-175

Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.7 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

Full name Minimal Threshold of Quality Handover
Abbreviation HoMarginRxQual
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

the quality, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell
Description to local cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-176

5.6.2.8 MAX level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

Full name MAX level difference of force handover
Abbreviation MaxForceHoDiff
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference

for forced handover is required, which shall be lower than PBGT handover
threshold in the reverse direction. This parameter defines the maximum level
Description difference value for forced handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 9
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.9 Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

Full name Handover force resource threshold
Abbreviation HoForceResThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. When re-
source of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced handover
Description can be implemented.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 40
5-177

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.10 Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)

Full name Neighboring cell layer
Abbreviation NCellLayer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides the handover policies in multi-layer network

technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multi-layer radio
coverage can be formed in the same physical area.
The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the
PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the
number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability
and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell
layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An
MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper
layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to
enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in case
of PBGT handover and handover towards undefined layer being allowed
will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell.
"Same layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell and local cell are in the
same layer (PBGT handover is possible). "Upper layer of the home cell":
Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (when the local cell is a micro
cell); "Lower layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local
Description cell (when the local cell is a macro cell). For details, refer to Appendix.
Managed object Cell
Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower
Value range layer of the home cell
Unit None
Default value Same layer of the home cell
Change mode Offline
Related featuress None
5-178

Relationship None
5.6.2.11 CS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioCS)

Full name CS adjacent cell report priority
Abbreviation RepPrioCS
3GPP name REP_PRIORITY
Priorities of the adjacent cell are as follows:

l Adjacent cell with same frequency band. have the following features:
BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity ranks high
among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than or equal
to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents
frequency band of serving cell.
l Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell
must have the following features: BSIC of color code is valid. Its mea-
sured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same frequency band
and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoCSXXX.
Here, XXX represents the frequency band different from that of serving
cell.
l Other access technologies, such as UTRAN/FDD adjacent cells. These
cell shall have the following features: the cells scramble is correct.
Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells with the same ac-
cess technologies and is larger than or equal to the lower limit speci-
fied by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like
UTRAN/FDD.
For above priorities, if the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it
to adjacent cell of the next priority. For access technology such as
UTRAN/FDD, or frequency band such as GSM 900, the cell with high
RepPrioCS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with
greater sum of RprtThoCSXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX
Description (or XXXRprtOffsetCS) is preferred.
Managed object Cell
Value range Low, high
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
5-179

Relationship None
5.6.2.12 PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name PS adjacent cell report priority
Abbreviation RepPrioPS
This parameter defines the priority of adjacent cells to report the

measurement report during PS traffic operation.
l Adjacent cell with same frequency band. These cell shall have the fol-
lowing features: BSIC of color code is valid; Its measured field intensity
ranks high among cells in the same frequency band and is larger than
or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX. Here, XXX rep-
resents frequency band of serving cell.
and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by RprtThoPSXXX.
cell.
fied by XXXRprtThoPS. Here, XXX represents access technologies like
UTRAN/FDD.
RepPrioPS is preferred. For cells with same RepPrioPS, the cell with
greater sum of RprtThoPSXXX (or XXXRprtThoPS) and RprtOffsetPSXXX
Description (or XXXRprtOffsetPS) is preferred.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
5-180

Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.13 Target cell traffic threshold (TargetCellTrafficThs)

Full name Target cell traffic threshold
Abbreviation TargetCellTrafficThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the target cell traffic threshold. This value determines if it shall be
handed over to this cell. If the traffic in target cell is more than this threshold,
Description do not handover to this cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.14 Handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHoThs)

Full name Handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the handover threshold from macro to micro.
Managed object Cell
5-181

l More than -48 dBm.

l -50 ~ -49 dBm
...
Value range
l -109 ~ -108 dBm
l -110 ~ -109 dBm
l Lower than -110 dBm
Unit dBm
Default value -91 ~ -90 dBm
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.15 Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHon)

Full name Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHon
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It counts the number of handover threshold from macro to micro.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.16 Downlink Rapid Handover Threshold (DLRapidHoThs)

Full name Downlink Rapid Handover Threshold
Abbreviation DLRapidHoThs
5-182

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
his parameter defines the threshold for comparison of adjacent cell downlink
level and home cell downlink level. An adjacent cell with the level higher than
Description
the threshold can serve as the target cell of downlink rapid handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5.6.2.17 The direction of neighbour cell (NCellDir)

Full name The direction of neighbor cell
Abbreviation NCellDir
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter identifies the direction relation between adjacent cell and local
Description
cell. You can set the direction information for each adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Direction A, Direction B, No direction
Unit None
Default value No direction
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5-183

5.6.2.18 Related Cell DN

Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
The user can click Select to select cell or external cell in displayed interface,
check Mutual, you can mutually configure it as reselection and handover
Description cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.19 Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

Full name Is related cell
Abbreviation IsRelatedCell
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading
handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate if ad-
Description jacent cell is related to the serving cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-184

5.6.2.20 Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

Full name Is handover forced neighbor cell
Abbreviation IsHoForceNcell
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover
subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do
directional handover traffic.
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced
handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To
avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for
Description a specific object cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.21 CCN supported (CCNSupport)

Full name CCN supported
Abbreviation CCNSupport
3GPP name CCN-ACTIVE
CNN mode refers to cell alternating notificaiton. When BSS supports CCN
mode, if MS does cell reselection in NC0 and NC1 modes, PACKET CELL
CHANGE NOTIFICATION message notification shall be delivered to network
in normal case. After network receives this message, it can send specific
Description system message about standby cell to MS.
Managed object Cell
5-185

Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.2.22 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ResetHysteresis,2db)

For details, refer to Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ResetHysteresis,2db) under Cell
Selection Parameters.
5.6.2.23 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)

For details, refer to Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch) under Basic
Parameters 3.
5.6.2.24 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin)

For details, refer to MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin) under Basic
Parameters 3.
5.6.2.25 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset,2db)

For details, refer to Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset) under Cell Reselection
Parameters.
5.6.2.26 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset,10db)

For details, refer to Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset) under Cell Selection
Parameters.
5.6.2.27 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s)

For details, refer to Penalty time (PenaltyTime) under Cell Selection Parameters.
5.6.2.28 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess)

For details, refer to Cell bar access (CellBarAccess) under Optional Params.
5-186

5.6.3 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

Adjacent Cell Handover. The Create Adjacent Cell Handover interface is displayed.
The interface of adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 5-26 and Figure
5-27.
Figure 5-26 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters (1)
5-187

Figure 5-27 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters (2)
5.6.3.1 Adjacent cell handover object ID (HoObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell handover object ID
Abbreviation HoObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell handover object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-188

5.6.3.2 Priority of handover (HoPriority)

Full name Priority of handover
Abbreviation HoPriority
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
According to GSM specifications, cell priority shall be considered in sequenc-

ing candidate cells. Therefore, there are three decisive factors to sequence
the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Priority and traffic
affect the cell sequencing most. If they lead to the same result, sequence
the cells according to the radio conditions. The larger the value, the higher
Description level of priority.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0~7
Unit None
Default value 3
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.3 MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)

Full name MAX power level of MS
Abbreviation MsTxPwrMax

power that can be output. When BSC controls the power, the parameter is
the maximum transmission power that can be used by MS in the cell. MS
Description max power level is also a parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value.
5-189

The values are shown in appendix.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 31
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.4 MIN power level for handover access (RxLevMin)

Full name MIN power level for handover access
Abbreviation RxLevMin
This parameter defines the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH)
required for MS to handover to this cell. It is one of parameters to decide
preferred cells during handover control. MS in the serving cell constantly
monitors the signal intensity on BCCH of adjacent cells. Adjacent cells
with the minimum receiving intensity level higher than this parameter are
potential candidates for handover. MS with receiving level larger than
minimum receiving level indicates that MS is at the edge of the serving cell.
cells, MIN access level increases the resulting C1 and C2 to decrease
the cell effective coverage range. However, the value of this parameter
cannot be too large. Otherwise, large value change can bring void area
across cell boundaries to result in sudden call drop problem. With this
measure for traffic balance, it is suggested that the level value shall not
exceed -90dB. Define the parameter value to 10 (that is, from -101 dBm ~
-100 dBm) at initial network rollout stage or lower, which is higher than the
receiving sensitivity of MS (that is, -102 dBm). However, the 2 dB increase
in parameter value is allowable in situations where network coverage is
Description not a problem.
Managed object Cell
5-190

0 ~ 63
l 0: < -110 dBm;
l 1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm;
l 2: -109 dBm ~ -108 dBm;
...
l 62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
Unit None
Default value 15
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.5 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT (HoMarginPbgt)

Full name MIN threshold of signal level for handover on PBGT
Abbreviation HoMarginPbgt
3GPP name None

received average value of uplink and downlink signal strength. The PBGT
value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. The
decision process is as follows: If the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is
greater than the relevant threshold of this cell, handover shall be performed
to find a more suitable cell.
This parameter defines the threshold used to determine PBGT handover
Description from an adjacent cell to local cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
5-191

Change mode Offline

Related Features ZGRB-02-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria for PTP call
Relationship None
5.6.3.6 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level (HoMarginRxLev)
Full name MIN threshold of signal level for handover on power level
Abbreviation HoMarginRxLev
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

the level, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal strength threshold to determine handover from adjacent
Description cell to local cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline

Related Features ZGRB-02-02-002 Basic Handover Decision Criteria for PTP call
Relationship None
5.6.3.7 MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality (HoMarginRxQual)

Full name MIN threshold of signal level for handover on quality
Abbreviation HoMarginRxQual
5-192

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None

the quality, adjacent cells shall be screened and sequenced. This parameter
defines the signal quality threshold to determine handover from adjacent cell
Description to local cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 30
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5.6.3.8 MAX level difference of force handover (MaxForceHoDiff)

Full name MAX level difference of force handover
Abbreviation MaxForceHoDiff
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In order to avoid handover oscillations in cells, a tolerable level difference

for forced handover is required, which shall be lower than PBGT handover
threshold in the reverse direction. This parameter defines the maximum level
Description difference value for forced handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 48
Unit None
Default value 9
Change mode Offline
5-193

Relationship None
5.6.3.9 Handover force resource threshold (HoForceResThs)

Full name Handover force resource threshold
Abbreviation HoForceResThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Directed transfer does not result in destination cell congestion. When re-
source of object cell is lower than the congestion threshold, forced handover
Description can be implemented.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 40
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.10 Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)

Full name Neighboring cell layer
Abbreviation NCellLayer
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
5-194

This parameter provides the handover policies in multi-layer network

technology and dual-frequency network technology. Multi-layer radio
coverage can be formed in the same physical area.
The handover policies will not be detailed in this manual. In brief, limiting the
PBGT handover defined in the specifications at one layer can reduce the
number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability
and communication quality. The policy of handover between a macro cell
layer and a micro cell layer mainly depends on the moving speed of MS. An
MS at higher moving speed will try to stay at the macro cell layer (upper
layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS at lower moving speed will try to
enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in case
of PBGT handover and handover towards undefined layer being allowed
will the undefined cell of the service area be considered as a candidate cell.
"Same layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell and local cell are in the
same layer (PBGT handover is possible). "Upper layer of the home cell":
Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (when the local cell is a micro
cell). "Lower layer of the home cell": Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local
Description cell (when the local cell is a macro cell). For details, refer to Appendix.
Managed object Cell
Undefined, Same layer of the home cell, Upper layer of the home cell, Lower
Value range layer of the home cell
Unit None
Default value Same layer of the home cell
Change mode Offline
ZGRO-02-02-001 Handover between Macro- and Micro-cells

Related Features ZGRO-05-02-008 Multi-layer Cell Structure
Relationship None

5-195


cell.
UTRAN/FDD.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
5-196

3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.13 Handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHoThs)

Full name Handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the handover threshold from macro to micro.
Managed object Cell
l More than -48 dBm.

l -50 ~ -49 dBm
...
Value range
l -109 ~ -108 dBm
l -110 ~ -109 dBm
l Lower than -110 dBm
Unit dBm
Default value -91 ~ -90 dBm
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-197

5.6.3.14 Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro (MacroMicroHoN)

Full name Counter of handover threshold from macro to micro
Abbreviation MacroMicroHoN
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It counts the number of handover threshold from macro to micro.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 2
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.15 Downlink Rapid Handover Threshold (DLRapidHoThs)

Full name Downlink Rapid Handover Threshold
Abbreviation DLRapidHoThs
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
his parameter defines the threshold for comparison of adjacent cell downlink
level and home cell downlink level. An adjacent cell with the level higher than
Description
the threshold can serve as the target cell of downlink rapid handover.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 10
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5-198

5.6.3.16 The direction of neighbour cell (NCellDir)

Full name The direction of neighbor cell
Abbreviation NCellDir
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter identifies the direction relation between adjacent cell and local
Description
cell. You can set the direction information for each adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Direction A, Direction B, No direction
Unit None
Default value No direction
Change mode Offline
Related
parameters None
Relationship None
5.6.3.17 Is related cell (IsRelatedCell)

Full name Is related cell
Abbreviation IsRelatedCell
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Only the cell related to the serving cell can be a candidate in rapid fading
handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell and is used to indicate if ad-
Description jacent cell is related to the serving cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-199

Relationship None
5.6.3.18 Is handover forced neighbor cell (IsHoForceNcell)

Full name Is handover forced neighbor cell
Abbreviation IsHoForceNcell
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
In the case of 1800M and 900M network sharing site, it is better to handover
subscribers of 900M network to 1800M network. At this time, you can do
directional handover traffic.
Forced handover is a method for on-site traffic adjustment. The forced
handover direction is definite, i.e. 1800M sector in the same direction. To
avoid influence on other cells, the forced handover is performed only for
Description a specific object cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Click the Select button to select a cell or an external cell from the pop-up
Description interface.
5-200

Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.3.20 Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ResetHysteresis,2db)

For details, refer to Cell reselecting hysteresis level (ResetHysteresis,2db) under Cell
Selection Parameters.
5.6.3.21 Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch)

For details, refer to Control channel MAX power level (MsTxPwrMaxCch) under Basic
Parameters 3.
5.6.3.22 MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin)

For details, refer to MIN received signal level to access (RxLevAccessMin) under Basic
Parameters 3.
5.6.3.23 Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset,2db)

For details, refer to Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset) under Cell Reselection
Parameters.
5.6.3.24 Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset,10db)

For details, refer to Temporary offset (TemporaryOffset) under Cell Selection
Parameters.
5.6.3.25 Penalty time (PenaltyTime, 20s)

For details, refer to Penalty time (PenaltyTime) under Cell Selection Parameters.
5.6.3.26 Cell bar access (CellBarAccess)

For details, refer to Cell bar access (CellBarAccess) under Optional Params.
5-201

5.6.4 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

Create Adjacent Cell Reselection. The Create Adjacent Cell Reselection interface is
displayed.
The interface of adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
5.6.4.1 Adjacent cell reselection object ID (ReSelObjectId)

Full name Adjacent cell reselection object ID
Abbreviation ReSelObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is a unique identification of adjacent cell reselection object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-202

5.6.4.2 Adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name Adjacent cell report priority
This parameter indicates adjacent cell report priority, broadcasted to MS in

SI2quater, PSI3ter and PSI3quater. It corresponds to adjacent cell list, indi-
Description cating the priority of measurement report in adjacent cell.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
5-203

Relationship None

Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
DN (BssId-SiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the

external cell.
Click the Select button to select a cell or an external cell from the pop-up
Description interface.
Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection. The Create UTRAN Adjacent Cell
Handover and Reselection interface is displayed.
The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters is shown in
Figure 5-29.
5-204

Figure 5-29 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters
5.6.5.1 Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID (S3GHoRSObjectId)

Full name Adjacent UTRAN cell handover and reselection object ID
Abbreviation S3GHoRSObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover

Description and reselection object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-205

5.6.5.2 RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoRSCPOffset3G)

Full name RSCP offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell
Abbreviation HoRSCPOffset3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that

UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE
communication within it.
This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for
uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Description UE to handover to different adjacent cells.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5.3 Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell (HoEcNoOffset3G)

Full name Ec/No offset handover to UTRAN adjacent cell
Abbreviation HoEcNoOffset3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that

UTRAN adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE
communication within it.
This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity for
uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
5-206

Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None


cell.
UTRAN/FDD.
Managed object Cell
5-207

Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5.5 PS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

Full name PS adjacent cell report priority

cell.
UTRAN/FDD.
5-208

Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

5-209

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.5.8 Related cell DN

Full name Related cell DN
Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.

Description The user can click Select to select a cell from the pop-up interface.
Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-210

5.6.6 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover. The Create ITRAN Adjacent Cell Handover interface
is displayed.
The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell handover parameters is shown in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters
5.6.6.1 UTRAN HO ID (S3GHoObjectId)

Full name UTRAN HO ID
Abbreviation S3GHoObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell handover

Description object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-211

Relationship None
5.6.6.2 RSCP offset handover (HoRSCPOffset3G)

Full name RSCP offset handover
Abbreviation HoRSCPOffset3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN
adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communica-
tion within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity
for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.6.3 Ec/No offset handover (HoEcNoOffset3G)

Full name Ec/No offset handover
Abbreviation HoEcNoOffset3G
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Handover from GSM to UTRAN being triggered only indicates that UTRAN
adjacent cell satisfies the minimum requirement for normal UE communica-
tion within it. This parameter is a prerequisite to ensure enough field intensity
for uplink/downlink of UTRAN adjacent cells. It also controls the priority of a
5-212

Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 49
Unit None
Default value 5
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
It indicates the priority of CS adjacent cell report. Priorities of the adjacent

cell are as follows:
1. Adjacent cell in the same frequency band as the serving cell must have
the following features:
l BSIC of color code is valid;
l Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same fre-
quency band (actual band place depends on SERVING_BAND_RE-
PORTING) and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by
RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents frequency band of serving
cell.
2. Adjacent cell in the frequency band different from that of the serving cell
must have the following features: have the following features:
l BSIC of color code is valid;
l Its measured field intensity ranks high among cells in the same
frequency band (actual band place depends on MULTIBAND_RE-
PORTING) and is larger than or equal to the lower limit specified by
RprtThoCSXXX. Here, XXX represents the frequency band differ-
ent from that of serving cell.
3. Other access technologies, such as WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells. have
the following features:
l The cells scramble is correct.
l Its measured field intensity should rank high among cells with
the same access technologies (actual band place depends on
Description XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) and is larger than or equal to the
5-213

lower limit specified by XXXRprtThoCS. Here, XXX represents

access technologies like UTRAN/FDD.
4. For GSM adjacent cell with valid BSIC, or GSM adjacent cell with per-
mitted NCC but invalid BCC, or adjacent cell with other access technolo-
gies, if such a cells RepPrioCS and REPORTING_RATE are low, then
the reporting frequency is low too.
For above priorities:
l If the prioritys location has surplus, then leave it to adjacent cell of the
next priority;
l For access technology such as WCDMA/FDD, or frequency band such
as GSM 900M, the cell with higher RepPrioCS is preferred.
l For cells with same RepPrioCS, the cell with greater sum of RprtThoC-
SXXX (or XXXRprtThoCS) and RprtOffsetCSXXX (or XXXRprtOff-
setCS) is preferred.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 100
Unit None
Default value 75
Change mode Offline
5-214

Relationship None

Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is used to determine DN of the UTRAN external cell.

Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.7 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters

UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection. The Create UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection
The interface of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection parameters is shown in Figure 5-31.
5-215

Figure 5-31 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
5.6.7.1 Adjacent UTRAN cell reselection object ID (S3GrsObjectId)

Full name Adjacent UTRAN cell reselection object ID
Abbreviation S3GrsObjectId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter is a unique identification of UTRAN adjacent cell reselection

Description object.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 64
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5.6.7.2 CS adjacent cell report priority (RepPrioPS)

5-216


cell.
UTRAN/FDD.
Managed object Cell
Unit None
Default value Low
Change mode Offline
Relationship None
5-217


Managed object Cell
Value range Yes/No
Unit None
Default value No
Change mode Offline
Relationship None

Abbreviation None
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
DN (BssId-SiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the

external cell.
Managed object Cell
Value range None
Unit None
Default value None
Change mode Offline
5-218

Relationship None
5.7 Frequency Hopping System Parameters

Frequency Hopping System. The Create Frequency Hopping System interface is
displayed.
The interface of frequency hopping system parameters is shown in Figure 5-32.
Figure 5-32 Frequency Hopping System Parameters
5.7.1 Frequency hopping No. (FhsId)

Full name Frequency hopping No.
Abbreviation FhsId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter is an unique identification of frequency hopping system.
Managed object Cell
Value range 1 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 1
Change mode Offline
5-219


Related featuress ZGRO-04-03-004 Baseband Frequency Hopping
Related parameters Frequency No.
Relationship None
5.7.2 Hopping sequence No. (HSN)

Full name Hopping sequence No.
Abbreviation HSN
3GPP name Hopping sequence number
According to GSM 05.02 Frequency Hoping Algorithm, MAI is a function of

TDMA Frame number (FN), Hoping Sequence Number (HSN) and Mobile
Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). HSN determines the operation track of
frequencies during the frequency hopping process. Using different HSN
for cells having same MA can avoid frequency utilization conflict between
adjacent cells during the frequency hopping process.
Different timeslots can share the same group of MA and corresponding
HSN. When HSN = 0, it is a special frequency hopping (i.e. circular
frequency hopping)
HSN can be derived from BCC of the cell, because cells using the same
MA also have the same BCCH.
For example, if HSN [(BCC6) +1, ..., (BCC6) +6], then each cell may
use any of the 6 HSNs. The remaining 0 and 49 ~ 63 are used in other
Description special cases. If for simple, directly use 0 by default.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 63
Unit None
Default value 0
Change mode Offline

Relationship None
5-220

5.7.3 Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)

Full name Frequency hopping mode
Abbreviation FreqHopMode
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description This parameter indicates the mode of frequency hopping.
Managed object Cell
Value range RFID freqhop, baseband freqhop
Unit None
Default value Synthesized Frequency Hopping
Change mode Offline

BhGroupId
Related parameters MA frequency list (MaFreqNum)
BhGroupId can be set if this parameter is set to base band hopping.

If this parameter is set to RFID hopping, you can do the addition and
Relationship
deletion action for MaFreqNum. If this parameter is set to base band
hopping, the Add and Delete buttons disappear for MaFreqNum.
5.7.4 BhGroupId
Full name BhGroupId
Abbreviation BhGroupId
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
Description It indicates the hopping group id.
Managed object Cell
Value range 0 ~ 255
Unit None
Default value 0 indicates that TRX does not involve the base band hopping.
Change mode Offline
Related parameters Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
5-221

You can set this parameter if FreqHopMode is set to base band

Relationship
hopping.
5.7.5 MA frequency list (MaFreqNum)

Full name MA frequency list
Abbreviation MaFreqNum
3GPP name None
3GPP reference None
This parameter provides a list of absolute RF channel number in a

frequency hopping group. It is a CA sub-set of the home cell. The related
information will be notified to MS when MS is notified of which channel
should be used.
Description You can do the Add and Delete action.
Managed object Cell
Value range Based on frequency setting
Unit None
Default value Based on frequency setting
Change mode Offline

Related parameters Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
You can add or delete for this parameter if FreqHopMode is set to RFID
Relationship hopping. If this parameter is set to base band hopping, the Add and Delete
buttons disappears.
5-222

Appendix A
Value Range of Flow Control
Policy
Barred Rxlev_
Overload Class Access Penalty Cell select Max-
Level Number _Min Time Offset Tx- integer Retrans
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 -1 (255)
2 0 1 0 0 2 -2 (254)
3 1 2 0 -2 (254) 3 -3 (253)
4 2 3 0 -3 (253) 4 -3 (253)
5 3 4 0 -4 (252) 4 -3 (253)
6 4 4 0 -4 (252) 4 -3 (253)
7 5 4 11111 -3 (253) 4 -3 (253)
8 6 4 11111 -2 (254) 4 -3 (253)
9 7 4 11111 -1 (255) 4 -3 (253)
10 8 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
11 9 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
12 10 4 11111 0 4 -3 (253)
A-1

A-2

Appendix B
Value Range of Power
GSM900 GSM1800
MS Output MS Output
Value Power (dBm) Value Power (dBm)
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30
... ... ... 1 28
16 11 ... ...
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19~31 5 15 ~ 28 0
B-1

B-2

Appendix C
Value Range of Cell Layer
Num
Adjacent Cell
GSM GSM
Sectored GSM 900M GSM 900M 1800M 1800M
This Cell cell macro cell micro cell macro cell micro cell Pico cell
Sectored
cell N N N N N N
GSM900M
macro cell N SAME LOWER N LOWER LOWER
GSM900M
micro cell N UPPER SAME UPPER N LOWER
GSM1800M
macro cell N N LOWER SAME LOWER LOWER
GSM1800M
micro cell N UPPER N UPPER SAME LOWER
Pico cell N UPPER N UPPER N N
C-1

C-2

Appendix D
Relation between Parameter
Interface and Database Value
Below section introduces the relation between parameter interface and database value.
Table of Contents
BSC Function Parameters Interface........................................................................ D-1
GERAN External Cell Parameters Interface ............................................................ D-8
UTRAN External Cell Parameters Interface ............................................................ D-8
Cell Parameters Interface ....................................................................................... D-9
Cell Object Parameters Interface .......................................................................... D-19
D.1 BSC Function Parameters Interface

D.1.1 Basic Property Parameters
l Support MNC 3 digits (MNC3Digits)
Interface value Database Value
2 digits 0
3 digits 1
l Net Type (Net)
CTCN 1
China Mobile Communication Network (CMCN) 2
China Unicom Communication Network

(CUCN) 3
Railway Telecom Network (RLTN) 4
China Netcome (CNC) 5
National Farm Transition Network (NFTN) 6
Network 7 7
Network 8 8
D-1

l SP Type (SpType)
Signaling End Point (SEP) 1
Signaling transfer point (STP) 2
Signaling terminal end point (STEP) 3
l Is TC Type (TCType)
Inner TC 0
Outer TC 1
l Global time zone (GlobalTimeZone)
(GMT-12:00) Enewetak, Kwajalein Island -720
(GMT-11:30) Midway Island, Samoan Islands -690
(GMT-11:00) Midway Island, Samoan Islands -660
(GMT-10:30) Hawaii -630
(GMT-10:00) Hawaii -600
(GMT-09:30) Alaskan -570
(GMT-09:00) Alaskan -540
(GMT-08:30) Western Standard Time (USA

and Canada) -510
(GMT-08:00) Western Standard Time (USA

and Canada) -480
(GMT-07:30) Arizona -450
(GMT-07:00) Arizona -420
(GMT-06:30) Mexico -390
(GMT-06:00) Mexico, Saskatchewan -360
(GMT-05:30) Bogota, Lima -330
(GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Eastern Standard

Time (USA and Canada) -300
(GMT-04:30) San Diego -270
(GMT-04:00) San Diego -240
(GMT-03:30) Newfoundlander -210
(GMT-03:00) Brasilia, Buenos Aires -180
D-2

Appendix D Relation between Parameter Interface and Database Value
(GMT-02:30) Mid-Atlantic -150
(GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic -120
(GMT-01:30) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Is-

lands -90
(GMT-01:00) Cape Verde Islands, Azores Is-

lands -60
(GMT-0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London -30
(GMT) Greenwich Mean Time, London 0
(GMT+0:30) Greenwich Mean Time, London 30
(GMT+01:00) Berlin, Roman, Paris 60
(GMT+01:30) Berlin, Roman, Paris 90
(GMT+02:00) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens 120
(GMT+02:30) Helsinki, Cairo, Athens 150
(GMT+03:00) Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh,

Moscow 180
(GMT+03:30) Teheran 210
(GMT+04:00) Baku, Tbilisi 240
(GMT+04:30) Kabul 270
(GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi 300
(GMT+05:30) Calcutta, Madras, Bombay, New

Delhi 330
(GMT+06:00) Alma-ata, Dacca 360
(GMT+06:30) Rangoon 390
(GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Djakarta 420
(GMT+07:30) Bangkok, Djakarta 450
(GMT+08:00) Beijing 480
(GMT+08:30) Beijing 510
(GMT+09:00) Seoul, Tokyo 540
(GMT+09:30) Adelaide, Darwin 570
(GMT+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney,

Guam 600
(GMT+10:30) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney,

Guam 630
(GMT+11:00) Magadan, The Solomon Islands 660
D-3

(GMT+11:30) Magadan, The Solomon Islands 690
(GMT+12:00) Wellington, Marshall Islands 720
(GMT+12:30) Wellington, Marshall Islands 750
(GMT+13:00) Nuku'alofa 780
D.1.2 Radio Basic Property Parameters

l DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)
DCS1800 0
PCS1900 1
l MSC version ID (MSCVer)
Release 98 or older 0
Release 99 or newer 1
D.1.3 Others
l Preferred speech version (half) (PreferSpeechVer)
PreferSpeechVer is a field jointed by half-rate and full-rate. Jointing mode: addition
by bit after shifting
PreferSpeechVer = (PreferSpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1
PreferSpeechVer_0: half-rate
PreferSpeechVer_1: Full-rate
Note:
In this article, we use a formula to represent shift jointing mode. For instance, (Prefer-
SpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1, in which value of PreferSpeechVer_0 is shifted two
bits to left and jointed with the value of PreferSpeechVer_1.
Not specify the preferred version 0
Half-rate version 1 1
D-4

Half-rate version 3 3
l Preferred speech version (full) (PreferSpeechVer)

PreferSpeechVer is a field jointed by half-rate and full-rate. Jointing mode: addition
by bit after shifting
PreferSpeechVer = (PreferSpeechVer_0<<2) + PreferSpeechVer_1
PreferSpeechVer_0: half-rate
PreferSpeechVer_1: Full-rate
Not specify the preferred version 0
Full-rate version 1 1
l TFOControl
TFOControl is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift
TFOControl = (TFOControl_3<<3) + (TFOControl_2<<2) + (TFOControl_1<<1) +
TFOControl_0.
TFOControl_0: TFO Enable
TFOControl_1: coding/decoding type optimization enable
TFOControl_2: coding/decoding type unmatched enable
TFOControl_3: AMR optimization mode
D.1.4 AMR Half Method Parameters

l Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)
IsAmrICM is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing
mode: IsAmrICM (full) + IsAmrICM (half), jointed by string.
Initial codec mode 0
Startmode codec 1
l Start mode (AmrStartMode)

AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,
jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string.
l Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)
D-5

IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing
mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string.
l Thresholds of AMR (AmrThresholds)
AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,
jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
l Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)
AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,
jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
D.1.5 AMR Full Method Parameters

l Initial codec mode (IsAmrlCM)
IsAmrICM is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing
mode: IsAmrICM (full) + IsAmrICM (half), jointed by string.
Initial codec mode 0
Startmode codec 1
l Start mode (AmrStartMode)

AmrStartMode is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,
jointing mode: AmrStartMode (full) + AmrStartMode (half), jointed by string.
l Enable noise control (IsAmrNscb)
IsAmrNscb is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate, jointing
mode: IsAmrNscb (full) + IsAmrNscb (half), jointed by string.
l Threshold of AMR (AmrThresholds)
AmrThresholds is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,
jointing mode: AmrThresholds (full) + AmrThresholds (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
l Hysteresis of AMR (AmrHysteresis)
AmrHysteresis is a jointed field in database. AMR half-rate is jointed with full-rate,

jointing mode: AmrHysteresis (full) + AmrHysteresis (half), jointed by string from top
to bottom.
D.1.6 GPRS Property 1 Parameters

l Cn
D-6

CN is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
l Nn
Nn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
l Xn (%)
Xn is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.

l NACC supported (NACCSupport)
Not support NACC 0
Support NACC, not support LLC framework

conversion 1
Support NACC, also support LLC framework

conversion 2
l BSC's net operation mode (NMO)
Network Operation Mode 1 0
l Downlink TBF retry (DITBFRetry)
Not retry 0
Retry 1 times 1
Retry 2 times 2
D.1.8 EDGE Property Parameters

l SGSN version ID (SGSNVer)
Release 98 or older 0
D-7

Release 99 or newer 1
l R99 Ind (R99Ind)
non-R99 version 0
R99 version 1
D.2 GERAN External Cell Parameters Interface

l Cell type (CellType)
Umbrella cell 0
Macro Cell 1
Micro cell 2
Pico cell 3
Extended range cell 4
l Frequency band (FreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
D.3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters Interface

l UTRAN cell type (CellType3G)
FDD 0
TDD 1
l UTRAN adjacent cell bandwidth (BandWidth3G)
D-8

0 (3.84Mcps) 0
1 (1.28Mcps) 1
D.4 Cell Parameters Interface

D.4.1 Basic Params 1
l Cell type (CellType)
Umbrella cell 0
Macro Cell 1
Micro cell 2
Pico cell 3
Extended range cell 4
l Frequency band (FreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
l Frequency band of subCell (SubFreqBand)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
l GPRS service supported (PsSupport)
D-9

Dont support GPRS 0
GPRS service supported 1
Support EDGE 2
l Common control channel configuration (CcchConf)
CCCH uses one physical channel, not com-

bined with SDCCH 0
One basic physical channel used by CCCH, use

with SDCCH 1
Two basic physical channels used by CCCH, do

not use with SDCCH 2
Three basic physical channels used by CCCH,

do not use with SDCCH 4
Four basic physical channels used by CCCH,

do not use with SDCCH 6
D.4.2 Basic Params 2

l AMR Codec Adjust Mode (AmrAdjMode)
AMR quick rate adjustment mode 0
Adjustment interval for configuration 1
D.4.3 Other Parameters

l CipherMode
CipherMode is a jointed field in database by CipherMode-0~ CipherMode-7. Jointing

mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
D.4.4 System Parameters

l InterfBoundary
InterfBoundary is a jointed field in database by InterfBoundary_0~ InterfBoundary_5.
Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
D-10


l SI13 sending position (Si13Locate)
BCCH Norm 0
BCCH Ext 1
l Packet access priority threshold (PriAcThr)
Disallow packet access 1
Allow packet access with the priority level 1 2
Allow packet access with the priority level 1-2 3
Allow priority 6
D.4.6 GPRS Cell Options Parameters

l T3168 (s)
0.5 0
1 1
1.5 2
2 3
2.5 4
3 5
3.5 6
4 7
l T3192(ms)
500 0
1000 1
1500 2
0 3
D-11

80 4
120 5
160 6
200 7
l DRX mode holding time (DrxTimeMax, s)
0 0
1 1
2 2
4 3
8 4
16 5
32 6
64 7
l Packet control acknowledgment type (CtraCKType)
4 access burst 0
RLC/MAC control block 1
l Access burst type (AccessType)
8 bits 0
11 bits 1
l N3102 decrease step (PanDec)
4 0
8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
D-12

24 5
28 6
32 7
l N3102 increase step (PanInc)
4 0
8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
24 5
28 6
32 7
l N3102 MAX (PanMax)
4 0
8 1
12 2
16 3
20 4
24 5
28 6
32 7
l GPRS phone init coding

GPRS phone init coding is a jointed field in the database. Jointing mode:
1*16Kbps+2~4*16Kbps jointed by string.
l GPRS phones init code can be changed (InitAttachExch_0)
InitAttachExch is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift
(INITATTACHEXCH_1<<1)+INITATTACHEXCH_0).
InitAttachExch_0: GPRS phones init code can be changed dynamically.
InitAttachExch_1: EGPRS phones init code can be changed
D-13

D.4.7 GPRS NC Survey Parameters

l Packet Idle mode (NcRepPerI, s)
0.48 0
0.96 1
1.92 2
3.84 3
7.68 4
15.36 5
30.72 6
61.44 7
l Packet transmission mode (NcRepPerT, s)
0.48 0
0.96 1
1.92 2
3.84 3
7.68 4
15.36 5
30.72 6
61.44 7
l Network control order (CtrlOrder)
NC0 0
NC1 1
NC2 2
l NC hold time in non-drx mode (NcNoDrxPer, s)
No non-DRX mode 0
0.24 1
0.48 2
D-14

0.72 3
0.96 4
1.2 5
1.44 6
1.92 7
l Extended measurement report order (ExMeaOrder)
EM0 0
EM1 1
l Type of extended measurement report (ExtRepType)
Type 1 0
Type 2 1
Type 3 2
l Report period of extended measurement (ExtRepPer, s)
60 0
120 1
240 2
480 3
960 4
1920 5
3840 6
7680 7
D.4.8 GPRS Power Control Parameters

l Power control measurement channel (PcMeasChan)
BCCH 0
PDCH 1
D-15

D.4.9 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters

l Reselection offset (ReselOffset)
ReselOffset is a jointed field in database by ReselOff_0 and ReselOff_0. Jointing
mode: ReselOff_0 + ReselOff_1 jointed by string.
l Reselection temporary offset (TempOffset, dB)
TempOffset is a jointed field in database by TempOffset_0 and TempOffset_1. Jointing
mode: TempOffset_0+ TempOffset_1 jointed by string.
0 0
10 1
20 2
30 3
40 4
50 5
60 6
Large infinite 7
l Penalty time of cell reselection (PenalTime, 10s)

PenalTime is a jointed field in database by PenalTime_0 and PenalTime_1. Jointing
mode: PenalTime_0 + PenalTime_1 jointed by string.
l Interval of reselecting the same cell (T_RESEL, s)
T_RESEL is a jointed field in database by T_RESEL_0 and T_RESEL_1. Jointing
mode: T_RESEL_0 + T_RESEL_1 jointed by string.
5 0
10 1
15 2
20 3
30 4
60 5
120 6
300 7
l Threshold of HSC signal level (HCS_THR)
D-16

HCS_THR is a jointed field in database by HCS_THR_0 and HCS_THR_1. Jointing

mode: HCS_THR_0+HCS_THR_1 jointed by string.
l HCS priority (PrioClass)
PrioClass is a jointed field in database by PrioClass_0 and PrioClass_1. Jointing
mode: PrioClass_0+PrioClass_1 jointed by string.
l C31 hysteresis (C31_HYST)
C31_HYST is a jointed field in database by C31_HYST_0 and C31_HYST_1. Jointing
mode: C31_HYST_0+C31_HYST_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS cell reselection hysteresis (ReselHys, dB)
ReselHys is a jointed field in database by ReselHys_0 and ReselHys_1. Jointing
mode: ReselHys_0+ReselHys_1 jointed by string.
l Routing reselection hysteresis (RaReselHys, dB)
RaReselHys is a jointed field in database by RaReselHys_0 and RaReselHys_1.
Jointing mode: RaReselHys_0+RaReselHys_1 jointed by string.
l Random access attempt permitted (RadAcRetry)
RadAcRetry is a jointed field in database by RadAcRetry_0 and RadAcRetry_1.
Jointing mode: RadAcRetry_0+RadAcRetry_1 jointed by string.
l Usage of cell reselection offset (C32_QUAL)
C32_QUAL is a jointed field in database by C32_QUAL_0 and C32_QUAL_1. Jointing
mode: C32_QUAL_0+C32_QUAL_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS access minimum signal level (RxLevAsMin)
RxLevAsMin is a jointed field in database by RxLevAsMin_0 and RxLevAsMin_1.
Jointing mode: RxLevAsMin_0+RxLevAsMin_1 jointed by string.
l HCS exist (HCS_EXIST)
HCS_EXIST is a jointed field in database by HCS_EXIST_0 and HCS_EXIST_1.
Jointing mode: HCS_EXIST_0+HCS_EXIST_1 jointed by string.
l GPRS MAX initial access signal level (MsTxMaxCch)
MsTxMaxCch is a jointed field in database by MsTxMaxCch_0 and MsTxMaxCch_1.
Jointing mode: MsTxMaxCch_0+MsTxMaxCch_1 jointed by string.
D.4.10 GPRS Channel Parameters

l Interval range of packet access attempt (TxInt)
2 0
3 1
4 2
D-17

5 3
6 4
7 5
8 6
9 7
10 8
12 9
14 10
16 11
20 12
25 13
32 14
50 15
l Interval period of packet access attempt (S)
12 0
15 1
20 2
30 3
41 4
55 5
76 6
109 7
163 8
217 9
l MAX Times of Attempt (MaxRetrans)
MaxRetrans is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
1 0
2 1
D-18

4 2
7 3
l Access Control Level (AccCtrlClass)

AccCtrlClass is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
to bottom.
l Access Persist Level (PersistLev)
PersistLev is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to
bottom.
D.4.11 EDGE Property Parameters

l EGPRS Phone Init Coding
It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
MCS1 0
MCS2 1
MCS3 2
MCS4 3
MCS5 4
MCS6 5
MCS7 6
MCS8 7
MCS9 8
D.5 Cell Object Parameters Interface

D.5.1 TRX Info Parameters
l TRX Type (TrxType)
Common TRX 0
Extended TRX 1
l Static power level (PwRreduction)
D-19

Max output power 0
Max output power -2dB 1
Max output power +1.5dB 253
Max output power +1dB 254
Max output power +0.5dB 255
D.5.2 Channel Info Parameters

l TsChannelComb
TCH/F 0
TCH/H (0, 1) + FACCH/H (0, 1) + SACCH/TH

(0, 1) 1
TCH/H (0, 0) + FACCH/H (0, 1) + SACCH/TH

(0, 1) + TCH/H (0, 1) 2
SDCCH/8 + SACCH/C8 3
FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH 4
BCCH + SDCCH/4 5
BCCH + CCCH 6
BCCH + SDCCH/4 + CBCH 7
SDCCH + CBCH 8
PBCCH + PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH +

PTCCH 12
PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH 13
PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH; 14
l Ps Service Preference property
No preference 255
D-20

GPRS Preference 0
EDGE Preference 1
EDGE specialty 2
EGPRS2A Preference 3
EGPRS2A dedicated 4
D.5.3 Power Control Parameters

l Power control PwrDecrLimit
It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom.
l Increase uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
It is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top to bottom in
the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
l Decrease uplink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Increase uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Decrease uplink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Increase downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Decrease downlink level Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Increase downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l Decrease downlink quality Threshold, Value P, and Value N
l FR Power increasing step (db) (PWRINCSTEP_0)
D-21

PWRINCSTEP is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
l FR Power decreasing step (db) (PWRREDSTEP_0)
PWRREDSTEP is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from
top to bottom in the sequence of FR, HR, AMR FR, AMR HR.
l MAX power level of MS (MsTxPwrMax)
MsTxPwrMax is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
l MIN power level of MS (MsTxPwrMin)
MsTxPwrMin is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
l MIN power level of BS (BsTxPwrMin)
BsTxPwrMin is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
l MIN interval of power control (PcMinInterval)
PcMinInterval is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: jointed by string from top
D.5.4 Handover Control Parameters

l Frequency control value for handover on traffic (TrafficHoFreqrCtl)
GSM900 0
EXT900 1
DCS1800 2
PCS1900 4
GSM850 7
l HoPatternInd
HoPatternInd is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift.
HoPatternInd = (HoPatternInd4<<3) + (HoPatternInd3<<2) + (HoPatternInd2<<1) +
HoPatternInd1
HoPatternInd1: synchronization handover
HoPatternInd2: Asynchronization handover
HoPatternInd3: Pseudo-synchronization handover
HoPatternInd4: Pre-synchronization handover
l HoControl
D-22

HoControl is a jointed field. Jointing mode: addition by bit after shift.

HoControl = (HoControl18<<17) + (HoControl17<<16) + (HoControl16<<15) +
(HoControl15<<14) + (HoControl14<<13) + (HoControl13<<12) + (HoControl12<<11)
+ (HoControl11<<10) + (HoControl10<<9) + (HoControl9<<8) + (HoControl8<<7)
+ (HoControl7<<6) + (HoControl6<<5) + (HoControl5<<4) + (HoControl4<<3) +
(HoControl3<<2) + (HoControl2<<1) + HoControl1
HoControl1: Allow SDCCH handover
HoControl2: Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to uplink interference
HoControl3: Allow inter-cell handover attempt due to downlink interference
HoControl4: Allow handover due to distance
HoControl5: Allow standard PBGT handover
HoControl6: Allow automatic handover based on traffic
HoControl7: Allow handover based on direction
HoControl8: Allow handover based on homocentric circularity
HoControl9: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to downlink
interference
HoControl10: Allow intra-cell handover in super TRX channel due to uplink
interference
HoControl11: Allow adjacent cells handover in super TRX channel due to PBGT
HoControl12: Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority
HoControl13: Allow rapid handover
HoControl14: Allow Macro-Micro delay handover
HoControl15: Allow Micro-Macro delay handover
HoControl16: Allow internal handover based on TA
HoControl17: Allow force transfer handover
HoControl18: Subcell handover algorithm
l Subcell handover algorithm (HoControl18)
Concentric handover 0
Path loss and TA handover 1
D.5.5 UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

l Measurement threshold of UE performing GPRS UTRAN cell (Qsearch_P)
Qsearch_P is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: Qsearch_P_0+Qsearch_P_1
jointed by string.
D-23

Qsearch_P_0: idle
Qsearch_P_1: packet transmission
l FDD GPRS reselection offset (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+ FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string.
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: Idle
FDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission
l TDD GPRS reselection offset (TDD_GPRS_Qoffset)
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0+ TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1 jointed by string.
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_0: Idle
TDD_GPRS_Qoffset_1: packet transmission
l PS MIN Ec/No of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_QminPS)
FDD_QminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode: FDD_QminPS_0+
FDD_QminPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_QminPS_0: Idle
FDD_QminPS_1: packet transmission
l Offset of FDD_QminPS (FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS)
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0+FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_0: idle
FDD_Qmin_OffsetPS_1: packet transmission
l PS MIN RSCP of UTRAN reselecting cell (FDD_RSCPminPS)
FDD_RSCPminPS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDD_RSCPminPS_0+FDD_RSCPminPS_1 jointed by string.
FDD_RSCPminPS_0: Idle
FDD_RSCPminPS_1: Packet transmission
l Measurement report threshold of Ec/No or RSCP (FDDRprtTho2PS)
FDDRprtTho2PS is a jointed field in database. Jointing mode:
FDDRprtTho2PS_0+FDDRprtTho2PS_1 jointed by string.
FDDRprtTho2PS_0: Idle
FDDRprtTho2PS_1: Packet transmission
D.5.6 UTRAN Handover Control Parameters

l UTRAN handover (ServiceHo)
D-24

Prefer to UTRAN handover 0
Don't prefer to UTRAN handover 1
Disallow UTRAN handover 2
According to MSC, default handover to UTRAN

first 3
According to MSC, default do not prefer to

UTRAN handover 4
According to MSC, default disallow UTRAN

handover 5
l FDD/TDD handover (FDD/TDDPrio)
Handover to FDD cell should be preferred. 0
Prefer to TDD handover 1
D.5.7 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters

l Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)
undefined 0
At same layer as this cell 1
Is upper layer of this cell 2
Is lower layer of this cell 3
D.5.8 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters

l Neighboring cell layer (NCellLayer)
undefined 0
At same layer as this cell 1
Is upper layer of this cell 2
Is lower layer of this cell 3
D-25

D.5.9 Frequency Hopping System Parameters

l Frequency hopping mode (FreqHopMode)
Baseband Frequency Hopping 1
Synthesized Frequency Hopping 2
D-26

Figures
Figure 1-1 Select Start NE Agent .............................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1-2 Select NE Management > Configuration Management......................... 1-3
Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface ....................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-4 Select Apply Mutex Right....................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-6 Successfully Apply Mutex Right ............................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-7 Select Release Mutex Right ................................................................... 1-6
Figure 2-1 Radio Basic Property Parameters ............................................................ 2-2
Figure 2-2 Others.................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-3 Channel Allocation Control Parameters.................................................. 2-30
Figure 2-4 Timer 1 Parameters ............................................................................... 2-38
Figure 2-5 Timer 2 Parameters ............................................................................... 2-52
Figure 2-6 GPRS Max Retrying Times Parameters ................................................. 2-75
Figure 2-7 GPRS Timer Parameters ....................................................................... 2-83
Figure 2-8 AMR Half Method Parameters ............................................................... 2-98
Figure 2-9 AMR Full Method Parameters .............................................................. 2-103
Figure 2-10 GPRS Property 1 Parameters ............................................................ 2-108
Figure 2-11 GPRS Property 2 Parameters ............................................................ 2-114
Figure 2-12 BVC Flow Control Parameters ........................................................... 2-124
Figure 2-13 FUC Flow Control Map Parameters ................................................... 2-132
Figure 2-14 EDGE Property Parameters ............................................................... 2-138
Figure 2-15 eMLPP Set ........................................................................................ 2-144
Figure 3-1 Basic Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell ............................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 GPRS Property Parameters for GERAN External Cell.............................. 3-8
Figure 3-3 UTRAN External Cell Parameters .......................................................... 3-23
Figure 4-1 Basic Parameters 1.................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2 Basic Parameters 2................................................................................ 4-15
Figure 4-3 Basic Parameters 3................................................................................ 4-30
Figure 4-4 Optional Parameters .............................................................................. 4-46
Figure 4-5 Cell Selection Parameters...................................................................... 4-56
Figure 4-6 Service Process Additional Parameters ................................................. 4-72
Figure 4-7 System Parameters ............................................................................... 4-83
I
Figure 4-8 Other Parameters .................................................................................. 4-90

Figure 4-9 GPRS Basic Parameters........................................................................ 4-95
Figure 4-10 GPRS Other Parameters 1 .................................................................. 4-99
Figure 4-11 GPRS Other Parameters 2................................................................. 4-108
Figure 4-12 GPRS Other Parameters 3 ................................................................ 4-123
Figure 4-13 GPRS Cell Options Parameters ......................................................... 4-135
Figure 4-14 GPRS NC Survey Parameters ........................................................... 4-145
Figure 4-15 GPRS Power Control Parameters ...................................................... 4-152
Figure 4-16 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ................................................... 4-157
Figure 4-17 GPRS Channel Parameters ............................................................... 4-180
Figure 4-18 EDGE Property Parameters ............................................................... 4-190
Figure 5-1 TRX Info Parameters ............................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-2 Channel Info Parameters ......................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-3 IP Parameters........................................................................................ 5-17
Figure 5-4 Panel Parameters .................................................................................. 5-19
Figure 5-5 Power Control Parameters..................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-6 Power Survey Parameters ..................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-7 Power Adjust Threshold Parameters...................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-8 Other Parameters .................................................................................. 5-38
Figure 5-9 GPRS Power Control Parameters .......................................................... 5-44
Figure 5-10 Handover Pretreatment Parameters..................................................... 5-49
Figure 5-11 Handover Level Parameters................................................................. 5-58
Figure 5-12 Handover Condition Parameters .......................................................... 5-68
Figure 5-13 Handover Control Parameters.............................................................. 5-76
Figure 5-14 Other Parameters ................................................................................ 5-87
Figure 5-15 Handover Arithmetic Parameters ......................................................... 5-95
Figure 5-16 Subcell Parameters............................................................................ 5-106
Figure 5-17 Basic Properties 1 Parameters............................................................5-111
Figure 5-18 Basic Properties 2 Parameters........................................................... 5-117
Figure 5-21 GPRS Parameters 1 .......................................................................... 5-148
Figure 5-22 GPRS Parameters 2 .......................................................................... 5-159
Figure 5-23 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters............................................... 5-169
Figure 5-24 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters (1) ................... 5-171
II
Figures
Figure 5-25 Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters (2) ................... 5-171
Figure 5-26 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters (1) ............................................. 5-187
Figure 5-27 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters (2) ............................................. 5-188
Figure 5-28 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ............................................... 5-202
Figure 5-29 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters ........... 5-205
Figure 5-30 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ..................................... 5-211
Figure 5-31 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters .................................. 5-216
Figure 5-32 Frequency Hopping System Parameters ............................................ 5-219
III
Figures

Glossary
3GPP
- 3rd Generation Partnership Project
AMR
- Adaptive Multiple Rate
Abis
- Abis Interface between BSC and BTS
BCCH
- Broadcast Control CHannel
BER
- Bit Error Rate
BSC
- Base Station Controller
BSS
- Base Station System
BTS
- Base Transceiver Station
CHR
- Call History Record
DSP
- Digital Signal Processor
DTX
- Discontinuous Transmission
FACCH
- Fast Associated Control Channel
FER
- Frame Error Rate
FUC
- Frame Unit Controller
GERAN
- GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network
GSM
- Global System for Mobile Communication
MR
- Meaturement Report
V
MS
- Mobile Station
MSC
- Mobile Switching Center
NSS
- Network Subsystem
SDCCH
- Stand alone Dedicated Control Channel
TCH
- Traffic Channel
TCP
- Transfer Control Protocol
TDD
- Time Division Duplex
TDMA
- Time Division Multiple Access
TRX
- Transmitter and Receiver
TS
- Time Slot
VI

ZXG10 IBSC (V8 00 20) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ZXG10 IBSC (V8 00 20) Base Station Controller Radio Parameter Reference

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ZXG10 iBSC

Base Station Controller

Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason

R1.0 20110130 First edition

Serial Number: SJ-20101208095348-017

Publishing Date: 20110130(R1.0)

Chapter 2 BSC Function Parameters........................................................ 2-1

Chapter 3 External Cell Parameters.......................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 Cell Parameters......................................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5 Cell Object Parameters............................................................. 5-1

Appendix A Value Range of Flow Control Policy ................................... A-1

Chapter Name Overview

Chapter 2, BSC Function Introduces the BSC function parameters.

1.1 Introduction to BSS Radio Parameters

Project parameters refer to parameters related to design, installation, and

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

1.2 Methods to Modify Radio Parameters

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-1 Select Start NE Agent

3. Click NE Management, the system automatically starts this NE.

Figure 1-2 Select NE Management > Configuration Management

5. Click Configuration Management, the system enters into configuration management

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-3 Configuration Management Interface

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-4 Select Apply Mutex Right

Figure 1-5 Information Dialog Box

Figure 1-6 Successfully Apply Mutex Right

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 1-7 Select Release Mutex Right

1.3 The Format to Explain Parameters

Table 1-1 Format to Explain Radio Parameters

Full name English parameter name on the interface

Abbreviation Abbreviation for English parameters

3GPP name Parameter name in 3GPP protocol

3GPP reference 3GPP protocol version number for parameter reference

Description Descriptive text for this parameter.

Managed object Involved object by the parameter

Value range of this parameter. If the parameter is in mapping form, actual

Unit Parameter unit

Default value Default value and its description on parameter interface

Online = After a parameter's value is modified, it is immediately synchronized

Relevant functions and features of the network that corresponds to this

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Parameters which have data restriction relationship with the parameter.

Relationship Dependency among related parameters

Related interfaces Interfaces related to this parameter

1.4 Precautions on Parameter Adjustment

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

This page intentionally left blank.

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

2.1 Radio Basic Property Parameters

SJ-20101208095348-017|20110130(R1.0) ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Figure 2-1 Radio Basic Property Parameters

2.1.1 DCS1800/PCS1900 Supported (FuncExt)

3GPP name None

3GPP reference None

Specify the frequency supported. It is unmodifiable after being created

Managed object BSC

Value range DCS1800, PCS1900

Default value DCS1800

Change mode Offline

Related features None

Frequency band (FreqBand)